Begin Reading

Table of Contents
About the Author
Copyright Page

Thank you for buying this

St. Martin’s Press ebook.

To receive special offers, bonus content,

and info on new releases and other great reads,
sign up for our newsletters.

Or visit us online at
us.macmillan.com/newslettersignup

For email updates on the author, click here.

 Foreword

I consider myself an open-minded skeptic. When my friends and mentors Ted Dekker and
Duncan Trussell recommended that I listen to the channeled teachings of Paul Selig, I
casually tuned into a podcast. Paul seemed like a humble, genuine guy. I noticed no
indication of bravado or any desire to wear the mask of spiritual master. It was when he
started the process of channeling everything became very interesting. He would quickly
mumble parts of a sentence and then repeat them again clearly and audibly. As I listened
further, I became more and more intrigued. The message that he was offering was, well …
impeccable. I had never heard a more salient expression of Truth from any spiritual
teacher, alive or dead. I was astounded. It was enough to put me on the path to discovering
more.
I immediately dove into his channeled books. That is when the teaching really started
to shift my perspective. I began to comprehend my own potential to grasp highly evolved
concepts. My experience with this work in a few short months had been more profound
than anything I had known prior.
I was determined to meet Paul in person. I invited him to come to my office for a
podcast at the Onnit headquarters in Austin, Texas. While Onnit is focused on the body
and the mind-set of peak performance, my personal passion is the expansion of
consciousness, and this often takes me deep into the unchartered realms of spirituality.
This was the start of a genuine friendship with Paul, and a dedication to learn as much
as I possibly could from the teaching of the Guides. I was fortunate enough to get an early
copy of The Book of Freedom, which took me even further in my understanding of my
questions of who I am, what I am, and how I serve—perhaps the most important questions
of any spiritual philosophy.
Learning from the Guides has not only taught me a great deal, it has also provided a
language for many of the truths that I have discovered from over twenty years of
experiential work. Everything I have come to know from my dedication to plant medicine,
breathwork, yoga, and meditation was all consistent with these teachings. The goal of my
personal work has always been to become free. Free to experience love and the bliss of
existing in true presence. Free to experience pain without the mental resistance that creates
suffering. Free to experience the connection to everyone and everything around me,
without judgment. Free to know myself beyond my personal history and identity.
So when Paul asked me if I would like to read his latest work, Beyond the Known:
Realization, and write the introduction, there wasn’t a moment’s hesitation. Not only was
that a great honor, it was a treat to get an early copy of his latest manuscript. This book is
the most audacious of the Guides teachings to date. It describes how anyone who chooses
can claim the true expression of who they are; what the Guides call the Divine Self, the
True Self, or the Christed Self.
From my personal experience it is important to take your time with the teachings.
Trust that your path will follow the perfect timing and teaching for you, and you alone.
And while you are in the process, recognize that just because you are doing this work, it
doesn’t make your path any better or worse than anyone else’s. Those are all judgments
that you can’t bring with you on this journey. We’re all together in the school of life.
I can’t say that after reading this book that I am a permanent resident of what the
Guides call the Upper Room. But I have gazed out of those sun-soaked windows for a few
moments, moments that in Zen Buddhism they would call satori. And having seen that
view, I find myself happier, less fearful, and much more abundant in love. I hope you have
the same experience. I have no doubt that you will.
—Aubrey Marcus,
New York Times bestselling author of Own the Day,
Own Your Life and founder and CEO of Onnit
The following are the unedited transcripts of recordings of channeled lectures delivered
through Paul Selig in workshops and seminars held in New York City, New York; Atlanta,
Georgia; London, England; Ann Arbor, Michigan; Rhinebeck, New York; Madison,
Wisconsin; Santa Barbara, California; Portland, Oregon; Seattle, Washington; Boone,
North Carolina; and Calgary, Alberta, between May 19, 2018, and August 26, 2018.
Prologue
DAY ONE

Now the ambassador of truth, come as you, will claim a world in a new vibration, the
ambassador of truth being the one who knows who she is and has affirmed her place in the
Kingdom, the Kingdom being the awareness of the Divine in all she sees.
The manifest world is more than a projection. In some ways, it’s the collective
agreement to be what it needs to be at the level of vibration that it has been confirmed in
by name. The names you have gifted things claim form—a chair, a rock, a tree, a roof.
These are all things that have been named that confirm the names they have been given.
But a treetop may be something other than what it’s been conceived of. A house may be a
house, not for man, but for clouds. Everything you see may be known anew from the high
vantage point where we intend to take you.
The right to be was gifted to you at the inception of your soul. The right to be cannot
be taken from you. It is not dependent upon the life you live, the adherence to rules, the
diplomas on the wall, the pedigree of birth. It is not dependent on what you have believed
yourself to be. The right to be is confirmed by the octave that you find yourself expressing
in, and by octave we mean the level of resonance and energetic accord that you have
bound yourself to. As we lift you, one and all, to the high room, to the high level of
agreement that can be understood and experienced while embodied, we will take you
where you can go for the sole purpose of realization.
“What does it mean,” he1 asks, “that we can know?” As long as the body is in density,
there are levels of awareness that will preclude you from admittance. But, as the body
expresses itself more and more in the high vibration, even those become apparent to the
eye. The reclamation of the Divine as what, in form and field, is the teaching you receive.
And, in order to enter the Upper Room, you cannot leave the body behind, the body that
seems to fail you, that doesn’t look as it should, that is riddled with cancer, or in fear of
what could happen to it. Nothing can be released until it is known. Nothing can be re-
known until it is first considered at the level of vibration that it has claimed for itself.
So we intend to bring you all, wherever you sit, whatever you sit as, to the level of
agreement that may hold you and support you in perceiving the self, in acknowledging the
self as an inhabitant of the Upper Room. Now, what the Upper Room is, in some ways, is
a creation. Everything, in fact, that exists and may exist or could exist one day is a
creation of consciousness. Nothing exists without this. So the idealization of the Upper
Room, while unnecessary, may support you only in one way. It is where you arrive to in
consequence of the vibratory accord that you have claimed an alignment to.
Imagine you have a jukebox and you punch two numbers in. A certain song will play.
The coordinates for the Upper Room are as present as thus, and you may return here
whenever you claim it. But to abide in the Upper Room is to maintain the vibration that
has brought you here, and not collect the old, the twigs of the past fires, still broken, and
attempt to ignite them in the higher place. The smoke from them will evacuate you
quickly. You only bring to the Upper Room what you carry, and what you don’t need will
be brought back to where it came from, in the oasis of this plane that has known itself in
all kinds of ways.
 The crisis you may face here, if you have to have one, is that what you seek as a small
self may not be found here. “Bring me to the place of no pain, to no awareness, or bring
me all awareness, as long as the awareness feels good.” From the perspective of the Upper
Room, you will actually be of benefit to your world, but you will also see with new eyes
what man has done to man, what humanity has wrought through fear, and how you have
claimed yourself as a small self as a separate entity from the Source of your being, and the
perils you have claimed for humanity and this plane of expression that you may call earth.
Now, as we sing to you—and by song we mean resonance, and the language we endow
with purpose, expression, and accord—we sing for you to bring you to us at the level of
agreement that you can adhere to. To bring you to the Upper Room simply requires you to
consent and to be lifted. To have the simple experience of it is to align the self to the
presence of what already is. You are not making anything happen. You are accepting what
is, exists, at the top of the stairway in the Upper Room. The claim you make, “I am free, I
am free, I am free,” as sung through the resonant field, is what will reclaim you here,
because this is the room of freedom where you are not bound by what you have thought or
consented to as a small being in consent with others who are consenting to the same.
“What does that mean?” he asks. Adherence to law. Adherence to the prescriptions of
time. Adhering to what you have been taught to expect at the denial of what is. These are
the things you no longer align to in the Upper Room. They are present in lower octave,
may be understood there, played out there, seen through there, and to see through means
to claim to completion. To align to the higher at the cost of the old is to begin to have an
experience of no limitation, of freedom beyond the known, beyond what you’ve consented
to as an individual living in a tapestry or an echo that is in fact a shared creation.
So when we do this with you, we do this for several reasons. Because we prefer to
teach now without the opposition that the small self likes to claim, we invite you to the
place where such opposition is not present because the fear that would be at its basis is not
present in the Upper Room. And, as we teach you here, and, as you learn here, as you are
reclaimed here, the seeking of justification for the old ways begins to peel from you.
Imagine shingles falling from an old roof, the attic is exposed, the Upper Room is
exposed, and there is nothing to separate you from the great sky beyond. The great sky
beyond. All that is of God and may be known as God exists all around you in the cloud of
love, the cloud of remembrance that supports you in lifting again and again to what may
be realized beyond the known.
The song we sing for you today, and will continue to sing, will be heralded in the new
text, Beyond the Known. And, as we sing it, as we announce the text in language, in tone,
we support you each in your reliance on the Divine that is you, that has always been you,
that can only be you, that is here, that is here, that is here.
As we lift you each to the Upper Room, where this class may convene again and
again, we offer you the opportunity to say, “No, thank you. I wish to abide in the lower
floors. I wish to stay where I have been in the resonant field of fear, in the opportunities
that fear brings me to learn in the old ways.” You may choose to stay where you are. You
are loved as you are. You cannot fail here. But, if you give it permission, the self
permission, to claim the truth of who you have always been, we will lift you to the new
classroom, and from here we will teach you.
When we count to three, we are going to invite you each to see a stairwell before you.
When you see the stairwell, we will invite you forward to climb the stairs that appear.
And, as the count of three is made, the energies that you require to support you in this
ascension will be called forth for you.
One. Two. Three.
See the stairway before you and allow us to bring you forth, to lift you to the Upper
Room. On the count of three, we invite you to climb the stairs, and with each step, you
may consent to the following:
One. “I am willing to release the idea of who I am or what I have been to receive the
new.”
Two. “I am willing to release the attachments I have had, or may still have, to what I
think I am or should be.”
Three. “I accept myself as worthy of this passage. Because I was born, I may be
known anew, and because I am sung in vibration through these words, ‘I know who I
am in truth, I know what I am in truth, I know how I serve in truth,’ I may receive the
gift of the Kingdom that awaits for me on the other side of this threshold.”
On the count of three, see a doorway before you, and as the tone we sing is sung, you
may join us in vibration and step over the threshold to what waits before you.
One. Two. Three.
[The Guides tone through Paul.]
Step over the threshold and be with us. Feel this, yes.
“I know who I am in truth.” (Say this.) “I know what I am in truth. I know how I serve
in truth. I am free. I am free. I am free.”
Be received by us. Feel what it is like to be at this level of expression. Be as you are.
Be as you are. Be as you are. Thank you, and stop now, please. Period. Period. Period.
DAY TWO

Now, when you ask us questions about what you want, you refer to the histories you’ve
had to determine what you should have, what should be aspired to, what you should want
because of the kind of person you are. The kind of person you are in evolution is evolving
beyond what you have thought, and, to claim the old, to predetermine the new, is to
sacrifice the potential that is awaiting for you. The determiner must be something other.
“What is required for my soul’s growth? What is needed for me to be myself in a true
way? What are the qualities I require to realize myself through?”
The small self’s desires or dictates, while present, can be re-comprehended, in some
ways, as what you thought you should do based on who you thought you were. Now, when
we come to you in realization to gift you with the Kingdom, we see you beyond the small
self. We don’t abnegate the small self. We don’t decide it shouldn’t be. But we know who
you are, and, because we do, we meet you outside of artifice, outside of the small self’s
requirements or predetermined ideas of how she should be met.
The agreement we make with you, each of you, if you wish, is that you will be known
anew—known means realized—in this encounter, and we say yes to you, one and all, as
you agree to be as you truly are. The small self’s desires may be re-understood, in some
ways, as what you should have done had you been the other person who did not have this
encounter. “I am the one who might have done this or that, claimed this or that, if it wasn’t
for the realization of who I am beyond the small self’s agenda and what she has invested
in, thought was so important, thought must be known by the small self as a determiner of
her fate.”
The teaching you receive today is not only moving beyond the known, but it is the
transparency of reality once you begin to lift beyond the artifacts of history, beyond the
claims made for you by your history, beyond the objects that have been used to claim a
reality that you believe to be real. The reality that you believe to be real, in some ways, is
a consolidation of thought, re-made and re-made throughout the millennia. And the
solidity you experience on this dense plane is very real, and of course not real at all,
because once you understand that the fabric of reality is not what you think or believe to
be, what you think is not what is, you begin to realize what lies beyond, what exists
beyond, what may be seen beyond the known.
Now, the qualifications required for this journey are your own consent to travel with us
to what lies beyond the known. And the agreement we make with each of you on this day,
in this encounter, is that you will be known beyond what you have esteemed or reasoned
with, what your mother said you should be, what the world expects of you. Now, in
translation, this means that what you think you are, and the claims you’ve made through
that expression in predetermination are actually moved.
Imagine that you have a board that is cluttered with objects. You don’t see what’s
beyond the objects because the clutter takes the place of what might be seen. The
idealization of the objects as reality claims you in an expression or in a co-resonance with
what is known at that level of consequence or vibration. When you lift above them, you
may perceive what is real, and in this perception you may begin to claim what exists in the
co-resonant field of the one who has moved to the Upper Room, the higher vista. The
clear landscape that presents to you is unfettered by the illusions of the small self and is
not determined by the cultural dictates, what you should want, or should aspire to, to be
who you think you should be.
Now, for some of you this means that the world that you have erected, decided should
be, must be at all costs, will be seen as what it has always been, an idea made into form
that may have been heralded by your parents, supported by your culture, agreed to by you,
and is now known in a new way—what was, what was created, what was believed to be
important that now has little consequence. There is a great gift in this realization, but only
if you are willing to release the old, to move to the new. If you seek to attach to what you
have created as a small self, the identity you use to greet your neighbors at the market, the
face you put on to appease the world, the ideas you think you should hold to agree with
those around you must be known as what they have always been, an acquiescence to
history that really bears no truth in your relations.
Our objective with you, as we are allowed, is to give you the Upper Room as a place
to dwell, and in this place your purview is known anew, your purview meaning what you
may claim, what you may be in accord with, what is available to you beyond the known,
beyond the small self’s agenda for you. Now, the transmission you are receiving is
happening in several ways. You hear the words, you read the words, you comprehend the
words, you have a relationship to their meaning. But the real energetic transmission that
you are in accord with is happening beyond the words, instilled in language, in tone, in
vibration, but not of this alignment to the earthly realm. In fact, what we are doing is
transitioning you from the reliance upon the old through the energetic structure we teach
you through so you may be in agreement to what exists beyond the known for the purpose
of knowing and claiming and realizing the self as you truly are, and, in fact, have always
been.
As we do not make you holy, but support you in your recognition of your own divinity,
as we do not make you happy, but give you the opportunity to choose happiness, as we do
not say no to what you may claim as a small self, but offer you the opportunity to choose
something much more beneficial to you, we sing for you, we sing with you, until the song
becomes your own and you are released from the prisons that you have erected—or
aspired to, even—that would contain you at the cost of what lies beyond the known. What
lies beyond the known must be understood by you, not only as your potential, but as your
true inheritance. And, as you say yes to what comes, the mission of your life becomes
crystal clear. It is not what you do, it is how you be, and the level of accord you align to is
what claims you in action if action is to be taken. So many of you aspire to enlightenment,
but it is still the small self who is seeking enlightenment, and the small self does not
become enlightened. She cannot. She does not exist in the realm of enlightenment. But the
Divine as you, who has come, who has come, who has come, who is here with us in this
encounter, is claiming you, is choosing you, is saying yes to you so she may know herself
as and through you, as he may know himself as and through you. And, in this agreement,
the plasticity of your reality becomes understood, and what may be claimed for you in the
higher realm may be agreed to as the aspect of you who can receive it is made known. In
truth, you are already in the Kingdom. There is an aspect of you that is already in
alignment to what we teach. The revelation is to the small self, that she is not in charge,
and, in this revelation or encounter with truth, in the unmasking of the personality self that
has known herself in fear or frustration or in solitary shame, the liberation that can be
available, may and will be known as who and what you are, is claimed anew.
We are your teachers as you wish us to be. We are not your saviors. We do not anoint
you and give you praise and make you special. We love you anyway, regardless of what
you choose, because how could we not? How could we not love that which is of like
accord? And we are as you in the ways you see when you understand that you are of God
and its perfect expression. As we know ourself in that alignment, we must know you as
well, and that is the accord, a-c-c-o-r-d, or a chord, a-c-h-o-r-d, as on a piano, that we
know you in. Because we sing to you from the high room, and because the music calls you
to us, you may sing along. You may sing as you wish, you may choose the song you sing
—you have free will. But in the Upper Room, where we will be teaching you from in this
new classroom we take you to each day, you are known as the one whose alignment
includes the participation of will to the high will that is here as well.
“What does that mean?” he asks. The idea that you are separate from Source with a
separate will that seeks to exercise its independence is comprehended anew. You do have
choice and will, but in the high alignment, because you are no longer choosing in fear,
operating in anger, making your sisters suffer by withholding from them, as you are no
longer angry at the life you have claimed, the will itself moves into participation and
expression as the Divine Self. The Divine as will, will be understood in this text, and, as
we continue these words, we wish to welcome you to the new text. This is its prologue,
and, yes, we will call it Beyond the Known. Period. Period. Period.
 PART ONE

The Upper Room

 1

THE RELEASE OF THE KNOWN

DAY TWO (CONTINUED)

Now, ask yourselves these questions: “Am I willing to be who I am at the cost of the old?
Am I willing to receive myself as I have always been in the Upper Room? Am I willing to
understand myself beyond the obligations I have incurred in this lifetime as a free woman,
as a free man, who is choosing the experience that she partakes in here?”
The dominion you have been given must be comprehended by you. Too many of you
like to think that things happen at you. “He did this thing to me.” “She took away my
will.” “I wasn’t consulted.” “I didn’t confirm.” “I certainly didn’t agree.” In some ways,
this may be so. But until you understand that you are authoring your experiences here for
the purpose of learning and evolution, you are going to conceive of the self as a victim of
experience. And, as we have stated prior1, you cannot be a master and a victim at the same
time.
Things happen in a life that we do not choose consciously, but everything that you
experience in a life, like it or not, agree with it or not, has been agreed to you at a level of
co-resonance. Agreed to is accurate. You agree to your experience on this plane, and, when
you live a life in confirmation of the expected world, the world you expect to see outside
your window each day, you will claim the gift of coherence with that world. You are in
vibratory accord or coherence with everything you witness or see and can even imagine.
Because your alignment is operating in this way, each thing you claim becomes
opportunity if you wish to see it this way. The small self does not wish to know this. She
would seek to confirm her experience through the lens of agreement of what she wants to
know or have confirmed. “My husband the philanderer, how did I choose that?” “My child
the drug addict, I certainly didn’t choose that.” No, you didn’t, but you are in energetic
accord to those things—a-c-c-o-r-d, a-c-h-o-r-d as on a piano—and, because you are in
accord, what you claim is operating in coherence, in some way, with what you have
chosen to experience or learn.
Now, if you understand that opportunity comes in very different ways, that every
opportunity may not look like one, but in fact is the gift of progression, you will begin to
perceive your life in some ways as a series or sequence of opportunities. If you dismantle
the structure of the small self—and by this we simply mean understand it for what it is, a
confabulation of ideas, things, ways of being known, things that have been agreed to—you
can also understand that what lies beneath that is the essence of your being.
When a chord is played on a piano, several notes are played at once to bring a desired
resonance or tone. The claim “I know who I am” is a note on a piano, or a note sung by
you in energetic accord; the claim “I know what I am,” again in energetic accord, a note
upon the piano or sung; “I know how I serve,” again a note in energetic accord or sung; “I
am free, I am free, I am free,” again a note in energetic accord or sung. As those notes are
played in simultaneity, they are expressed as you. Each note has meaning, may be played
independently, may be sung independently, but when they are all played at once the
vibration or tone is rather different.
He interrupts again. “But you say in truth. ‘I know who I am in truth, what I am in
truth, how I serve in truth.’ What is the meaning of that?” Truth is in some ways the field
that is being claimed, or, if you wish, the keyboard that the notes are played in. In the field
of truth, what is not true cannot exist, and this would include your ideas of who and what
you think you are that you would seek issuance of in the manifest world. As you move
beyond the old and claim the new, you begin to have the opportunity of seeing the affect—
with an “a”—of these claims upon the physical realm.
“Now how does that work?” he asks. When a chord is struck, the resonance of the
chord is in vibration and is, in fact, informing everything that it touches. If we were to sing
to you now without language, but in tone, the vibration of voice would instill within you
in the field you hold, even in the body, the texture and feeling of the sound. When the
chord is played through invocation or speech—“I know who I am in truth, I know what I
am in truth, I know how I serve in truth”—the claim is made in the resonant field, the
chord struck, the bells rung, and the implicit action of the tone in significance is to align
and attune you to the meaning of these claims. As what is true is always true—the claim “I
know who I am” as an aspect of the Divine, which is centered in the heart center as an
invocation; “I know what I am in truth,” which means the manifest of the Divine, the
Divine in manifestation as what you are, which is experienced in the body; and the claim
“I know how I serve,” again the expression of the Divine, which is experienced in the
energetic field—as these things are sung or stated or claimed, you strike the chord that
actually calls forth the action of the Divine upon the manifest world.
Now, the divine principle, which we call the Christ or the aspect of the Creator that
can be realized in form, is the principle here that operates in vibration. The claim “I know
who I am” is an invocation of the Christ, True Self, Divine Self, Eternal Self, whatever
you wish to call it; “what,” the invocation of the manifest Divine as the what that you are.
And your service, we have to suggest, which is being at this tone or level of vibration,
calls the principle of the Christ to the manifest world for the purpose of reclaiming it in the
higher octave.
Dominion, we have to say, is the realization that everything you choose, by agreement
or by vibratory accord, is made manifest in this field, this collective field that you share.
When you begin to operate as the True Self and use the directives that we teach you, you
become, in some ways, the manifest Divine. And by manifest we mean realized Divine in
form. Unless you have claimed form in the equation of the Divine, you operate in
separation. The example would be that the body that you have taken, in its divine
expression, operates in resonance or vibrational accord with everything else that exists in a
like form, which means all else in manifestation. How a world is made new is through the
transmission of the Divine Self into the manifest plane. As the Divine claims the Divine in
all it sees or witnesses, and the Divine as you is what we are speaking to, the form that you
see, the physical realm that you experience, is reinterpreted, re-known, re-conceived,
reclaimed as the Divine that is present and inherent in all things. If you can imagine a
flower that has never opened, and you call the flower rose, the petals unfurl and the rose
appears. Imagine that God itself is present in every human being, in everything you can
see, conceive of, or imagine. The presence of the Divine, once claimed, calls into
manifestation the inherent divinity in this thing you perceive, and claims it in vibrational
accord to the Divine Self, who has claimed it in witness. This is how a world is made new.
 Now, in prior teachings, we explained to you that when you claim the Divine in
anything or anyone, utilizing the words “I know what you are,” which simply means the
recognition of the Divine in form as what, the one you claim this for, or the thing you may
claim it to, will actually respond in an energetic vibratory echo that may be experienced by
you. In other words, when you claim a thing as divine and realize the divinity which is
inherent in it—and understand that to realize means to know—the thing will respond.
What you bless, blesses you in return.
Now, the resonance of your field is present no matter what you think. You don’t have
to try to be the Divine Self because the Divine Self as you is who you truly are. But your
realization or knowing of this is what claims you in participation to the action of the
Divine—the Word, if you wish—that is present in all things. As you have decided to come
forth individually and collectively to claim your inherent divinity, which means being as
the Divine Self, how you be informs the structures of the world that you have existed in. If
you can understand that the Divine as you in its expression is what transforms your world,
you will stop waiting for a savior to show up in a cloud and do it for you. The Christ has
come as each human being who aligns to it, and you don’t need to call it Christ because
the Divine knows no name and may be called any name and may be recognized as such.
As the Divine has come as you, it has come in the one beside you, the one you may
meet or may never meet, and your understanding of this, your comprehension of this,
claims you in union with the divine principle that exists in each human being. There is no
one born, there can be no one born, who is outside of God, because the idea of God itself
actually means the energetic infrastructure that informs all manifestation. Everything is
God because everything is. But the realization of divinity is what claims divinity into
bloom. Again, the rose. The petals open, revealing the bloom, when the rose is named.
Each of you who comes to us has actually been prepared for the work before you. You
give us your hands, you ask us to tell you what to do, and, instead, we say be. It is how
you be. It is how you be as the True Self that transforms your world. In the text you are
reading, you will be instructed, not only in how to be, but in how to stop trying to be,
because you cannot try to be as the True Self. And the operational word here, throughout
this text, will be allowance and receptivity to what already exists in the higher octave.
When we teach the Upper Room, which is the place you manifest from and realize
yourself in, we will give you some work to do. But if you understand this teaching in
truth, it is a teaching of being. The claims we have offered you—“I know who I am in
truth, I know what I am in truth, I know how I serve in truth”—are attunements in fact to
the high octave. While we will use them here as required, we also wish you to understand
that, finally, the invocation of embodiment, which is what we call those claims, becomes
unnecessary as you know who and what you are, and how you serve becomes its perfect
expression. The Divine as you knows who she is, knows what he is. She doesn’t argue for
it or against it. If you were to ask yourself, while standing naked before a mirror—“Am I a
man or a woman?”—you would know the answer and feel foolish for having asked. The
same is true in realization, which means knowing. “I know who I am” means “I am
realized as the True Self I am.” “I know what I am” in manifestation in form as the True
Self. “I know how I serve” as expressed in the octave of the Word. The Word, we say, is
the Creator in action that has come as you, as each of you, as you say yes to it.
On this day we claim that each one who hears these words, reads these words, may
know them to be true. And, in the articulation of the True Self that has come as you, you
may be reclaimed, recognized, re-known, and re-sung as the True Self that has come in
tone, in song, in being. And, as we celebrate you each, we commence with the work of
this text.
Thank you for your presence. Period. Period. Period.
(PAUSE)

Now, when you decide things, you are operating in your mastery. At whatever level of
engagement you have aligned to, you are the master of your choices and therefore
accountable to what you choose, and the ramifications of choice are very often your
teachers. When you choose in fear, when you operate in fear, you claim fear, and the
legacy of the choice will always be fear.
The opportunity here today is to re-decide that how you choose may be in alignment
with the Divine Self, the True Self, the Christed Self, the Eternal Self, whichever name
you wish to give it. This is done in two ways. The first thing you need to know is that you
are always choosing in agreement to what you conceive of as possible, and the list of
possibilities that the small self acknowledges is in all cases born in your comprehension of
history, what has been available, not what is now. Imagine you sit down to dine and you
take yesterday’s menu because you are used to it. They may have added items. There may
be a delicious dish you have never tasted, but you will not know it because you are
looking at yesterday’s offerings. The gift of the day is always the choice of the day.
Underline that, friends. The gift of the day is always the choice of the day. And, if you give
permission to align to the new through the claim “I know who I am in truth, I know what I
am in truth, I know how I serve in truth, I am free, I am free, I am free,” you may begin to
align to the upper classroom where the new may be revealed.
In the upper classroom, where we now teach you, the new is present, but at the cost of
the old. You may find your favorite dish in the Upper Room, but please do not be
surprised if what is available to you there may be something untasted, something you may
enjoy and learn through. The transition from choosing from the old to the new in equal
ways is a gift, but it must be understood. When you take an elevator between floors, you
understand that when you get off the elevator you are in a different schemata, a different
place with different things available to you. What is offered in the higher floor was not
available in the lower, so stop seeking it there.
As the one in choice in a new opportunity, you may encourage the self that is choosing
to be in the alignment to its greatest good. If every choice made is made in agreement to
one’s greatest good, there is no fault in choice. “Well, how do we know this? How do we
know if how we choose is of a great choice, a goodness, a new possibility in a high way?”
Very, very simply. It is not chosen in fear, and it is not chosen through thumbing through
the options that you had yesterday. Imagine going to dine and asking for the special of the
day. “What is the new thing available to me, and how may I experience it?” This is the
way to operate in the new way, in freedom of choice.
Now, once a choice is decided upon, you must be in a position to receive what you
have claimed. How is this done? Through agreement to receive it. Paul is seeing the image
of a car driving up to a window where you place your order into a machine. “I will take
two of these and one of that,” you may say into the speaker, and you have every
expectation of receiving what you have ordered when you pass the window of delivery.
That is expectation.
Now, when you operate in the high floor, there is less density, and, because you are not
choosing in fear, or in pride, or in greed, or in anxiety, or in doubt of your own worth, you
can expect to receive what you’ve ordered. He asks for an example. “I wish a relationship
that is supportive in every way. I wish to grow through this relationship with another in
love and passion and friendship and faith.” Well, if that is what you wish to order, you
must concede two things. It is available, and you can have it. Do you understand that?
Back to the drive-through window. “I would like the filet mignon and the lobster tail and a
side of drawn butter. I will have the finest wine in a bucket of ice and I expect to receive it
by the time I drive to the reception window.” The small self may place that order, but the
order is incongruous with what can be received at the fast-food diner. You go elsewhere
for that, where your expectation may be met. If you cannot receive what you have
claimed, be it the lobster tail or the perfect marriage, there are reasons why. You do not
believe you can have it, or the aspect of you that is asking for it is the aspect of you that
assumes she should get what she wants when she wants it, because, if she doesn’t, she is
unworthy. The equivalent of this would be, “I didn’t study for the test, but I expect the
damn A.” You must be prepared for what you receive, and the only way that this is done is
by agreement to what you can hold.
Now, dominion and the opportunity to choose is available to you at every level of
agreement, in every strata that you may experience. But the True Self as you will only
claim what she knows she can receive. She is not delusional. She is, in fact, very practical.
“For my evolution and for my development, I require this or that.” And the manifestation
of this or that may come swiftly, if, in fact, you are prepared. And, if, in fact, you are not
prepared, the preparation will ensue immediately.
You are all claiming a life that you are in coherence with. Coherence is another way of
saying alignment or accord. You are in coherence with the house you live in, the
neighbors, the people in the next town, the weather, and the news on the television. In fact,
you agree to all of it. You may not like it, but, because it is there, you are agreeing to it. It
is there because you are in a resonant field of receptivity. Like attracts like.
Now, you did not make the war. We will give you that. The individual did not make
the war, but the individual is in agreement to the war in several ways. The manifest world,
which operates in tone and vibration, is expressed in vibration with the one who witnesses
it. Some have said, “There is no world without the perceiver,” and, in fact, that is so, but
not in the way you think. The world is not the same without the perceiver. It is a different
world. The moment you are passed, the world is different because your claim of the world
and your alignment is elsewhere. You are claiming a different vibratory accord in a
different octave where the world exists in a very different way. The challenge for some of
you here is you don’t want to take responsibility for the world you see, the world in your
living room, your bedroom, and the world outside the window. Whatever you see, you are
in accord with, and that means your consciousness is informing what you see. What you
bless, blesses you. What you damn, damns you in return.
Now, the culture you live in has an issue. What you believe to be so that is not so is
confirmed again and again by those around you. “This is how we should live.” “This is
who we should value.” “This is how we should treat our brothers and sisters.” And you
announce these things collectively, and you bow to the collective agreement even when
the collective has agreed to an abomination. “We will treat our fellows like second-class
citizens.” “We will value money over goodness.” “We will see pride as the value and
diminish humility.” You will never enter the Kingdom without humility. The moment you
damn your brother, you have precluded entry. And, if money is your God, pray to it all day
long because that is what you’ve chosen. It will give you what money can give you, and
not a thing more.
The value of the Divine as you is that she knows these things. She is not swayed by the
whims of society, by the fashion of the hour, or the politics of the moment. The Divine as
you, who knows who and what she is, will withstand all change because her ballast is in
truth, and in truth a lie will not be held. You become the buoy that rides the wave while
others are covered and their remnants of their ideas of glory are washed to the shore and
hurled upon the sand.
To be the True Self doesn’t make you better than another, it makes you aware of who
another truly is, and, if they are in ignorance, you may illumine them, but to be ignorant
means you can be taught, and that is a gift. If you know everything, you knew it or you
assumed you knew it, you wouldn’t have incarnated. You are here to learn.
Now, choice in the higher room or higher octave that we will be teaching you in
simply means that the ramifications of choice in this way have a return, a dividend, a
ramification that is of the Divine. Do you understand this? Every choice made in love calls
forth love, and the lineage of love is forever after. Every choice made in fear claims more
fear, until the fear is withstood and reclaimed in a new way. In truth a lie will not be held,
and fear, the liar, would seek to have its way with you. Any choice in fear will not be
made in a high octave, because the gift of the high octave we intend to see you in is that
fear does not exist there. How could it not exist? Well, back to the scale upon the piano.
The low tones are present, but, as you lift in octave, one upon the other, the low notes
disappear. A low note in a high octave is still a high note—you understand the idea—and
the notes go on well into infinity. You may play the note C on a piano, but if the scale
went to infinity, if the piano keys extended throughout the universe, you would be playing
each middle C in every octave here until the end of time. You understand the teaching,
yes. The opportunity to choose in the high octave as the True Self is the opportunity to
claim what always is.
“Now what does that mean?” he asks. The man before you2 is holding his hands aloft
and calling things to him in a repetitive motion, hand over hand, as if the wheels of the
well are turning one upon the other. The Mudra of Creation is what we call this. As you
operate in the high octave, everything that may be claimed is claimed in the high octave.
Do you understand this? If you go from the cellar apartment to the twenty-fifth floor,
every phone call you make is made from the twenty-fifth floor. You call for the governess,
you get the governess who comes to the twenty-fifth floor, not the one who abides in the
cellar. She doesn’t take that call. Everything may be known and claimed in a new way
because everything that exists in the high octave may be known by you in your alignment.
The ramifications of choices made in love will be more of the same. The ramifications
in fear will be more of the same. What most of you do is you claim what you think you
can have, what you are allowed, what was on yesterday’s menu. The opportunity now is to
begin to conceive of the self in the high way that the True Self knows itself in. Would you
close your eyes, please, wherever you may be, and imagine for a moment that you are
beyond time, that time itself, as an idea, as an illusion, has no power over you. And, in this
place of infinity, anything may be known, anything may be chosen, anything that was
prescribed by time is no longer here. “I can have it next Tuesday, when I am ready, when I
know more, when I love myself a bit, when I don’t hate my partner, when I am done
worrying.” All of those ideas predicate themselves in an awareness of a clock. Later. One
day. Someday.
In infinity, the infinite now, these things do not exist. You are only as you are, and, as
you are, you be. Now, from this place of being, would you please make a claim:

“I am allowed to know myself in a new way. I am allowed to experience myself

beyond the known. I am allowed to claim my independence from what I have
believed to be true, from the structures I have inherited, from the world of wisdom
that I have claimed my ideas, what can be so and what cannot be. As I am
independent from the structures that have claimed me, I may now align to my true
potential, my unlimited potential that exists beyond the known. And, as I say these
words, I align myself to the anchoring of the Divine that has come as me.”

Would you say these words now, please:

“I am Word through my body. Word I am Word. I am Word through my vibration.

Word I am Word. I am Word through my knowing of myself as Word. Word I am
Word. I am Word through the realization of my potential. Word I am Word.”

Now, when you claim “I know who I am,” you are claiming the Divine Self. When
you claim “I am Word,” and the Word is the energy of the Creator in action through the
form you have taken, through the energetic field, and through the identity you have known
yourself in, you have prepared yourself for the manifestation that will ensue. The Word
made flesh has been a teaching in prior history. It is a true teaching. The Divine has come
in form as everyone, but very few seek to realize it. The density of this plane, and the
object of fear, which has been to replicate itself at all costs, has been preclusive to this.
But the Divine as you, who has come as you, is here to claim her true inheritance. And the
Divine as what you are, in the form that you have taken, is what we are teaching you now.
DAY THREE

Now, we come to you with good news. As the text unfolds, the answers appear to the
questions you’ve had, not only about your lives, but what it means to be alive, what it
means to be a being unfolding in Spirit and claiming a life in which to learn through. You
all come to us, you see, in an awareness of what you are. The Divine has come as what,
and the claims that you will each make as the manifest Divine will claim the world before
you in high alignment.
Now, when we take you to the upper classroom, the place we work from, we invite
you with us so you may come to know yourselves, not only as worthy of this place, but as
productive therein. A classroom is a place of learning, yes, and when we teach we
encounter you through your own willingness to be in unfoldment in a regard to what may
be known. Nothing can be claimed or will be claimed by any of you before you are ready
to receive it. And you must understand this, friends. While this is escalated study, while
we bring you up, what we do not do is grant you the degree prior to the study’s
completion. “What degree?” he asks. “Is there a test at the end of this?” In fact, there is
not, and the degree that you receive is in fact only your own awareness, realization if you
wish, of what you have always been in the upper octave, the upper classroom, the place
where we sing to you from.
Now, this instruction tonight is about releasing the known, and the requirements of
that, that you actually may meet on an individual level through aspiring not only to know
yourselves beyond what you think, beyond what you claim, but by your agreement that the
release may occur. Nothing will be taken from you that you require. You may need your
bad temper for some time still. It may serve a purpose in the world. There may be some
lessons to learn. We are not making you pretty or wise or any of the things you think you
might want. We are relishing the actualization of each of you as you come into your
awareness of the form you have taken as the vibratory oracle that in fact it has always
been.
“Oracle?” he asks. “Are we oracles?” In some ways, yes. As you operate in knowing,
which is, in fact, the product of this class and the text you are reading now, you become
the one who may not only know for herself in high regard, but realize for others as well.
The realization you offer others is the manifestation of the Divine as them in their
encounter with the beings that you are. Because you are beginning to operate in the Upper
Room in your everyday lives, everyone that you encounter, by nature of your being there
and your witness of them, may actually be known from that vantage point, from that
perspective, and your realization of them is what claims them anew and, in fact, lifts them
to be in accord, in echo, with your field. The oracle that you are is the one who knows and
can conceive beyond appearance to the divinity that is inherent in all manifestation.
Now, as you come to us with your questions—“Why was I so unhappy as a child?”
“Why don’t I find the mate I want?”—we have said before that your questions in most
cases are born out of the ignorance of who you truly are and, in fact, have always been.
And, once the comprehension is there of the Divine as you, the significators of old, the
memories of old, in fact, the imprinting of history upon your field is not only released, but
renewed, as the Divine as you is seen in witness to what was in truth. Now, if you
understand here that the Divine is present always, in all time or what you think of as time,
you will also understand that the witnessing of history through the lens of the Divine, or
from the higher purview, actually invigorates and realigns the template of history to be re-
known. Imagine this, if you wish. You see an old bed. It is worn out. The feather stuffing
is coming through the bunting. You think the bed is done, but the realization of all the
divine beings that have rested upon that bed actually transforms, not only your experience
of what you see, but the memory that you would hold of the thing. The bed itself, perhaps,
is existing in the past. You are not reclaiming it in present time, but realizing the Divine
that is present there in every fold, in every feather, and, in doing so, actualizing the thing
you see as present as the Divine in substance.
Now, he is confused by this teaching, so we will direct him to the room he sits in.
Everything that you see in this room was chosen by you at some time in history. This is
the room you thought you would like to live in. This is the couch you wish to sit on, the
window shade or the lamp that you said yes to. The requirements of the times you
purchased these things are no longer present, but the inheritance of that choice is present
here now. When you are frightened of something and you claim something in fear, your
relationship to what is chosen will always be fearful. Everything that surrounds him in this
room now holds the memory of why it was purchased, what perhaps it meant at the level
of consciousness he held as he attended to the purchase. When the Divine is known in the
present moment through historical data, the presence of the Divine is active in the moment
you stand in and the template of history is changed. When you say, “But that terrible thing
happened when I was so young,” your relationship to that thing in fact is transformed by
your realization of who and what you are and have always been. The key here is always,
have always been.
Now, if you understand that in the Upper Room wherein we teach, the Divine Self that
is present is not only created, but eternal, you are always this thing whether or not your
experience of it is such. The body you are in, or anyone may be in, is holy, regardless of
your awareness of your own divinity. The understanding that’s required now for this
teaching to unfold is that what you see is not only informed by the consciousness you
hold, but transformed by it. Everything you see before you that has been named by others
carries with it the resonance of the names given and the meaning the names have held. As
you begin to witness with new eyes and are no longer dependent upon history to teach you
what is, but to receive the information that might be gifted to you by what you see, not
what others have claimed it as, your relationship to the physical manifest world is altered.
We have said in prior teachings that the first thing humanity wishes to do when it sees
something it doesn’t know is to give it a name based upon the knowing it has held in
history. “That looks like a moth. It must be a moth.” “That looks like a cabbage. We will
call it a cabbage.” In no instance does humanity inquire to the new, “What is your name?
How do we know you? How am I to perceive you beyond the limited sense or even
vocabulary that I have operated with?”
The changes you see that wish to be born through you cannot be born through an
adherence to the old. It’s impossible, really, to become manifest at this level while you are
trying your damnedest to reinforce the ideas that you grew up with. “But this is
impossible,” he says. “We are indoctrinated. I see a wall, I call it a wall. I don’t call it
something else. How are we to attend to this teaching?” You can call it a wall, if you wish,
but if you allow yourself to experience anything, anything at all, from the perspective of
the Upper Room, how you will claim it and be in response to it will be markedly different
from your prior experience because, know it or not, as you have aligned to the Upper
Room, the quality of being, in resonance, is transformed by your occupancy. You are
trying to bring the old to the Upper Room, and there is no space for it.
Once you begin to abide in a high octave, the alignment you claim does not dismiss
the world you’ve known, but it reclaims you as the authority of it in a rather different way
than you may have experienced thus far. The crises you hold as a species, all informed by
fear, must be re-seen, not only as opportunity to learn and transform, but the opportunity
the species has to know itself beyond the known to claim the new potential that is ripe and
waiting for you all. Paul is seeing a piece of fruit dangling from a vine. It is within reach.
It can be taken. But as long as you are looking for the old—and to see the old means to
confirm what you have had and nothing beyond it—the opportunity for change, and for
peace, may well be lost to you all. The objective of this class is to release what you have
held that will preclude you from claiming the fruit, from claiming your divine inheritance.
And your dependence upon the old to be what you think it is, the photo album of history
that you select your experiences through at the cost of what might be brought to you, is
what must be seen as releasing. The gift of this class, for those of you who wish to receive
it, is the responsibility that lies before you each day to claim the unknown, the new
potential that has come as and through you.
Now, in our prior texts, we spoke very specifically about the innate purpose of the
Divine Self, the aspect of you that has come to realize itself as and through you. And we
have said that the objective of this aspect of self, or the True Self, if you wish, is to claim a
world into being. This is still true, and it is done by each of you in an energetic field that
you have aligned to that we are discussing now and claiming as the high classroom, or the
Upper Room, or the higher octave. They all mean the same thing. The responsibility of the
one who dwells in the Upper Room is to lift the world she sees to her purview, her
responsibility. You have been gifted with dominion, but you know dominion as the small
self. “I want the better job, the happier life, the things of this world that I expect should
make me happy.” The True Self as you, in dominion, is not lacking for what she needs.
She knows the gifts of the Kingdom are available to her because she is congruent with
them, but she is not grappling with fear, justifying her choices, making her neighbors
wrong, or climbing over the ones before her to find the success she seeks. In the Upper
Room, even the idea of competition is ridiculous. You may run a race together and enjoy
who gets there first, but the gift is being with your fellow as you run the race together, not
who runs off with the first-place medal. In the higher octave, there is no real graduation.
There is continued unfoldment.
When we said earlier in this class that you would receive what you could hold, that
you will claim what you are in accordance with, that you must be the one who chooses, we
are telling you something very simple. When we say that the Divine has come as you, this
does not abnegate responsibility for what you have chosen in form. In fact, it makes you
more accountable because what you see before you, in fact your entire life, has been the
product of your choices, high, low, and in-between. And the collective you live in, in the
lower sense, in the lower room, if you wish, is also benefiting from the outcomes of prior
choice. To become responsible simply means that the Divine as you can claim the divinity
in any encounter, in any being, in any situation, and, consequently, inform the vibration of
the thing you see with this new comprehension. In other words, friends, the world itself is
changed by your active presence in it, and, as you escalate in vibration, what becomes
available to you, again and again and again, is the opportunity to know who and what you
are at the cost of the old.
Now, as the old is released, as you release what you thought you were, believed
yourselves to be, said okay to—“I must be this because somebody once said I was”—you
create the opportunity to rediscover, reclaim, re-know the essence of Christ or True Self
that abides in you. We will say this for the new students. This is not a religious teaching,
and the Christ, the aspect of the Creator that can and will be realized as who and what you
are, is a principle and not a human being. The Divine as what, the incarnate Christ that has
come as each of you, is seeking its full expression for the transformation of the world you
share. There is no one Christ. The seed of the Christ is imprinted in the soul of every
being, and the agreement to manifest, finally, finally, finally, which is the purpose of
incarnation, happens when the individual has assumed herself, or realized himself, at the
cost of the old. The teaching “Behold, I make all things new” is a true teaching. The small
self doesn’t make anything new. She may repaint the wall, replant the garden, have a
wonderful time here. We don’t abnegate her. But we will say she is not the one who can
perceive the Divine that is inherent in all things because she’s operating still in the density
of the low octave.
The release of the old or the known that is a requirement here is a very simple one.
You must not only become willing to release the ideas that you have predicated your
experience on, but also your investment in what you believe to be so. Imagine you are
reading a book. You could start the book from the back end, from the middle, from the
cover page. You would not know, perhaps, how the story unfolded. You would put
together your own narrative, depending upon where you began the book. “I think it’s a
story about a prince,” although the prince did not appear until halfway through the book.
“I think it’s a story of a witch,” says the one who starts at the beginning. And the sleeping
beauty that may be central to the story is on a page you bypassed in your decision to claim
this experience in a random manner. The treatise here is that that is how you believe
yourselves to be. What matters is this or that, the career, or the family, or the idea itself of
realization, which the small self would like to assume as her purview. The small self is not
the one who achieves enlightenment. That is not what happens here. But, as she is
revealed for what she has always been, a construct, a compilation of ideas, behaviors,
predicated on instance or the ideas she’s had or inherited, what becomes true is what is
always true. The personality structure is a temporary experience, but the Divine as you,
the True Self, the Divine Self in her expression, is the title of the experience you begin to
have here. This comes, you see, at the cost of what has been. The book is understood for
what it has always been, a compilation of ideas and narratives strung together for learning,
or experiencing, or things to understand the self through that present as opportunity.
As the Divine unfolds as and through you, the Divine as what becomes present, which
is in fact the expression of the form that you have all taken. As the divine principle begins
to express in flesh and bone and in the energetic field, the octave you begin to sing in
becomes a transformer for what it encounters. The Divine as you, in form, is able to be in
co-resonance with the Divine in form that is inherent in everything you can experience
yourself with, see, and know. In the upper classroom, it will be revealed. And, as we take
you there in every chapter, in every opportunity we have to teach, in every classroom we
inhabit, we will be teaching millions in the etheric field that is shared by all of you. “How
is that possible?” he asks. Because each of you holds the template for this yourselves, and,
as you are in your worlds, in your divine expression, the product of your being, the
vibratory vessel that you are, is what awakens and reclaims all you see. You are the
ambassadors of truth, the ones who have come to know, and in your knowing you will
claim what has always been true. The Divine has come as all. No one is exempt. The
Divine has come as all.
We will complete this teaching for the text now, and we will answer Paul’s questions.
The prologue to this book was in fact begun the day prior to what you think. The issue you
have is you were not prepared for the beginning of the book, so when it came through you,
you were tempted to push it away. And, while we allowed you to in order to teach our
class, we are quite clear that the students need to know what the Upper Room is before we
take them there, which we do very quickly. The teaching of the book that we are bringing
through now—Beyond the Known: Realization, which you can call the subtitle—is a
mission of engagement that will be claiming all who encounter it in the Upper Room. We
are pleased to meet you there every week you wish to be with us, every day you read the
book, or when you think about us in the Upper Room and decide to join us for an
afternoon tea. Period. Period. Period.
DAY FOUR

Now, when we teach you what you are, we include form, the Divine as what, and for one
reason. As you exclude the physical self from divinity, you exclude your entire
relationship to the manifest world as divine.
Now, all things may be known as God, operating in different ways. You may not
approve of what you see. It may not align to your liking, but you must comprehend what
you see as of God. That does not mean to make it right, to praise it. If you see an atrocity,
you are not praising the atrocity. But you are aligning to what you see without excluding
the presence of the Divine that must be in every hair, in every blood vessel, of the ones
you see before you.
As each of you come into a higher awareness, you actually become responsible to
what you see and how you hold it in vision. What you claim as holy will sing its response
back to you, and, in that union, you become very aware of the presence of the Divine that
is in all you can see. When you deny the Divine in anything in manifestation, you deny
your own participation in divinity to what can be known. Underline the word can. What
can be known or realized is always present in an adherence to what you may agree to, and,
if you deny the Divine in what you see, you deny your coherence with the inherent
divinity that must be there. Underline the word must. It must be there because, if it is not
there, it is nowhere, and you can’t claim God only in those things that you agree to, that
you would praise, that you would sanctify, because your comprehension of what you see
when you do those things is always present in the remembrance of what things have been.
To explain further: If you decide that the thing you think is pretty must be holy and the
thing you think is abhorrent must not be, you are claiming beauty through the idea of
beauty that you have inherited. You create a schism in the scale between what is beauty
and what is abhorrent, and you claim the divinity in what you want, and exclude it from
what you do not. When you do this, you participate in an equation that the separation of
earth and sky must continue. When we say earth and sky, we mean form and spirit, but if
you understand that what you see as the sky is enveloping all things, even if there is a
wall, what you know of as sky exists within them. The idealization of separation must be
contended with because you use it against the self and against the potential that seeks to be
claimed through each of you.
As you witness your fellows, as you see them as they truly are, the divine inheritance
that has come as who you see, you are claiming what is true—not being idealized, not
someday, somehow, but what truly is. In the manifestation that they have taken that is
being recognized by you, the acclimation to the higher can be claimed by the one who
witnesses. The Divine as what you are, in the witness of the one who is, claims the
divinity that is inherent as them. And the manifestation of it, the claim you have made in
form—“I know what you are as a divine being, I claim the form, and the being who has
taken form, in its true nature”—reclaims them beyond the things that they may have
known or thought they were that would, in fact, be contrary.
If you decide that the one you see before you is worthy of God, all except for this or
that, you have bifurcated the one before you. Half is in heaven, half is in hell by your
decree. Now, in union, the Divine as you in union, which is where we intend to take you
here, the concept of duality is in fact erased. Yes, you have night and day, male and
female, this or that, but they are all of the same Source and simply being expressed in
different ways. What you call good and evil in fact are the same. Some of what you claim
as evil is your decision of what evil must be. But the good you see is also the same. If you
can imagine that they are the same, but exist in a spectrum of high and low, you can
understand that what is seen today as a horror in time may be re-seen, or re-
comprehended, or re-known in a high way. When the one that you are, who knows who he
is, who knows who she is, who has claimed her true divinity, witnesses the thing she says
is abhorrent, she has to realize what exists beyond it, because the Divine as who you are
can only see the Divine in what she sees.
“Now, what does this look like?” he asks. “If I see something terrible, do I say it’s
pretty?” You actually deny what you would claim in horror and instead move to a higher
realization that the Divine is present in what you see. You are not making it good or trying
to put a Band-Aid on it. You are not spraying it with perfume and praying that the smell
dissipates. You are claiming the expression of the Divine that must—underline that word
again—must express at any level, even in the low vibration or what you would claim as
the denial of God. “God could not be there in that terrible thing.” The vibration that is in
all must be present, and your awareness of the presence of the Divine in what you see is
what calls it into flower. The world is changed this way.
Now, he has many questions. We assume you do as well. And, while this is not a
comfortable teaching, it’s a required teaching for those who go on this journey. The
realization of the Divine in whatever you see claims into manifestation the Divine that is
already present. The Divine as you, in witness of what he or she sees, is in reclamation of
the Divine that is in all.
Now, the world you live in has gone into many agreements, many ideas of what is
good or what is evil. You really don’t understand high and low and in-between.
Everything you claim is being claimed in an agreement with what you believe or can
claim into expression. You are not able to claim into expression or manifestation that
which you cannot conceive of. In fact, you would not even see what could be present in
the higher octave before you, because you cannot lift to it and to the view which makes
you commensurate to the thing witnessed. The objective here is to show you how to lift in
this Upper Room, but you will not do it when you are claiming the filth or despair or
decay that exists in the lower. This is not done through denying what you see. It is done
through claiming what you see, claiming the inherent divinity, and then lifting it, by nature
of the claim, to where you may perceive in the high way, from the high vantage point.
Imagine there is a room that you sit in. You understand the room as encompassing you.
You exist within the room in the comprehension that this room you exist in exists where
others are in a field of expression. There are things beyond and above, and below as well.
From where you sit, you may only be in communion with the level of vibration that you
can attend to. If you wish to suffer, you may resort to the old, go back downstairs to where
suffering lives, and learn those lessons there. Or, if you prefer, you can claim that your
lessons are sent to you in the Upper Room where you may receive them. The difference
here is that what you claim in the Upper Room will be known by you, or realized by you,
at the level of expression or divinity that you have aligned to. If you deny the Divine in
something other, you have denied it in yourself, and you have rushed downstairs to have
that experience.
Now, each of you who comes to us in an awareness of who and what you are—who,
identity, and what, the manifestation of the Divine in form—has the ability to claim into
form that which exists in the high octave. That is not done through denying what you see.
It’s realization, and circle that word please, that calls this into being. Realization is the key
here. To realize the Divine in the murderess is to claim the Divine where perhaps it has
been denied. You can claim the Divine in what you see and know it to be so, and we will
promise you this: When you claim the Divine in who and what you see, they will claim
you back in what we have titled as “the echo.”
Now, the echo, the reverberation of the Divine that expresses in form, can be known
by you in any instant. The claim “I know what I am”—and, again, know means realize—
supports you in claiming the what that another is, the Divine that has come in form as
them. And, as you claim “I know what you are,” you are actually claiming them, not as the
small self would assume them, but what the Divine Self would know to be so. The Divine
as you is incapable of denying the Divine in anyone else, and when she claims the Divine
in another, the one that she sees reclaims herself, and the echo of this in the vibratory field
will be seen by you, or felt by you, or known by you as waves of vibration testifying to the
Divine that has been claimed.
Imagine, if you wish, that you have a small child who believes himself to be stupid.
Your claim of the child’s brilliance makes the child smile. You are not making him
smarter, you are claiming the inherent brilliance that the child holds. In that claim, the
child responds. When you claim the Divine in anyone or anything, you realize it anew.
“Behold, I make all things new.”
Now, the teaching you are receiving tonight in beyond the known and releasing the old
ideas is about what you need to move forward to the next stage of this teaching. If you
understand, first and foremost, that so much of what you battle is ideology, so much of
what you fear is what could be, and so much of what you deny the Divine in is what you
have been taught to fear, you can begin to understand that the indoctrination that you have
received here on this plane of expression has diminished your potential to reach beyond
the known to what else may be understood and received. And our intent for you is that, as
you release the ideas of what things have meant, what it meant to be a widow, what it
meant to be impoverished, what it meant to be so angry or so afraid, as you release these
ideas, you can begin a reclamation of who and what you are beyond them. Underline the
word beyond. To exist in the high octave is to exist beyond these things. You are having a
mortal experience, yes. You may laugh or cry, if you wish. But you are not denying the
Divine that has come as you or as anyone else.
What would it be like if, for only five minutes, you existed beyond fear, in a place with
no fear? The Upper Room holds no fear. Spend five minutes a day here and get used to it.
What would it be like if there was no fear, if the idea of fear itself that has been
perpetuated throughout the millennia was not there? What would you see and what would
the world be like? From the window in the Upper Room, you see a world beyond what it
has claimed, beyond what it has known, beyond what it has thought it must have. And the
agreement you make tonight, if you wish it, is that you may know, you may claim, you
may partake in a world that exists beyond the claims made before you, beyond what
you’ve thought should be or must be by prescription, by agreement to the old.

On this night we claim that all who hear these words may know themselves anew,
may claim the requirements for their own growth, may testify to a world that exists
beyond black and white, night and day, and the bias that you bring through your
attachment to history on what things should mean. On this night we say yes to the
potential of each of you, re-known, re-said, reclaimed. “I know who I am in truth. I
know what I am in truth. I know how I serve in truth. And I have come to claim a
new world into manifestation.”

As we say tonight, the work is done already in the high octave and is now being
brought forth for you each to comprehend. We invite you to do an exercise with us.
Imagine, for a moment, that the worst thing that you can imagine is before you, and take a
moment and see that what you are seeing is an idea invested by history in what has been
or what should be. The worst that can happen is always just an idea. Now, as you do this,
decide something new. The Divine is present in what you are seeing now. Everything
before you can be re-seen and will be re-known in the high octave that you are seeing as
and from. The Divine has come as you, and with your permission we will invite you each
to see what you see, that worst idea, as God sees it, and manifest a new vision. The Divine
is present in all things. The house eaten by termites is of God, the termite is of God, and
the ruined structure that will be re-known in a new form one day is of God as well. The
ideas that you have been taught about what God should be must be re-understood. The
idea of good and bad, duality itself, are remembrances of fear and greatness. But, if you
understand that in the high octave fear does not align to you, and all may be known in a
new way, you will begin the first step in aligning to the True Self as the Word.
We will end this chapter now. We will call it “The Release of the Known.” We will
thank you each for your attention.
 2

I KNOW HOW I SERVE

DAY FIVE

Now, some of you decide what you should be, based upon the agendas that you’ve
inherited. You define yourselves by your achievements, how the world perceives you, and
you direct your lives to fulfill a prophecy of what you think you should be. “I will be
happy when I have received this or that, afforded this or that, claimed this or that.” And
the lives you live become a testimony to idolatry. And what we mean by this is the
acquisition of things, the claim of power or assertion of power over others, becomes an
objective which is not the True Self, nor would it ever be. You may claim a good life.
Anything may be known as the True Self. But what the True Self requires is its realization,
and anything that stands before that is an anathema to the Divine Self.
Now, when an obstacle presents itself on your path, you have an opportunity to
comprehend it, see where you have chosen it or why you have it, and then dismantle it.
But you dismantle the structure by realizing what it has been, simply an idea that you have
gone into an agreement to. You have asserted its meaning and agreed with the collective
that it’s what you should have or be or do. The definitions you hold about what success is
must be seen by you for what they are—inherited ideals, emblems, directives that were
chosen by others that you ascribe meaning to. What you give meaning to, you empower,
you justify, and then you create in accordance to. What it means to be a man or a woman
becomes a directive that should be fulfilled through the agendas that you perceive or have
claimed to be meaningful.
Now, when we teach you, we see you as you are, beyond the small self’s decisions for
what she should be, and we ascribe meaning to only what is true. And your definitions of
truth must be understood as having been acquired for you throughout the millennia. We
will redefine truth if you wish. What is true is always true, and anything true will always
be true. It is true we are here with you today, in this moment. We will always be here with
you, in this moment. We will not always be here, nor will you, as the moment passes. But
it is true, in this moment, throughout your perception of time, we will be here in regard
with you in instruction.
Now, tomorrow you may be someplace other, and, in that moment in time, throughout
the history of what you know of as time, you will always be imprinted there. It is always
true that you are where you are in the moment you stand in, even if where you are is only
comprehended by the small self in a physical reality, although you are present in multiple
strata. It is not always true that we are with you, or you with us. It is not always true that
you are male or female, or what you think you are, or your profession, or the color of your
eyes or complexion. You are not the one you think you are. You believe yourself to be
what you thought you were, and the thought of being as you has accrued evidence through
your magnetic field to justify your ideas. You are always being coached in some way to
define yourself through your interchanges, your realization of who and what you are in
benefit to others, in exchange with others, but the coaching you receive is always a
reinforcement of what you have believed yourself to be. Now, as you move beyond the
known to the True Self who is always present—underline always—regardless of the color
of your skin, or your gender, or the name you were given at birth, the True Self is always
true, and the manifestation of it as who and what claims the Divine as the fabric of
expression.
The tutelage you receive here is coming in increments, as you can comprehend it, and
we only teach to the assembled as they may be taught. To comprehend truth is to come
into an awareness that the transitory nature of a perceived reality is simply an illusion
being justified through the collective idea of what should be. Now, when we say illusion,
we are not suggesting that it does not exist. The illusion you live in is real, but it is
premeditated through conscious thought in the collective realm. The agendas that each of
you hold for the world you live in, and have lived in for thousands of years, create the
form, justifies the form that you have chosen to experience. What exists beyond this realm
in higher octaves is the fabric of reality expressing itself in different ways, the sum total of
all you may experience as God. But the sliver you experience here is God as well, and,
once you realize it is God, you begin to experience in a very different way. The occasional
idea that what you see may be holy, because all is holy, is in fact re-comprehended to the
realization that the Divine in scale is always present, and may be perceived at any moment
as what it has always been. The illusion, then, of form itself becomes somewhat elastic to
your presence. Understand this, friends: The Divine as you, in its encounter with the fabric
of reality you see, claims the landscape that you express through in the higher octave that
you know yourself through. In other words, your very presence on this plane reclaims the
presence of God, which is inherent in all manifestation.
Now, to experience this is to allow yourself to be comprehended as of it and not
separate from it. You must understand this. If you are separate from it, you cannot
comprehend it because it is not of you. But in realization—and we underline that word—
of who and what you are, you become of the fabric of the Divine that is as you and is as
all things. In this union of your expression, which is known through the claim “I know
how I serve,” the vibrational field that is you, in its connectivity to the manifest world,
sings into being the Divine that is inherent, and you experience it as what exists, has
always been, and will always be true. As the Divine as you is true, no matter what you
think, how much you would deny or refute, the same must be so for everything you see.
As everything you see is in tone and vibration, you may meet it in the tone you express
through, and the tone you express through as the Divine Self meets what it sees in
alchemical ways. The idea of the Divine expressed in form is the definition of true
alchemy, and the manifestation of form and the transmutation of it to the degree we teach
in form is the manifestation of Christ in man.
Now, again, the term Christ, the aspect of the Creator that can be realized in material
form, must be comprehended as the infinite reality that form may know itself in—as of
God, in God, as all things must be at this level of comprehension and tone. And the idea
that what you are in form and field can be claimed in this way has been called heresy, and
will be called it again as you continue this, but you must understand that true heresy is the
denial of God, not the manifestation of it. If you are not of God, what are you then? If
your skin and bone are not of God, what are you then? If the mind you hold and express as
is not of God, what is it then? The realization of these things as the Divine, as of the great
Divine, must be the key here. And it is the key, has always been the key, to enter the
Kingdom. The Kingdom—again, the awareness of the Divine in all manifestation—is in
fact the expression of the higher room. The plane of experience in density that you chose
to incarnate in is present in all ways, but the Divine is present as and through it, and your
realization of it is what reclaims you and your birthright to be the one who may claim
truth, or the presence of God, in what she sees. The word what is intentional here. Because
the landscape you express in knows itself through form, you must attend to form in its
holiness. Imagine a rock in your hand. The rock has predated you, will outgrow the form
that it has taken one day, be reduced to powder, and dust in the wind. To know the rock is
solid in the moment you stand in is to idealize the rock as it is in the moment. To
comprehend the rock as of God, and the rock being the shape the rock has taken, the name
the rock has used, the being that you see yourself in accord to the rock, is also to
comprehend that the rock is only a rock because that is how you know it, perceive it, and
claim relation to it. When the rock becomes dust, your relationship to the rock has also
been transformed. If the dust itself is made of the same stars that you are, is of the same
water and air that you are, you are not so different than the rock, although the form you
have taken heralds a different song.
Everything is in tone in the universe. Everything is in motion. There is no stasis here.
And your perception of stasis, that the rock is solid, that the stars in the sky are solid, are a
limited objective or view you may hold. As you comprehend that you are tone, and tone in
vibration as expressed as you, you begin to operate in a landscape that is also in tone, and
your song, the Divine Self in vibration, through the claims we have given you, actually
alter the fabric of reality that the small self has known. When you work with us and you
work with the intentions we support you in, you reclaim, not only the self, but the
landscape you express through, and the tone we make when we sing through Paul in
octave and sound creates a template that you may enter into.
Now, if you are reading a text and we are toning, the sound of the tone is actually
imprinted in the text in the vibration we sing in, and all you need to do is set the intention
to meet us in tone, and you will be with us. Because we are eternally here in this moment,
you may meet us here eternally—in a millennium, in a million, it matters not. In this
moment, in this dictation, we are always here, and we are always singing. As you meet us
in tone, and the sound we sing is met in your field through this encounter, you are met
beyond language and beyond the meaning that you have endowed things with. And,
because of this, in that instant of doubt, of prior meaning, in the empty space between
words where our song may be sung, you may experience the infinite where you are known
beyond form, with or without the body or identity you have used to navigate a reality that
you chose to enter and are now choosing to move beyond. In this eternal now that we sing
to you in, you may claim yourself in eternity because the moment of eternity is present for
you each within the sound, within the octave, within the note that is sung. And the
testimony to this will be your experience of the self beyond what you know of as time.
Time itself, the illusion of time, may be known in a new way as you step up and join us in
song.
On the count of three, we will sing through Paul, and we invite you, wherever you may
be, wherever these words are heard or read, to join us in sound. All you need to do is set
the intention to meet us where we are and allow the sound of Ahhhh to come through your
being as your full expression. One. Two. Three.
Ahhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh. Ahhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh. Ahhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh.
Now, as you are. Be as you are. And be received by us in the fields you hold, in the
ideas you have claimed, in the thought of being, and let all that is not true be released from
your field. The claim we make for you now, “I know how I serve,” is its own attunement.
And, as you claim this, you align the energetic field to the note that has been played as
you. It is the claim “I know how I serve” that transmutes reality. This is not done by the
small self, nor could it ever be. The Divine as you, in its expression, is what claims the
world anew. When you say these words, say them in reverence. The Divine as you is the
true speaker, and it is the Divine as you who says the words, “I know how I serve.” When
you claim this, you will feel the alignment in the energetic field. Paul experiences it as a
lifting in form, but what it is, in fact, is the expression of God in truth surmounting its
reality to express beyond the known.
“What does that mean,” he asks, “surmounting its reality?” The qualifications of the
dense field you have inhabited in some ways have precluded the expression of God in
form from your experience. To understand the vibration of the rock or the tree or the
ocean, to perceive everything in its true being, in its vibrational echo, is the gift that comes
through this attunement. When you have claimed, “I know what I am,” you have claimed
the inherent divinity of form. When you have claimed, “I know what you are,” to another,
you have realized or known the Divine as form as them. In the claim “I know how I
serve,” the alignment you hold, the key that is played on the musical instrument you are,
reaches to all it sees, can imagine, or conceive of as the vibration of the Divine as
expressed as and through you. And, by nature of being—underline the word being, it is
not doing, but being—you encounter your reality and transform it through your presence.
The claim “I am here, I am here, I am here,” which we have given you in prior texts,
opens you up to the divine potential as you. The claim “I am free, I am free, I am free,”
which we have given you, claims you beyond the normality, the restrictions, the
governances that you have utilized to shepherd you in an illusion. To be liberated from
this, to be reclaimed as who and what you have always been beyond the known, is the gift
of where you stand today. And the claim “I know how I serve,” which we will expand on
in subsequent chapters, will be what claims you in participation to a new world.
We will say this for Paul. Indeed, this is in the text. It is the beginning of the chapter “I
Know How I Serve.” We thank you each for your presence.
(PAUSE)

Each of you decides, and has decided, that you will ascend to the Upper Room. You have
all said yes, but what does this mean? What are the requirements for sustaining the
vibration that can be held here?
Now, if you understand that the manifestation of the Divine that is the True Self is
available to you in form, you will stop seeking to go someplace else. The Upper Room is
where you are, as you know who you are, what you are, and express the self in service.
The manifestation of the Divine that has come as you has its own requirements for
sustenance. If you deceive yourself in these requirements, you will find yourself de-
escalating rapidly. And, while this is not a problem—but, again, an opportunity to learn—
you may choose to decide that you may learn in other ways.
The first requirement we would offer you is compassion to the self that is undergoing
change. If you are deciding that the small self should not be the little dictator, as you call
it, you will ascribe power to it, when what it requires is compassion. Accumulation of
information that has claimed the personality self is dismantled, in most cases, in pieces,
and the dismantling of the small self you may see as the release of armor that you have
held on the body that seeks release, and will do so as it feels safe to do so. Once you
understand that true safety is at the heart of this realization, that safety is only known in
the Divine Self or in your relationship to the Divine that comes through the Christed Self,
you may receive the gifts that are available to you there. While you are fighting the world,
you may seek the armor as a necessity. When you understand compassion does not
necessarily mean agreement, you may find it easier. You hold compassion for the one who
struggles. You seek to teach him or her perhaps a better way to engage beyond the struggle
they have known themselves in. You need not yell at the one who is learning as best he
can. You support him in change, and in compassion.
The second thing we will suggest is that you need not yell or emblazon your glory
publicly. As the Divine as you presents itself, it does so in humility. You need not shout
your name because your true expression, which is the energetic field propelled forth in
consciousness, is what does the claiming for you. So do not seek glory for your work.
Work in humility, and diligently, we would say, on behalf of the True Self, who will
always instruct you in your requirements for growth. This is done in the life you live, and
the opportunities that present themselves to you will be the ones you claim and learn
through and benefit from.
The third thing we would suggest that you need to require is responding to the events
of the day in the day they occur. Do not take yesterday’s baggage into today, or you will
find yourself back in yesterday, and stay away from tomorrow except to presume it to be
what you need in benefit for your growth. Every day becomes an opportunity to know
who and what you are, and who others are as well, and let this be enough. Do not dwell in
the past or predicate your safety upon a certain outline of a future that may or may not
come to be. The teaching of the day is the teaching the soul requires. Tomorrow will
present itself in its own perfect way.
The next thing we must say is, do not act in fear or judgment of your fellows. When
you fear your fellows, you have decided for them. Now, Paul has a question about this. We
must take it. “But what if somebody wishes me harm?” Well, then, don’t fear them, but act
in a precaution of what they may do. You need not act in fear to step away from a blow
that is coming your way. In fact, what the fear may do is keep you running long after the
running is needed. In most instances, aggression against another is a fear-based act, and
the one that is your aggressor is responding in fear. To realize the Divine in them is to
bless them beyond the fear they hold. To bless another is to realize them as in the presence
of God. It is a gift you give to anyone at any time, and to do so is to lift them. When you
fear another, you give them authority. To give another authority is to make them your God.
If you are frightened of them, you have invited fear to be your God in the mask it has
taken as the one you are afraid of.
To re-establish yourself in the upper octave when you have been in fear will always be
a choice you make. But what you must not do is predicate these acts upon the supposition
that you are running from something in the lower. “Oh dear, best to get back to the Upper
Room. I will be safe there.” You are safe there, but please, friend, remember: The Upper
Room is where you are and nowhere else, and how you serve in the Upper Room will
always claim you as you require it. To return to the safety of the Upper Room is to know
that you are safe where you are, because as God is as you, God is as with you in all
requirements in the landscape you unfold in.
Now, when you deny the presence of the Divine in yourself or another, and you may
do this in many ways—through anger or fear, unforgiveness of the self or others—as you
choose these things, you also create the opportunities to release them. So understand, the
answer to every problem is present within the problem. To justify the problem, to
announce it as real, is to reclaim it. To realize the problem is the illusion of the small self
claiming itself in form gives you the immediate opportunity to re-see or re-know or realize
the thing you call a problem as an opportunity to develop, to know anew.
The requirements of the soul are brought to each of you as you can meet them, and not
a moment before. Nothing will ever come to you that you must say is too much for you to
encounter. By nature of your encounter with it, it is enough, and it is within you to meet it
in an awareness of the True Self. The development of the soul through incarnations is the
opportunity you claim when you incarnate in form. By the realization of the True Self as
you, you do not denounce the lessons that the soul requires, but perhaps you will meet
them in a rather different way. The Upper Room, or the classroom we teach in, is full of
opportunity to learn and grow. You may learn in a battlefield, or you may learn in peace.
The objective of each is to teach. But in some ways, you decide how you claim your
lessons.
Finally, we have to say, in the Upper Room what you require will be brought to you.
You don’t have to beg for it. It doesn’t work that way here. Understand that in the high
vibration, there is less density, and, if you require love, or to know yourself in familiar
ways, if your soul is asking for this or that, you can expect to be met in ease and readiness.
In the lower vibration, where you are more dense and affirm density through your fear,
you may expect it to take much longer. If you understand that you no longer need to beg
for what is yours, you may become the recipient of it, and the alignment you require to the
Upper Room, which we take you to again and again, is made known to you through the act
of being. The act of being simply means that who and what you are, and in your
expression in an encounter with the world, becomes your way of being and learning and
expressing for the benefit of all.
Now, some of you wish to have a map for the future. Will humanity kill itself? Will it
survive? Will the fighting on the planet cease, or will it continue? We will have to say this
to you all. In some ways, where you view the world from informs the world. Imagine in
the Upper Room there are windows on everything you see. The one who views the world
from the high window can lift the world to it, can be met in new sight, in the visage of the
world she may claim here. The opportunity now is to claim the world into being in the
high octave you abide in. This will be manifestation. And one of the texts we write in this
series will be very much about that. But for this time we say how you imprint
consciousness on what you see claims what you see in the high octave. If you wish to be
in fear about the events of the world, pat yourself on the back for claiming fear and don’t
complain about being frightened. It is your choice to fear.
Now, the world would tell you that you need to be fearful, and, as you acquiesce to
that, you join the throngs looking to fight, looking to yield, to conquer, to know itself in
the old paradigm that has been claimed as war. To align to peace simply requires you to
know that peace is there, and, in that awareness, you become the emissary of peace. If you
are called to fight in some way, and any battle you may see or claim as a fight may be
understood still again as an opportunity to learn, you may choose to do so as the True Self,
who will bring light and peace and healing to what she encounters, and not more damage,
not more rage, and not more calamity. The Divine Self, while she is not the author of
peace, abides in peace and will claim peace by nature of her presence. She may authorize
what she sees, but she cannot claim it for another. The independence of the soul requires
each one to know who they are in their own way, but what you may do is know the Divine
—underline know, it means realize—in anyone, and in doing so you authorize them to
make the claim for themselves by nature of your witness.
The Divine has come as each of you, and will continue to manifest. As each of you
decides, “Yes, I may know myself anew,” you may claim this for your fellows, and the
manifest Divine in occurrence as and through you will become a tidal wave of light that
assumes all that it encounters.
“This seems like a grandiose gesture,” he says, “a tidal wave of light.”
We have said this from the beginning. The manifestation of the Divine, the template
for it, has been reclaimed and will be re-known. The Christ has come as all, and its
realization is the next way humanity may know itself, but you must become willing to say
yes to who you are, and your fellows as well. And those include the ones you wish not to
speak to, or disagree with. The Divine is in all or nothing. You cannot have it both ways.
Finally, we say to each of you, as we continue on our work in this text, you will be met
by us as you require it. The questions you ask of us in the ethers will be met in text as we
can meet them. As we exist beyond time, but may know ourselves through time, we may
meet you each as you question, as you seek to re-engage, as you find yourself again and
again in the Upper Room where we abide with you. We thank you each for your presence.
DAY SIX

Now, when we teach you each about your requirements for growth, you assume a hard
task, a discipline, a way of doing things that will give you the assurance that what you
need is being given to you and addressed in sequential ways. When you do these things,
you have the satisfaction of having achieved something.
When we teach you, we actually take you well out of this to a higher room where the
learning is accrued in an experiential way, without the dogma, without the ideals that you
have used to decide what spirituality is. The claim we make for each of you tonight—you
will be known anew, and, in knowing, we say, you will be realized—is made by us in the
assurance of the validity of the teaching you will receive. And the claim we make on your
behalf—you are free to know yourself as you truly are—is being made by us in assurance
and love.
You must understand, friends, that who and what you have always been in the Upper
Room is the True Self, and her alignment in this way is the gift she gives to the world she
expresses in. As you align to the True Self in the stages we encounter you all in, as you
understand that the realization of the Divine is the manifestation of it in the world you see,
as you comprehend the teaching you receive and claim your own right to it, you become
the vessel, the incarnate vessel of the Divine that you have always been. Always been is
the key. If you have always been this thing, how could you strive for it? How could you
hunger for it? How could you decide that it cannot be had? In all ways, we say, the desire
for the Divine is the Divine itself seeking its realization through you, and, as you succumb
to this, you are guaranteed the realization of the True Self that has come in form.
The requirement for this teaching, again, is willingness, agreement, and the authority
that you give the Divine as you to become the self that you express as. And the gift of this,
the gift you will realize, is an encounter with the Divine in manifestation that can be
known, and sung, and praised, and claimed, and gifted to others by the very nature of
being. In the claim “I know how I serve,” the vibration of your field as the True Self
claims what it encounters in like accord, and the announcement of being—“I have come as
the True Self”—claims the being you are in the alignment you require to demonstrate truth
as your expression. To be truth—and underline the word be—is to be the expression of it.
This is not done in small ways. This is done in a huge way, in a vibrational octave that you
accrue in alignment that supersedes the low-level vibration that you have known yourself
in. And, in the demonstration of this—and, again, demonstration must mean realization of
it—the reality that you know yourself through is completely addressed in the new octave.
The vibrational being that you are sings as a song for the reclamation of what it sees,
what it perceives, what it can be in coherence with in the new octave that the Christ
expresses in. Now, the term Christ, again, is not the Jesus figure, but the installation of the
divine seed that is as you, as it flowers as you. And, as the Christed Self becomes manifest
in the Upper Room, it calls to it what exists in low frequency for the purpose of revelation
and then reconciliation with its Source. Nothing will be known as holy until it is first
perceived as such. And the perceiver, the Divine as you who bears witness to the Divine in
all she sees, renders new in revelation what she encounters. You become the manifestation
of truth that reclaims the alignment of the True Self in the manifest world. The days of
fearing others, of blaming the self, the days of shame and fury will be ended, and the
being that you are—in her, in his encounter with the world being made new—will be a
celebration.
Now, as we teach these things, we must address the man who lurks in the background1,
shaking his head, saying, “I don’t believe it. The days of sorrow are ending—how can that
be so?”
Young man, we say to you, if you look at the life you live today, the days of sorrow
have ended, and your memory of sorrow, such as it is, the seeking of pain to be who you
thought you were, has ended as well. Each of you here, by nature of being, those who hear
these words, who read the page, who hear the sound of this voice, are being reclaimed, re-
known, rendered new in the alignment of the Christed Self that has come, that is here, that
is the anointing in freedom that you have required and agreed to.
Now, to be in service at this level of vibration in the Upper Room, where you are
instructed and now will be residing, to hold the vibration of service, is simply the nature of
the vibration of being at this level. The claim you make, “I know how I serve,” when
spoken in truth, lifts the field you hold in the anointing of the Christed Self upon what it
witnesses. As the Divine has come as each of you and must know itself through you, the
realization of the Divine, the indwelling Source of all things that is called forth by witness,
must be re-known by its own nature. Each time you claim the Divine, or know the Divine,
or realize the Divine in what is before you, it is re-known in its true nature. In some ways,
the alchemization of form is simply the demonstration of realization.
Now, the tutelage you receive by us in these words, through these encounters, is not
temporary. We actually are ushering you above where you think you are because the
manifest self, the one who has ascribed great meaning to the things of the world, must be
lifted beyond its small nature to this place we teach in where it may be re-known and
rendered new. In obvious ways, the passage you undergo is a realization of what you are,
the manifest self as the Divine, and the encounter with the manifest world that is also in
alignment to the claim you make for it by being as the Divine. If you understand that
being is the issue, your discipleship is created, less through action, than through the
acceptance of the choice you have made. You cannot make the self new. You can change
your hair, your appearance, your attitude, if you wish, but the fundamental transformation,
the alchemization of body and soul in high alignment, is made by the Christed Self
because it is she that is in realization as and through you.
The demonstration of this, which we will instruct you in, in time, has its own property,
its own way of being known. Because you exist in form and substance, and the world you
speak in, speak of, and speak into being is also claimed and known in form and substance,
you must have an experience of manifestation as the True Self that is in existence in the
high octave. If we cannot take you where we teach you, you cannot comprehend
manifestation as the Divine from the small self’s purview. The small self is very used to
deciding what should be, claiming what she wants, what she must have, what he must get.
And the Divine as you, in very different ways, knows what it is, and, from that place of
being, from that passage into a new expression, he becomes the recipient of the good of
the world, what may be known, for the soul’s purpose of high expression. In dominion, the
Divine as you has a claim to make upon everything she sees:

“I behold a world made new. I claim a new world. I am the witness to rebirth and
resurrection, and, as I say yes to my own, I become the vehicle for the resurrection
of all.”

Now, to be operating here must be done in a great awareness of what you are not, and
what you are not is the small self seeking attention, claiming benefit, moving into idolatry
of her own spiritual nature. What you are not is limited. But what you are is of God, and
that is the limitation that has no boundary. To be as God simply means to be of it, and the
parameters you express as, with, and through are the necessary ones that come from form
and expression as you vibrate in the Upper Room. When we teach you what limitation
means, we must understand that all of you seek to define the truth in parameters and ways
that you may discuss and claim obedience to. In fact, the Divine in its expression is
limitless, and your manifestation as the Divine is also boundless, but it is the Divine that is
boundless and not your identification with it. And you must understand this: To be re-
created and re-known in this way is to accept, in great humility, the fabric of manifestation
that contains all things, as you are of it, as is all. And the claim “I know who I am, I know
what I am, I know how I serve, I am free, I am free, I am free” is claimed, not only for
yourself, but to the entirety of being. The idea of one Christ in manifestation is highly
appealing to those of you who seek to worship another. To understand now that the Christ
has come in all, and the manifestation of Christ is realization of what has always been,
will transform your world. But the claim must be made for all.
The teaching you receive of the Upper Room is the transition from the small to the
large, from the profane, or belief in profanity, to what has always been true and sacred.
And the claim you make, “I have come to know all things in truth, I have come to bear
witness to a new world,” will be claiming you in service as the Divine that has perfected
itself as who and what you are. If you can imagine that you have lived a life believing that
the room that you lived in was the only room you could know, you will be surprised at
what is to come—as the ceiling is released, as you are lifted again and again to what has
always been and what will always be, as the eternity that you may know yourself in is
revealed in ways that the small self could not expect or issue or even believe could be so.
We are here for you through this passage in several ways. Yes, we are your teachers,
and yes, we come in love. But we are also here to bear witness for you when you think
you cannot. When you believe that what you see cannot be of God, cannot be known
anew, you may invite us to witness with you. We will see with your eyes until you may
learn the power of sight. We will think with your mind until you comprehend that there is
only one thought, and only one being expressing as thought. And, as we say yes to where
we take you next in this lecture, in this text, in this treatise of embodiment and expression,
the Divine as you in realization, we invite you to sing and make the claim of being that is
only yours to make:
“I am saying yes to where I will be taken. I am saying yes to what I may be taught.
And I am agreeing to allow the teaching to become as I am in its unfoldment, in my
own and in the unfoldment of all that I witness and see.”

We thank you each for your presence.

DAY SEVEN

Now, we are here for you each as you say yes to us and claim your own authority as one
who may abide in the higher octave, one who may say yes to the consequences of his
actions as they are called forth for the re-creation of a world. The Divine Self that you are,
in its purview, has a mandate to instill in the world she sees the recognition of divinity that
is ever present, often unseen, often denounced, often obscured, often refused by those who
do not wish the light. To encounter the light in fear is to run from the light that would in
fact be the liberation of the deepest parts of self that have been most frightened and know
themselves through fear.
The claim of freedom upon another—“I know who you are in truth, I know what you
are in truth, I know how you serve in truth”—is a reclamation of the True Self that is
present, even in those who would hate, who would defile, who would claim anger and
rage in the face of truth or love. The ability you have now, individually and collectively, is
to know who you are for the benefit and the good of all you see. Underline all. The
landscape you express in is a shared tapestry. Many threads are intersecting. And the
accumulated reality that you are in expression with is the making of the world you have
seen and must re-create in this new awareness. But to exclude anyone and anything from it
is to put it in darkness, and what has been put in darkness must be reclaimed, re-known,
re-created in lifting to the Upper Room, the higher strata, the Christ consciousness, if you
will, that is already here and seeking its expression as who and what you are in the claim
“I know how I serve.”
Now, the claim “I know how I serve” calls forth a vibratory action, not only in your
own field, but what your field encounters. And the manifest self, the one you have come
as in form, must be the one who speaks these words, which is why our attention has been
previously on form and the “what” that you are, “I know what I am.” As the manifest self
is in an encounter with an octave expressing in low vibration, the manifest self, by nature
of being, lifts the form, the emblemizations of fear that it encounters, and reclaims it in the
high octave where it is re-known.
To bury something in the dirt, to stamp upon it as if to make it dead, to kick the dirt
upon it and storm away is to leave a relic that will have to be exhumed and re-known at
some future date. And the consequence of that is the pollution of the ground, or, in this
case, the shared landscape that would seek to claim itself in separation. When you deny
God in anyone else, you prohibit them from redemption or reclamation, which is, in fact,
the same thing. And reclamation of those most wounded, most enraged, most seeking to
create chaos and evil, if you wish to call it that, those are the ones who most require it.
The temptation for some of you is to feel that you are enabling the darkness by praying for
those who do ill. In fact, when you pray for anyone you are claiming truth because the
presence of the Divine, while obscured or hidden or masquerading in some other form,
must be present because the moment God or Source, whatever you wish to call it as, is not
present, you claim a world without God.
Now, how can there be evil, injustice, and tyranny in a world where there is a God?
That would be the question for this evening. Because you choose it, because you make it
so, because the heresy and denial of God in your fellow man has been so permeated on
this plane that you expect it. And the claim of separation—brother against brother, man
against man, woman against woman, religion against religion—has been so present, by
your own making, that it self-perpetuates and reclaims what it encounters as a monster
would. Now, when we say God is in all, the monster itself, the terrible creation itself that
you see, must be re-known and lifted to the high octave for re-creation because it is
empowered by your anger and your fear and your hatred of it. What you damn, damns you
back. What you curse is your own curse reflected right back at you.
Humanity itself is accountable for its actions, as is an individual, as is a culture, a
community, a country, and a world. At this time, there is a reckoning of great magnitude,
and the injustice you see in your world is making itself known for only one purpose—to
be re-known, reclaimed, and made new. “Behold, I make all things new,” sayeth the
Christ, and it is still so, and will always be true. And, when you claim it upon what you
see, the vibratory field you hold now, in its encounter with what you would call darkness,
seeks to lift and can only lift as the one who knows who he is claims the lifting. The
frightened man, operating in fear, fears for himself or the well-being of others, but even
those fears support fear and do little good. When you know who you are—“I am of the
Creator, I am manifest as such, I know who I am and how I serve is the expression of the
Creator, impactful, in love, in truth, in righteousness upon the landscape”—the landscape
is lifted, the darkness that has been hidden will be revealed, and, in the revelation of the
darkness, you may claim the light. The darkness cannot be healed when it is hidden. It will
seek to hide, mask itself, go by another name. It will find an excuse to prey upon you in
any form it can take, and, yes, we say that includes self-righteousness, which is the action
of the small self in a demonstration of fear.
When you lift the field you hold through the claim of truth—“I know how I serve”—
the field is lifted in agreement to the Divine that is in all, and it reclaims and realizes the
presence of the Divine that is there, has been hidden, and can now be re-known. The
climate of the world you see—in its fluctuations, in its outrage, in its agony, in its warring,
in its despair—is as a layer of skin, is released, and the flesh, the exposed flesh, tender and
raw and new, can be known and seen and accepted. But while you fight against your
fellow men, while you fear, while you judge, it will happen anyway. Humanity has
decided that it will survive, and the claim of freedom that you make upon your fellow
man, regardless of what you think of them, will be a key to the awakening that you seek.
The idea that you are a liberator through your actions is all well and good, but any action
taken by anyone is informed by consciousness, and the consciousness you hold, as the one
who knows implicitly who and what she is, is the re-creation of the Christ as may be
expressed at this time for the realization of the Kingdom that is at hand.
Now, when we speak this way, Paul gets alarmed. We will explain two things to him.
You have thought for long that we taught in metaphor, and, while we may use them on
occasion, this is no longer needed. The Kingdom, the Upper Room, the high octave, while
foretold, has been so confused that you have all believed you had to die before you could
see it. You have to die to the self you thought you were. She is still present. He is still
here. But he is no longer the one deciding fate. That opportunity has been gifted, once and
for all, to the True Self, who has come as you.
Now, as a reckoning is occurring across the globe, the individual must be present for
her own reckoning, and the agreement to be present as the old skin falls away, as the
detritus of history falls away, as the truth can now be known and spoken into being, as the
claim of truth may be made upon all humanity, the decree is known, and the resurrection,
which is the realization of the Divine in all, must be the result of the passage you
undertake.
Now, one and all, you are all of one Source, and the masquerade you play here in
individuation will not cease but will be understood in a high way. “In this lifetime, I
choose to learn love.” “In this lifetime, I need to learn accountability.” “In this lifetime, I
need to comprehend the benefits of action and inaction.” And, as these things are
understood, the soul that you are continues to claim them forth for your awakening and
your progression as a soul. You may be a genius, but not know what fork to use at a fine
dinner. There are always things that you have come to learn, and your lessons continue,
individually and collectively, through this great passage that you are all undergoing.
Now, the Upper Room, the place of knowing, the place of peace, the place of
agreement to who everyone is, is available, may be returned to at any moment. But the
moment you are deceived by fear, seek vengeance, seek to act unjustly, you will be called
back to the octave you have arrived to in fear. And, in that place, you will learn. If you
wish to stay high, make the intention realizable to you, and by doing this we mean you are
always choosing. Imagine you are high, seek to maintain the height, and everything below
you is encouraging you to be afraid, to act in fear, to act in anger. If you wish to, you may.
Or you may reclaim these things in the Upper Room and understand the consequence of
that is lifting the world. If you understand that to engage in a battle is to agree to the battle
and to enforce it by agreement, you will begin to understand that the higher way of
operating need not leave you passive in any way, but operating without fear and an innate
awareness of the Divine that must be present in whatever you see.
He interrupts again. “There are things I see that I cannot find God in, or I refuse to see
it because it enables it to be as it is.” Here is our response: The denial of God reinforces
the darkness that you are witnessing. To bring the light to anything is for it to be seen as it
truly is, and to realize what is present at that sense of agreement may be the opening you
require to reveal the Christ or the seed of the Divine that can and will be known in anyone,
in any situation, because, if it is not there, it must be nowhere at all.
When we spoke to you last, we said you may look with our eyes when you perceive
something that you cannot fathom, that you cannot bless, that you cannot find God in. And
we will tell you why we offer this. Because we know the elastic nature of the reality you
know and express in, we comprehend that there is nothing real, finally, in permanence.
Everything you see is in mutation. Every cell that comprises the being you think you are is
alive and in motion. Everything you see in the landscape before you will one day be gone,
and something else will be present. The moment you stand in, the agreement to the
moment you stand in, is the only place God can be found—not someday, not sometime,
not then, when someday makes itself known—because now is the time of reckoning. A
reckoning is a facing of oneself and all of one’s creations. You are present in it as a
culture, as a community, as a country, as a world. Nothing will be as you think it is when
you align fully to the Upper Room. It never has been what you thought it was. The
collective tapestry, the collective field in landscape informed by history and what you
have wanted to be there to appease your ideas of what you should see, will be re-known,
re-created, known anew by the one, by the all, that knows who they are.
Say this, if you wish:

“On this night I choose to gift my entire being in service for the good of all. I
release the fear I have had of such an action as I realize that the service I offer is
made in the claim of the True Self, ‘I know how I serve.’ And, because I am
agreeing to this in truth, I will be met in truth, and my awareness of the
requirements of my actions will be made known to me as they are needed. I am
giving my permission to be made new. I say these words of my own free will. I offer
myself in fullness for the good of all.”

We thank you each for the gifts you bring, for the willingness to serve, for what has
made you come with your hands and your hearts and your eyes available for good. We
thank you each for the privilege of being your teachers, and we will commence next week
with a new chapter on this text. We will say this is the completion of the last one. Period.
Period. Period.
 3

THE PREPARATION FOR THE NEW WORLD

DAY EIGHT

Now, when you decide things about what you should be, you rely upon the old to give you
the information to make the decision. You give permission to the attitudes of others to
dictate who you think you should be. You decide in advance that you will be what you
think you are, and then you create a life that supports the ideas that you are choosing to
agree to. Each of you here, by nature of being, is in agreement to the life that they live. Do
you understand this? By nature of being, you are agreeing to your life and the lives you
see, or your interpretations of the lives you see, all around you.
The idealization of what things should be must be addressed here because your
disappointments in yourselves, in others, and in your world is claimed through you in a
nature that would seek to confirm what you wanted, thought should be, because of what
you were taught. When you idealize any outcome, you are deciding in advance what
should be based upon your expectations, and, in all cases, expectations are predictions that
claim you in an agreement to information you have inherited. “This should be like this,
that should be as that” are claims you make in outcome and decide what should be, and,
when your outcome is not met as you think it should, you are disappointed. The world
does not work for you, nothing corresponds to your idealizations of how a world should
be, and then you decide that there is no God because your desires have not been
confirmed. And the desires, in most cases, are in fact the desires of the small self, because
the True Self does not predict. She lives in the ever-present now where what can be
claimed, what will be known, is in perfect accord to her requirements for realization. To be
realized is to become who you truly are at the cost of the old, and the dictates of history
that would seek to confirm what you were are all about you. So the confusion you
experience—“I know I am a divine being, but my landscape doesn’t reflect that”—
actually becomes the opportunity that you require to realize yourself in a new landscape, a
higher vibration, the Upper Room, as we teach it.
Every one of you claims identity. You decide who you were, who you are, and who
you should be in the moment you stand in. The only history you have, claiming it as you,
is the one you think was there. The collective has history, yes, but it operates in the same
way. “This is who we think we were, the happy family, the victorious country, the ones
who did right, or the ones who did wrong.” These are collective suppositions that claim
into manifestation an agreed-upon world.
Now, an agreed-upon world is actually where you live in a consciousness that has been
created through a collective reason, a collective way of deciding. If you think you are not
in a collective agreement on this day, ask yourself where you are agreeing to the
collective. “I am in a room with other people, in a town with other people, in a state that
has such-and-such a law, or in a country that believes this or that. I know what the time is
on the clock, and my neighbor would confirm it. I know what I believe in, and the
congregation at my church or temple or mosque will confirm that.” You all decide these
things in collective ways, and then operate in a landscape that confirms the ideals that you
think you should have through the predicated history you have chosen to inherit.
An inherited history is simply an idea of what you think happened, and it is usually
based on the interpretation of a few that became the ones to decide how the story would be
told. How a story is told is always agreed upon by the listener. “I agree to the story that
was taught to me. I don’t like it, but I confirm it.” Now, when we say agreement in this
case, we are actually speaking in a different way than we often do. “I agree that the story
is about the God who came down and took a form and died upon a cross. I believe the
story. I agree to the tenets of it.” But the story itself may be rendered in different ways
through different teachers, and the claim you make about what you agree to will confirm
your relationship to the one who died, or the God that was born in form. If the story was
never taught to you, did it never happen? We would have to say in some ways that would
be true because the consciousness you hold cannot confirm it at level of experience. The
history of the story is present today in a mutation that you may accept as a truth, but by
accepting a mutation, you are actually losing the essence of truth, the piece of God, that is
available through it.
“What does that mean?” he asks. Rather simply put, if you look at the effect upon a
religion, upon a world, you are looking at an effect and rarely the sense of truth that was
the individuation of the consciousness that claimed the religion in the first place. A
religion is an idea that has been made into a practice. Realization, knowing who and what
you are, is not a practice. Knowing God is not a practice. It is a state of being, in union, in
agreement, in alignment to the God that is in all things. Now, when you understand this,
the role of religion changes, and your agreements to religions must transform. They are
the artifacts of other times that may still serve as a gateway to a very high truth, but in
these days you don’t just need a flashlight to find your way there, you need complete
illumination. The flickering candle of a teaching is vastly different than being consumed
by the truth that is the essence of the teaching. And, by offering yourself in agreement to
serve at this level of alignment, you actually confirm that you are overtaken, you are
assumed, you are claimed by the light that would lead you in truth wherever you are
required to go.
We do not discount religion. What we do say is what you know of as religion is
historical, and the teachings of old have not been well preserved. You are being instructed
in tenets of behavior without any comprehension of the divinity that informed the true
words that may have been once spoken upon a mount, or in a valley, or in some foreign
land in a language you may never comprehend. As we teach you now, we reclaim you in
the moment you sit in so that you may be re-comprehended, re-understood, re-aware of
what has always been—underline always—in truth, so that you may dismiss what is not
true, what has never been true, what has been claimed through history that would deny
God, or what you may call God.
Now, in infinite wisdom, there is awareness of what has always been, what is today,
and what can or will be. But, as you sit in an interaction with these words, you are being
instructed to know the self in eternity in the moment you sit in, because that is the only
place that truth is aligned to. If you want a small truth—“I know this is better than that
through my own experience or preferences”—you can stay there. If you want a great truth
in alignment to who you are, you must become available to it, and this is done in where
we call the Upper Room. Where we call it is correct, Paul. We are speaking of landscape,
not object, and we use our words carefully here today.
The alignment you all require is not to be found through the objects of history, but in
the moment you stand in, in agreement—which means vibratory accord—to what is
always true. If you want a miracle, you must come to terms that a miracle is an agreement
to what exists in the high octave that can be known in manifestation in the lower
vibrations. The inclusion of the small self in this teaching is essential to understand. We
cannot work with you if you segment yourself. “My low self said today,” “I wish she
would go away,” “When is my low self gone?” Your low self is of God. It just doesn’t
know it is so. And the agreement to align to the Upper Room, we would have to suggest,
would be the equivalent of aligning to who you have always been, and understanding or
agreeing that what we call the small self has been the operating tool to navigate a shared
landscape that is knowing itself in history and in idealizations of what should be.
Now, as you hear these words, you are asking yourselves questions. “Well, do I do
this? Do I want that? Can this be so?” And we recommend that you ask the questions to
the True Self, who is here for you in wait. She waits to answer. He waits to say yes. He
waits to say, “I may. I may overcome. I may realize. I am as I am in my true nature for the
reclamation of a world.” The Divine has come as you, not to fix your poor history. Your
poor history is the idea you have about what happened once upon a time. It is not true.
He objects to this. “But what if it is true that his father beat him, that her husband left
her, that she was harmed, or they were all harmed?” Even those ideas can be re-
understood in the Upper Room, in the higher octave of the Divine. If you wish to claim
your history as a legacy of fear or pain, you are encouraging its manifestation. We are not
saying things don’t happen, or that they did not happen. We are saying what you confirm,
what you agree to, you are in co-resonance with. And that becomes your world, and your
reality will confirm what you think should be.
So much of what you believe to be true was never even true. What you look at as a
reality is actually a composite of ideas, or teachings, or collective agreements made in
form. “I know what a bank is. That’s a bank. I was taught what a bank is and we all agree
to what a bank does.” That is a collective agreement in form. Your idealization of what
was perpetuates the bank. Even if you hate the bank, you have the bank because you have
agreed to it, you confirm its expression, you expect it to be there, and you don’t look
beyond the inherited structure to what may lift beyond it. To lift beyond something is to
perceive from the high perspective that we call the Upper Room. Anything and everything
may be seen from this place, but you must become willing to let go of the idealizations
that you would seek to confirm as a small self. Understand this, friends. The Divine Self,
the truth of who you are, does not seek to confirm the old. She has no need for it. She
accepts what you’ve chosen to agree to, but also comprehends that her realization is
obstructed by your attachments to what you think things should be.
Now, on this day we are deciding to give you instruction in manifestation as may be
known in the Upper Room. And by this we mean we speak to what you have agreed to as
a small self and a collective agreement in historical data to recognize the old as a
requirement of creation. As you understand that the consciousness you hold is always in
manifestation, that nothing is excluded from it, you may begin to understand that the field
that you hold is already calling into being that which she believes in. She is agreeing to the
structure of the world you see, and how people behave, and what can be, dependent on the
outcome of current events or what you perceive of as real. If everything is in agreement—
and by agreement we mean accord—what happens if you stop agreeing? “Well, I don’t
know how to change the world. That is not my job. I just want a better house, a happier
child, a better connection with my Divine Self. Then I am satisfied. Let’s leave it at that.”
You cannot leave it at that for the simple reason that everything you see you are in
agreement to, and by nature of that agreement your consciousness is confirming it and
making it so. Yes, you didn’t agree to the war, meaning you don’t think you started it, you
don’t agree to the policies behind it, you don’t think there should be war at all. But every
day you hear of the war, you are agreeing to the war and confirming the war at the level of
consciousness that you have aligned to.
To re-create the world, you must lift beyond the small self’s purview. And, when we
say it’s a requirement to think beyond the small self and her small concerns, we are telling
you that the future of this expression that you know of as your world is in many ways
dependent upon the alignment that can call the new into being. So the first lesson is
everything you see you are in agreement to, and, because you are in agreement to it, it can
be transformed through consciousness. If you make something too big, you have limited
God. Do you understand this? “That woman will never change” is denying the God in that
woman. “That country will never learn” is denying the potential for the transformation or
enlightenment or re-creation of what you know of as a country. And, if you decide these
things, you are confirming the very things that you say you don’t want—again, agreeing to
them.
The idealization of outcome must be understood now. “Well, I’ll pray for peace.”
That’s a fine thing to do, but realizing peace is very different than praying for it, and the
one who can realize peace is the one who exists in a place where peace is known. Nothing
can be known, as the small self has chosen, in a higher way. The Divine Self, the Christed
Self, the True Self is the one who must move things by lifting them. The manifest world is
transformed by your alignment to the Divine that has come as you in the octave of
expression we call the Upper Room.
Now, the True Self exists here. She is as you now, he is as you now. But your
agreement to what you think you are—“I am the man who’s so unhappy,” “the woman
who doesn’t have the job,” “the one who can’t fix this or that crisis”—aligns you to the
level of manifestation where what you don’t want has great power over you. The
alignment to the higher, the Divine as you, must be claimed, must be known, and from this
purview the transformation we speak to as manifest is known, and known means realized.
“Well, I knew that,” you may say about something or other, but “I knew that” means “I
realized it.” And every time something is realized, it is known in truth.
Now, the truth that we speak to here is not at the small level. There are layers of
agreement. “Yes, he’s a difficult man” may be something you say about somebody, and
perhaps that is true at the level or structure of personality. “But he is a good man”—that
may be true as well. The difficult man may be a good man, too, but to realize beyond that
is that the man who you see, regardless of what he has done, thinks he is, you would have
him be, as a small self, is not separate from God. And, in this reclamation of truth—this
man is realized or re-known—is the high truth that will transform him, your relationship to
him, and the world that he expresses through.
If each of you here—each of you who hears these words, listens to the text, or reads
them on the page—understands that you are the thing, the object that is made new in your
expression for the reclamation of the world, you will stop thinking about your poor self
and his poor problems. You will encounter the self that has invested in what she’s known,
believed to be so, and resurrect the Divine that is as you because she is always present and
agreeable and available in the upper classroom wherein you are being taught. The
transition that you each undergo, as you align at this level, is the transformation of the one
who is required to give herself over completely to the Source of her being in the trust that
what happens to her is in perfection, because only God knows what you have come for.
“Well, I know what I came for. This is my practice. This is my discipline. This is how I
serve and this is what I say I am.” Well, if that’s what you want, you may have it, but you
are gifting yourself with pittance when there is great wealth in Spirit available to you to
confer upon everyone you meet. Do you understand this? You are so used to settling for a
better day that you disregard the gifts of Spirit that are relevant, are present, and are
offered to you—if you are willing to release your ideas of what you were, what you are,
and what you can be known as.
Again, we have to say you are always in manifestation. You are always confirming
your world. But as you have come as the Christed Self to be re-known in form and field in
recognition that the very being of the True Self is what calls the new world, the Kingdom,
the awareness of God in all form, that which has come as you, the gift of being, will be
recognized and known anew. Period. Period. Period.
(PAUSE)

We ask you each to decide on this day that the life that you’ve lived, and as you have lived
it, are completing themselves. In completion, we say, there is great opportunity. To
complete a life as it has been lived requires you to say that “the present and the future is
no longer decided by the past, and the reclamation of the new may be claimed by me in
succinct ways.” In succinct ways means you are clearly claiming rapidly the requirements
for change without question because you are operating in knowing, and, as one who
knows, you may claim in realization.
Now, to trespass upon the old is guaranteed for some time. You may release something
and harken back to it, remember something, agree to something in history, and then decide
anew that what you experienced was historical, and the data of history may not be relevant
to the moment you now stand in because the moment you stand in is your true inheritance.
How you claim any moment in abiding grace is to realize who is claiming the experience.
The Divine that is ever present as you in fact seeks to infuse every moment of your
expression so that you may realize, as your expression, the manifest Divine.
Now, to understand this is the key to success as a manifestor. You understand
yourselves, as we have said, in agreement to what you see. Everything you see before you,
you have agreed to at one level of vibration or another. In the Upper Room, or at the level
of agreement that the Divine expresses in, how things are chosen and what is chosen must
be in agreement to the True Self. And, in this alignment, the requirements of growth are
brought to you quickly, in rapidity in succession for one reason. The flower that is you is
blooming, and to hinder the petals from opening to the sun would be to preclude the grace
that is present now and seeking to be realized through you. The dominion that comes at
this level is not as you perceive it. Your idea of what you should be claiming is still highly
entrenched in yesterday’s information. “Remember that house I wanted? That perfect
mate? That perfect employment?” Even your ideas of perfection are assumed by you
through a creation of history that you have ascribed to. It is only perfect because it fits an
idea of what perfect must be like.
In the Upper Room, what is perfect is what is realized for you. And, consequently, you
must say that “everything that I create must be in agreement with the consciousness I hold,
and, because I am in the Upper Room, what I am claiming is the perfect opportunity for
my soul’s unfoldment, for the Divine as me to reclaim itself in field and form and in
interaction with everything I see before me.” As the agreement is made to operate as the
True Self in the Upper Room, the fabric of your reality is actually transferred to a new
octave. The music of the Upper Room, in fact—which simply means the intonation or
vibration of tone that you impress as and have arrived to—must claim what it sees and
what it perceives, interacts with, in like accord so the manifest world is then lifted, by
nature of your expression, to the level of dominion of the Divine Self.
“Well, what does my Divine Self want from me?” you may ask. Everything and
nothing. Everything that it requires, and nothing that you can think of, because to think is
not to know, and to know is to realize. And, as you may only know in the moment you
stand in—neither before, nor after—the relevance of the information or the knowing can
only be received by you in the moment you stand in, and never another time. Now, as it is
always now, you may always know, but at the level of the Divine Self, not as the small self
who wishes to pack for the picnic and hopes it won’t rain. The True Self knows, the small
self presumes, or thinks, or decides based on the evidence that she has accrued thus far.
When you remember who and what you are, you return to the knowing you require to be
in agreement with what can be claimed or made manifest in the high octave.
“What kinds of things,” he interrupts, “can be known in the high octave?”
Everything we have taught you thus far is of the high room, the high octave. The
information you have been receiving since we began teaching is of this plane of
expression, and you have been the recipients of it at the level of agreement you can attend
to the information from. The vast difference here is the translation has been given to you
from the high octave through the man Paul to the octave where you express. That is the
mediumship of the channeling you have received. But, as you lift, there is no real need for
an intermediary to translate this teaching because you become the teaching, you become
the embodiment of it as you have always been in the Upper Room. What can be known
here exists beyond what you can even imagine, but you may only receive what the True
Self requires. “I am going to a new room, I will explore every corner of it, rip down the
wallpaper to expose the plaster and the beams. I will break the windowpanes to see what
they are truly made of.” There is no need for that in the Upper Room. In fact, the state of
being that you have arrived to supports the reception of what is required in the moment
you stand in, and, if that moment is requiring you to know something that is far beyond
the ken of reasoning that you have aligned to, you may bypass the old, circumvent the
obstacles that had been placed there, and become the recipient of knowledge. The oracle,
as we have described prior, is in fact you at this level of knowing.
Now, you don’t know for your own well-being in the ways you may think. He is
saying, “Oh, somebody is going to use this, rationalize a choice, say ‘the Divine Self said,’
and make a foolish decision and blame it upon God.” In fact, that will not happen because,
when you are operating at that level of self-deception, your vibratory frequency is rather
low, and what you will be able to claim must be met then in the low vibration you are
claiming from. When you are operating in the high vibration commensurate with the
reality that is claimed at that level, manifestation is only instantaneous if the alignment
you require for it is ever present, already here. The idea of waiting five years for the
answer to a question is released, but the potential to receive the answer to a question will
again be dependent upon your readiness and ability to receive it.
Now, in the low octave you may convince yourself of any foolish thing. “Well, the
Guides told me to leave my husband, so I went and did it.” Please do not blame us for
your misfortune and your foolish choices. We would never tell anybody to do anything.
That is not our job. We are your teachers, not your masters, and we instruct only in love. If
you wish to leave your spouse, you are accountable to your choice, and the ramifications
of choice are as present in the Upper Room as they are in the low, but with one difference.
While everything that is claimed at every level is an opportunity to learn, the gifts of the
choices made in the high octave will be made known to you in your reception of the
choice made. The choice made in high octave, without fear, without suffering, without the
debasement of self or others, will always gift you with the perfect response.
Now, you may learn here in the Upper Room, or through the trial and error that you
have been learning through. “I have been invited to a party. What should I wear? Who will
be there? Who will I meet? What will be expected of me? What if I am asked to do
something I don’t want to do? Can I leave early? Will I be glad I went?” You can play
those games all day long, decide who you should be, what will happen, what will be the
ramifications of choice, or you can align to the Divine, the True Self who arrives at the
party and simply knows.
Now, to be in your knowing is a responsibility as well. Make no bones about it. You
are accountable to your knowing, and simply because you know, it does not make you
right in the world of the small self. It does not make you the beneficiary of good because
you know. Imagine looking at a woman. You realize or know that her days on this plane
are numbered. That is not a thing you tell the poor woman whose final days may be before
her. You are accountable to your knowing. The small self may say, “Oh, I have to fix her. I
have to help her get her affairs in order. It is my job to make sure this passage is done in
the right way.” And your idea of the right way is historical, and your mandates for her may
have nothing to do with her own requirements for life and death. The Divine as her is what
you acknowledge, and you claim it in the realization that that is who she always is, and
how she emerges from this passage, from life into death, is under the auspices of her own
soul. Because you have information doesn’t mean you have to share it, and to pretend it
does is to be a busybody, and the Divine Self, we have to say, knows how to mind her own
business, and for one reason: She accepts responsibility of her own actions, and to speak
ill of another, to gossip about another, is to operate in a low field.
“Oh, but it’s so much fun to gossip,” you may say. As much as you enjoy gossiping
about others is as much as you must enjoy being spoken about, because that is what
happens. Like does attract like, and every deed you make on your behalf is met by the
same response through the law of karma. Now, to justify karma—“she got hers,” “he will
get his”—is to diminish the meaning of it. All karma is, is a balancing of cause and effect.
It is not retribution. It is the law, and nothing more. As you align to the True Self, as you
embody as the Divine, as your choices are made in the high room, you no longer incur
karma as you have. Although every choice must still have a ramification, you are not
being taught by karma, and karma’s purpose, in many ways, is to be a teacher, to claim
you into an alignment where the choices you make are in agreement to the True Self.
Now, when we teach you about manifestation, we are taking two things into
consideration—that you want things, and that you assume that God is supposed to give
them to you. Those are both wrong-minded, and we must tell you why. The small self
wants what she thinks she should have, and the Divine is the Source of all things, but if
you feel like eating cake, please learn to bake it. Don’t expect the angels to come—and
knocking on your door with a bundt cake. It is unlikely to happen that way. When you
understand that realization or knowing can in fact call you to anything you require—and
we would not exclude the piece of cake—you can also find that, in the level of alignment
of the Upper Room, what you need is what is received by you, less so than what you think
you want or should have to be who you think or thought you were.
What if there was a place of infinite manifestation? What if it could be known by you
as easily as breathing? What if that were true right now? Do you all know it is true now,
and you are living in it? As a small self or True Self, you are always claiming and in
manifestation. In the high octave, what is claimed by you is known and expressed in the
high accord that the claim has been made in. But who claims, who asks, who receives,
would be the things you must understand to benefit from.
Each of you decides to incarnate and learn through the experiences of the manifest
world. This has been your opportunity. It will continue to be so. But as we agree to you in
the Upper Room, the manifestation begins there. “Examples, examples,” he says. “Please
don’t make this theoretical. Tell us what to do.”
While we have taught you the Mudra of Creation in prior teachings, we will also say
that what is required by you for the soul’s development will be readily available to you,
and how you learn in the Upper Room is much easier, we have to say, than how you have
done it thus far. The identification of self through matter, the small self through matter, is
immediately replaced by the True Self who realizes the Divine in the manifest world,
which creates an elasticity in order to receive what may be claimed here. It is the
difference between picking up a truck with your bare hands and lifting the truck to be
received by you. In the Upper Room, where there is far less density, there is far less to
preclude manifestation. But the small self, who wants to go about getting things, has been
operating in the dense field, and the True Self, whose requirements are known, is able and
ready to receive her needs in manifest form. Now, we said it. In manifest form means that
you are claiming in the material world through your interaction with the formless that is
then made into form. The pliability, elasticity of the ethers is what is being known and
then reclaimed. The same is true through your encounter with the manifest world as the
True Self. As you have arrived at the threshold of this experience and see a new world
before you, your opportunities are presented to you, one at a time, in rapidity and in
sequence, to lift the manifest world to the high octave that you perceive it in.
If you would all take a moment and decide one thing, you will have a gift in its
response:

“I may see anything and everything in a higher way. I may know anything and
everything in a higher way. I may choose anything and everything in a higher
way.”

And, through these claims, you will benefit, and your expression will align to potential
and the un-manifest that is seeking realization in form before you.
The flowers that you are, in full bloom, bring forth an aroma, a great cloud of perfume
that encompasses the globe you know of, and the field of love, in its blooming, lifts the
plane to the potential of love through your presence here. If your hands are asked to work,
you will be asked to work, and you will meet the requirements in your knowing. And if
your gift to the very world you know is the gift of being in fullness, you will align to this
fullness in a reflection of the Source of your being in order to mirror it to the manifest
world. God sees God in all of creation.
We will take a pause for Paul.
(PAUSE)

We encourage you each to make decisions each day in agreement to the True Self. “How
is this done?” you ask. Not by inquiry, but by aligning. “I align to the Divine Self. I align
to my True Self. I am in agreement to my True Self.” And then move to the actions you
need to take. To dismiss the Divine Self—“Well, she’s there anyway, I’m sure she’ll fix
everything”—in some ways is to decide that it is a superfluous relationship, or a
relationship based in convenience. And, as we have said many times, there is next to
nothing convenient about these teachings. The choice to align as the True Self is required
as you progress.
Now, once you have aligned to a level of recognition where there is no more question
of who and what you are, the need for inquiry is dissipated. Why would you ask what you
know? And, as you operate as the True Self, as you claim as it because it is who you are,
the questions of the past—“Did I do it right? Should I have chosen other?”—are released
to the old, to the residue of the old where they come from.
The promise we make to each of you: When you begin to understand that the
alignment we are bringing forth is a permanent alignment that is known in stages of
agreement and alignment to what can be claimed at each stage of evolution, you will
understand that what you are embarking upon is the realization of the Christed Self as has
come as form and known through the self that has incarnated as you. Now, the you that we
speak to here is no longer the small self, because she is no longer the one you identify as.
Yes, you know your name and address, what your children studied in school, where you
work, and what you do. But the higher agreement has been intoned, and you have become
the emissary, the note sung, of the Christed Self. To the degree that what the small self has
been as the claimer of your experience, as the judge and jury of your life, as the small self
has dissipated in its prominence, you have claimed the truth at the cost of the old, and the
claim “Behold, I make all things new” is fully understood. You are as you were, in some
ways, but you have superseded the old at the level of vibration where you are no longer
claiming in fear and, therefore, participating in the manifestation of a world that operates
in fear. You become the issuance of the Divine as can be known as who and what you are.
Now, as we complete this chapter, we have a few things to say to Paul about where we
intend to take our readers. While this chapter is about manifestation, that is not the title.
We will call this chapter “The Preparation for the New World.” And, as we say those
words, we give you the meaning of them. The new world is the one you speak into being
through the claims “I know who I am, what I am, how I serve.” And the expression of
those words, in annunciation of truth, will claim the world that is needing to be born in
alignment to the Divine that has come as you—in manifestation, we have to say, because
manifestation is important. You cannot claim the manifest world into a high alignment
when you don’t align as the manifest self to your own purview through the divine nature
that has been instilled in you. Like attracts like, and the Divine meets the Divine in all she
sees.
Where we take the reader in this text, Beyond the Known, is to realization. And
realization of the manifest world as the Kingdom is the issuance of this text, whether or
not you believe it or wish to comply with these instructions. The texts will operate in
different ways, each in the series. But the issuance of each will claim the reader at the
level of recognition that he or she requires to be awakened to his or her own realization.
Finally, we say, and this is for Paul, let us write our book. We are grateful for your
presence, but you are not the author here. You are loved, and your abilities are claimed by
us for the benefit of others. So we say this to you in gratitude. Thank you and let us do our
work. We thank you for your presence, and the reader as well. We will stop now, please.
Period. Period. Period.
 4

THE DIVINE AS WILL

DAY NINE

Now, when we ask you questions about your lives, your first impulse is to respond as you
wish to, based upon the data of history. You have recourse in history. You know yourself
through what you have done, how you have chosen, what you have seen. While this is
right in many ways, it also creates a structure of expectation about what you can see, what
you can choose, what you can know. And, because the choices have been made in history,
you cede to history to confirm them.
At this juncture, at this time, at this intersection of past and future, we have a new
mandate—that the Divine as you is the choice that will claim you in all choices. The
Divine Will in activation will claim you, as you align to it. Now, the Divine Will is not
separate from you, and you must understand this. You have autonomy always, but the
Divine as you, which is the aspect of you who knows who she is, can align in will for the
manifest self to be in expression as will. “The Divine as Will” is how we will call this
teaching. “The Divine as Will.”
Now, when you understand that the Divine as will means that the aspect of the Creator
as you can and will be expressed in will, you stop deciding what can or cannot be, based
on the tenets of history, because the Divine Self, which exists beyond time, is not
mandated through history to make choices. The requirement here is really very simple—
that the choice that you make as the Divine Self will claim you in its own expression for
the betterment of all. Now, we say all with intention. “I want a sandwich,” you say. “How
is that for the benefit of all?” You must understand that every choice made in the high
octave has ramifications that claim the high octave in what is claimed through them. When
you make a choice in light, the ramifications of light are ongoing, and the claim that you
make, as the True Self, to realize the Divine as the will claims every intention that you can
have at that level of alignment in perpetual agreement to the divinity that is inherent in the
choice.
Now, if you have an idea of what you can have and what you can choose based on
history, you will rely upon the data of history to encourage and refute the opposition for
the choice you would make. “I want to do this, and this is what I know of the choice.” And
you know of the choice through the data of history. The reclamation of the Divine as will
comprehends you in infinite boundless choice, but the highest choice can be recognized by
you here, and you can align to it through the claim that we will make for you:

“I know myself in will. I am in agreement to the Divine as will. I am an expression

of Divine Will embodied in alignment to the highest choice available to me now.”

Now, as this is a claim and it is made in intention, it is to further your agreement to

operate as will, but in operating as will, in most cases you will be defying the tenets of
agreement that you have known yourselves through. “It should be either this or that, not
some other thing. I only may know myself through the agreements I’ve known. I cannot
fathom anything beyond them.” The agreement in alignment as Divine Will actually
reclaims you above and beyond prior choice, and what is chosen, finally, we say, in this
agreement will be a claim of the True Self.
“Now, what is included here?” he asks. “Do I want to go to the movies? Do I want to
pray? What kind of choices are you really speaking to?”
Well, we will say this first: The first thing you must understand—that any choice that
is made has a ramification that you are accountable to. Even the smallest choice may have
a great impact upon the world. The small choice may seem insignificant until the
manifestation of the choice, the ramification of it, is seen. When you understand that any
choice has ramifications, you will comprehend that the alignment to bring forth the high
will supports the highest ramification. Now, this is not about thinking it through. “What is
the highest choice?” the small self might say, and confusion will ensue because the small
self has the data of history to claim itself in, and nothing beyond it. So the alignment to the
True Self, so that you are in correspondence at the new level of alignment and potential, is
what guarantees that the high choice is made because that is how you operate.
He is interrupting. We will attempt to take the question. “So, if the small self has a
wish, it doesn’t happen. You are not claiming it anymore. Is that correct?” Well, you can
choose it in low vibration and contend with the ramifications as your learning. This is how
you have operated thus far. But in the Upper Room, in the maintenance of the high
vibration, the high choice is not only present, but obvious to you. If you are in a quandary
between this or that, you are not in your knowing and consequently must not be operating
from the Upper Room.
“Are you always knowing in the Upper Room?” he asks. Yes and no. You are always
present to the knowing that you require, but that does not mean the answer comes as you
wish it. Imagine you are in the water and the tide is pushing you backwards and forwards.
The agreement to be in the tide is to be in the flow, the current, the trajectory that is
bringing you forward and backwards. The alignment in the Upper Room in some ways is
similar. You are called forth. You are asked to halt. You are in patience, or you are in
action. You are not in impatience. You are not in creative anger. “What should I do now
about this situation?” You are aligning to the Divine Self, who will know when she knows,
who will act upon it as she is called to.
Now, the True Self is not in fear. And you must really understand this. The operating
system, as the Divine Self, has no fear in its vocabulary. It does not speak fear. It does not
intend fear. It does not choose fear. And, because fear is no longer part of the equation, the
opportunities that present themselves will be without fear. “Does this mean we are not
encountering fear?” he asks. Not really. You may encounter fear in order to lift it, in order
to see it for what it is. And, once the lie is seen, the energy may be re-created or re-
comprehended or re-known as the Divine, which is the vibration that informs all matter
and all manifestation. What believes itself to be darkness may be re-known, may be lifted,
may be chosen anew. And, in the new comprehension, the Divine is present in operation,
which simply means the stasis that the darkness has claimed will be no more. “How is
stasis a product of darkness?” he asks. Well, in some ways, the denial of light is a claim of
stasis. “I will not change. I will not know. I will not see anew.” And the ramifications of
stasis are always the encouragement of the old to be the prominent action. “I will attend to
the old. I will not see beyond what I have known.”
Now, as you realize the Divine, “I am here, I am here, I am here,” the claim of the
Divine Self in purview, and the alignment has begun—“I am choosing to align to the True
Self in will”—the intention will invoke a response by what you know of as will. In some
cases, the first response will be defiance, and this is the small self demanding its way. “I
will not know myself anew. I cannot change. And the will that I have, in spite of the fact
that it has brought me pain, is the best I have. I will live with it as I can.” We are not
denouncing the small self through the intention to align the Divine Will in purview in
action. In fact, what we are doing is reclaiming will because nothing of you can be outside
of God. So the reclamation of will is really quite simply the agreement that the will you
have is in alignment with the True Self. In the past we have called it a braiding of the will
—the will of the small self, the will of the divine, in a braid, and then in completion as
one, one will. The idealization of the Divine—the Father, if you wish, you can call it what
you want—and the small self in separation is no longer, because, in the braiding of the
will, you and the Father or the Source are indeed one in the action of will, which is for the
furtherance of the Kingdom in manifestation.
Now, the will of the Divine is not what you assume it to be. Many of you would think,
“Well, there goes all the fun. My days of joy are over. So much for this lifetime.” What
you are, in fact, agreeing to is the divine potential operating as you for the good of all.
And this is in joy. It is in action. It is in agreement to the True Self and its expression. It
does not deny you anything. The pleasures of form will be present here because you have
taken form. You may enjoy the body. You may enjoy the beautiful sky, the swim in the
sea. You may enjoy the life you have and the bounty that is available. But this is all known
in a higher octave than you are used to operating in. As we have said prior, everything
exists in multiple octaves, and your experience of the world you live in is in fact
transformed, and, because you see your world from a higher vantage point, the world is
lifted to your sight, which is the resurrection of the Divine in all things by your increased
amplification and awareness of it.
Now, each of you who comes to us has made choices based in fear. Some of you were
harmed when young, had a difficult adolescence, a painful adulthood. You’ve carried the
ramifications of those choices with you, those bruises from prior experience. You believe
yourself to be humbled by what has happened to you, to the agreement that you cannot
rise beyond these things. In fact, that is not so. As the Divine in alignment, in agreement,
in a choice to know itself in full realization, every bruise, every injury, every pain may be
re-known. Again, we have to say, what you put outside of God calls you to the darkness.
So the inclusivity of all experience, in a high alignment, becomes the responsibility of the
one who knows who she is. “I am a divine being in spite of what I went through” would
be the small self’s claim. “I am a divine being and I always have been” is a claim of truth.
You don’t earn your divinity. It is your birthright. And the reclamation of the Divine
operates beyond time, so your awareness of who you are, in this very moment, claims you
in history, and in future tense, as the Divine Self you have always been and may only be in
the high octave.
 Now, as we teach, we have claims we make to support you all in comprehension and
agreement. And the claim of Divine Will—“I know myself in Divine Will”—is a claim
that will support you in the alignment you require. It is effortful still in that you are
making the choice, but as you ascend in octaves, as you align to the True Self, it is who
and what you are, any more than you can be what you are in expression. And by this we
mean your alignment in will is the product of operating in the upper classroom. It is the
product of the consciousness that has made the choice. Once the choice is made and
finally realized in fullness, there is no more need to make the choice because you have
expressed as it. You are not trying to become something you are not. You will never be a
saint. You don’t need to be one. You need to be who and what you are as the True Self in
its expression.
Don’t struggle here, friends, because to struggle is to make difficult what must in fact
be done in ease. You cannot build the mountain of faith through anxiety and fear. You can
perceive the mountain and rise to it incrementally as you say yes to it. You are fraught
with fear when you believe you are being given a mandate, or that what you have been
may perhaps have been wrong. You have never been wrong. The choices you made in fear
were the choices you knew and claimed and perhaps learned through. And whatever they
have been, they have brought you to this perfect moment when who and what you are may
be reclaimed in alignment to Divine Will. The resurrection of the Divine Self in operation
is done with will, not at the exclusion of it. You have been gifted with free will, and it is a
choice of free will to align it to the will of Source. The claim you make—“I know who I
am in truth, what I am in truth, how I serve in truth”—is the requirement of the initial
alignment to move into agreement, in confirmation of who and what you are, in the Upper
Room. But how you express in the Upper Room, which is in fact the point of this text, is
the claim of will in alignment.
Now, as we say these words to you today, we say them in love. You want what you
want when you want it. You expect to get what you think you should have. You demand
the things you were told to have. And you have an agreement of what can be claimed. And
the lists grow as you choose as the small self, who will never be satisfied with the things
of this world. To grow in Spirit is to comprehend that, while the manifest world is here to
enjoy, here to learn through, its very nature is transient, and your dependence upon
anything of this world to tell you who and what you are, what you have empowered in
fear, what you have been asked to believe, becomes an idol that you have prayed to at the
cost of truth. Enjoy the world, yes, but do not worship the things of this world. Enjoy your
fellows. Know the Divine in them. Know the Divine as them. But do not give your
authority to anyone in flesh. Reserve that for the Divine. The claim of truth—“I know who
you are”—is a claim of agreement in coherence to the inherent Divine, the great equalizer.
You are all of one Source in expression, in wonderful uniqueness. And the manifest self,
in agreement to will, will support all because the Divine as you cannot and will not
operate in selfishness.
Once again he interrupts. “It doesn’t sound like much fun. What are you asking of us
really?” We have already asked you to offer yourselves in service. And, because you have
agreed, you are receiving this teaching. Understand, friends, that joy and wonder may be
claimed. And, while fun is a wonderful thing, you are allowing it to claim you at the cost
of wonder and joy. You may have all the fun you like in the Upper Room. We enjoy
ourselves greatly here. How you wish to operate in expression, in alignment to the Divine
Will, aligns you to the independence of choice that can be conceived of in the high octave.
You are not surgically being implanted with Divine Will. The will that you know yourself
in is what is moving into agreement to a new expression. And the joy you receive in
benefit of this will be beyond what you can imagine.
He asks, “Why? How is it more?” Your stability, your agreement to be stable in the
world you know, has required a density of expression. And the density of expression that
you have found yourself in, in many ways precludes your access to the wonders of the
higher realms, which are present here and always have been. If you wish to stay in dense
form, you will have the experience of this plane in whatever way you choose. And, while
that is true for anyone and everything, we are simply saying there is more to be known,
more to be claimed, and your reception in the high octave will transport you beyond the
known to the infinite world where time itself ceases to operate, and you may know
yourself in infinite wonder.
We will close this lecture now with this benediction. We are seeing each of you, each
of you in this encounter with us, in the highest level of agreement you may confirm. And,
as we say yes to you, as we say yes to all, we lift you each to your own capacity, to your
own alignment in Divine Will. We know who you are in truth. We know what you are in
truth. We know how you serve in truth. You are free. You are free. You are free.
(PAUSE)

When we teach you about what you are, we reclaim you as what you are. And a
reclamation is the manifestation of who you have always been as who and what you are.
Now, the manifest self has choices, and, in congruence with the Divine Self as she truly is,
as he stands before himself in a mirror, the choices must require him to benefit others. The
claim “I know how I serve” has been described to you already, and the ramifications of
that claim by the one who knows who he is support the reclamation of the Divine that is
inherent in all. As the Divine that is inherent in all is reclaimed, the action of God, or what
you might call God, which has always been to realize itself through all things, is made
known. To be made known is to be realized. The realization of the Divine in the material
realm for the benefit of all is the action of this text. Every text we have brought forth has
held an action, an attunement, a name that could invoke a response in the reader. And this
book, Beyond the Known: Realization, is to support realization, which is manifestation, in
the claim you have been offered. The realized self realizes all.
Now, what it means to be realized is to be re-known beyond the structure, the finite
structure, the shell, the encasement that form has known itself through, to the realization
of form beyond the systems of containment. This actually means that the body itself is
transformed in amplitude and vibration, and the reclamation of body conforms itself in the
Upper Room to the requirements that the form may take to benefit others. Now, when we
speak of form in this regard, we are actually not excluding will, but we are preferring for
this moment to teach the manifestation of body as requirement.
 Now, body isn’t even what you really think it is. It is a system, it is an organism, there
is blood that pumps, there are eyes that see, fingers that touch. But the body is actually
manifest of a higher octave that has chosen to take dense form for its experience. To
release the body from the density of form, the density that the form has taken, is actually
to relinquish an idea. And the idea that is being relinquished is a simple one—that form is
absolute, that form is intractable, that form is defined in matter and cannot be made new.
Anything you see before you was once something else. Even the man beside you, the
woman you see on the street, was once an embryo, was once an idea, was once energy
without form. Everything that you see before you has had another name at any given time.
The man you know of as Fred was once “Baby, Male,” in an incubator before his parents
gave him the name. The table was once an oak tree. And the things you see in a store were
once the substance that they were created from.
The idealization of finite form and intractability must be understood briefly. It is much
easier to navigate a world where forms that have taken form are always what they seem to
be. It gives you the opportunity to name and to claim and to choose in obvious ways. The
identity you hold as the Divine Self, once in form, in realization as form, must encourage
the body to know itself in a new way.
“What does this mean?” he asks. “I’m confused by this teaching so far.” What it
actually means, Paul, is that your idea of the body is what supports the body—in its shape,
in its age, in all things you may know. Every idea that you can share, that has been agreed
to, has become codified, embraced by the species, and you align to the expectations of
history in limited ways that would actually preclude you from receiving the new. Once
form is understood as an expression of the Divine, and as will is offered to the Divine,
how form expresses may transform as well because form will no longer be limited by the
codifications that history has brought to it. Imagine you live in a world where the language
that you use decides what everything is. “That is an old man,” and, by claiming the old
man as old, you gift him with all the properties of age, as you perceive age. You may
claim him in wisdom, you may claim him in feebleness. Do you understand this? How you
perceive age indoctrinates the manifestation to an idea that it will then conform to. When
the species does this, the species goes into agreements of what it may expect.
Now, the ramifications of this are such that you end up recycling expectation,
generation by generation. And it is rare that humanity takes a leap of its own accord to
realize itself in a new way. We will have to tell you that this is occurring now, and in ways
you will see in future generations. The elasticity of form, of gender, of race—these things
that many are now seeking to define in ways that you would call black and white—are
actually reclaiming themselves beyond duality. And the design of the body itself, in its
perfection, will benefit from this. You all become the Divine in form as may be known by
you. However, what this design is, while the surface of the body may not be transformed,
the intention that the body has to know itself in a high octave will transform the
experience of the body and the ability of the senses to perceive what exists in the higher
manifest world. The body itself must mutate, in some ways, for its receptivity to amplify
to what exists in the high room.
 Now, when you understand that the True Self, in alignment in will, can govern the
body, you will release the need to control the body through lower will. What this means, in
some ways, is the alignment of the Divine Will in governance of form supports form in
acquiescing to Divine Will. The form that the body has taken, the well-being of the body,
how the body expresses itself in manifestation, will actually be transformed once it is
given over to the true nature that the Divine Will would claim for it. The best that the
small self can do would be to align to an idea of well-being as science has dictated it, but
even science is limited in this regard. If the Divine as what you are knows itself in form,
realizes itself in form, the will that calls forth the changes that are required will be done in
agreement to a potentiality that has not yet been made manifest.
Now, if you understand that, in the Upper Room, you may know things that you could
not know in the lower vibration, see things that the small self has been precluded from
seeing, experience things that could not be known in dense vibration, you will have to
understand that the translation of experience in manifestation must concur with the higher.
The body itself becomes the vehicle of expression for the Divine, and with that aligns to
its capacity through the senses to begin to experience what is already present in a higher
way. Just as you cannot make the self divine, you cannot make the self experience what
exists in the higher octave. But, as you align to the high octave and become receptive to its
presence, what experiences can be claimed here will be known by you as you are prepared
for them.
“What does that mean,” he says, “prepared for them?” In all ways, the systems that
you have operated with in agreement to what is possible have codified your experience.
The claim “I am free, I am free, I am free,” which we have taught you prior, supports the
release of the agreements made by the collective of what may be known and experienced.
The limitations that have governed you are then released, and you become, in alignment,
the vehicle of change that may experience itself without the limitations it has been trained
in through the small self. At this place of alignment, you are no longer predicating your
experiences upon historical data, but upon what is present and what you may perceive in
the Upper Room. The manifestation of the Upper Room as the manifest world, we have to
say, is where we hope to take you, not in unison, because it will not happen in unison, but
through those who lift, who create the opportunity for the lifting of all by nature of their
expression, “I know how I serve.”
Now, once you are in alignment and abiding in the Upper Room, free of the limitations
of historical data to conform to what was, you may begin to embrace in increments what
can be known by you in a higher way. “Why in increments?” he says. For your own well-
being. To have an experience of what exists in the high octave without having balance,
and agreement to remain balanced, may actually disrupt your life to the degree that you
will not be able to re-find it. We wish you in balance. The young man who learns to walk
upon a tightrope learns first when the tightrope is strung low. He is not lifted high in the
air. As he learns balance, and as he lifts to a higher wire, there is a net present for him in
case he falls. Eventually he becomes skilled in operating in a high way. The net is no
longer needed because what was once a thin wire has expanded to a platform that he has
arrived to where he may walk in great confidence. That is the arrival of the manifest self
in the Upper Room. You are being taken to your arrival of agreement of manifestation
here in increments so that you may maintain it.
He is interrupting. “But there are people who have large experiences of other worlds,
and then they come back transformed by them. Is that what happens here?” Actually, no.
Your experience of the upper levels is cumulative. Each design itself is understood by you
through your experience of it. As you accrue experience, you continue to expand, and how
you perceive what you see in a higher way is integrated by you. It becomes the new
normal, not an exotic experience that you would seek to recapture, but simply a way of
being.
“Is this really possible?” he asks. “Can this really be done?” The first thing you must
understand is it is already done in the high octave. All we are doing is bringing you here
for the realization of it. The extent that you can integrate the vibration in manifest form,
and align the will to its true nature to be of God in its expression, will support your
reclamation of experience in this high octave and the maintenance of it. We have often
been asked how to maintain a high vibration. People often say, “I’ve had the experience. It
was wonderful. And then it was gone.” The experience of the high room may be available
to some in brief states of consciousness. This is always beneficial to the soul, who seeks to
return there. At least you know it’s there, so you may journey back. But the maintenance
of it must be done from the higher room. You cannot navigate the high octave from the
low, but you can manage the low from the high. Do you all understand this? So supporting
you in realization of the high becomes the manifestation that you ask for.
“What is it like there?” you may ask. It is just like your life—without fear, without
self-judgment, without the need to judge others, without the need to war, and without the
agreements of the communal authority, that you have ascribed power to, to be something
you were never intended to be. And what that is, is the small self and its ideas of what it is
allowed. Reclamation of truth has been the asking of you, “I am willing to know myself in
truth, I know who I am in truth.” When you move to truth, you move beyond the lies that
have been taught to you that you may have believed and given great credence to. We say
on your behalf that the life that you will live in the Upper Room is the life you can
imagine when you are no longer asleep to your true nature.
The Christ has come as every human being, but the flowering of it requires the
awareness of its potential, and, because you have been lied to for so very long, you have
misbelieved the nature of your being. To know yourself as worthy has been an important
part of these teachings. How could you not be worthy would be our question for you. You
are claiming your true inheritance, and the Upper Room is where this commences.
We will take a pause for Paul. Period. Period. Period.
(PAUSE)

When we teach you about independence, we are speaking of independence from the
mandates of history and the rule of the small self, who has decided so much in fear. When
we speak to will, we speak to the authority that you have been gifted with to choose the
lives you live. To acquiesce the will to the Divine is to decide that the will that you have
been gifted with is in union with Source. In union means at one with the will of Source, so
that you understand yourself as acting in a union in all areas of your life.
Now, your independence from God, in some ways, is what you decide when you
believe yourself to be separate. Interdependence and reliance upon is what happens when
you begin to understand yourself in relation to God, and union is what happens when you
have agreed to be as you can be as of the Source of all creation. To go into union with
Source is not to disintegrate as a small self, it’s to be responded to as the Source that is
inherent in you. And will is a part of who you are and can also be met in this agreement.
Now, when we teach about independence, we must understand that your requirements,
the evolution of the individual soul, must be comprehended as important and what you
have come to do. And the soul evolves within this merging of union with Source, but is
not dependent upon it for the alignment to its lessons. The soul will demand that its
lessons will be met while you are in form, whether or not you align to high will. How you
learn your lessons, how you are met through your experience in the Upper Room, will
vary drastically, depending on what you have come to learn and what level of agreement
you are choosing to learn through. You may learn your lessons in a low vibration. You
may learn through fear. You may learn through anger. You may learn through the horrific
ramifications of choice for one country to dominate another. You may learn the hard way,
if you choose. But you may also learn through the radical unfoldment of the Christ as who
and what you are and what it is in all manifestation. When this happens, the trumpets sing,
and what you understand of as great change is upon you, but in agreement to divine
potential.
“Is there destruction in divine potential?” There can be, yes, but never of what is
required. When you have a house with no foundation, the house may fall at the first wind.
If the foundation of the house is strong, you may repair the house if that is what is
required. If a new house must be built upon the old structure, you will know it, and it will
be beneficial. To destroy the old to create the new may be a requirement in some cases.
But, as the Divine, the Christed Self, knows itself in love, it brings no harm to what it
meets. You may learn your lessons individually and collectively through force, through
anger, or through love, and the love that is brought to your fellows as you recognize them
as fellow travelers seeking to meet himself, herself, through each interaction with the
Divine that is present in all.
Each of you comes to us with a desire for union, and the desire for union has been
responded to you by us in the texts we have brought through Paul. But union itself is not
the ideal. If there is an ideal, the ideal would be manifestation of the Divine in a devout
way as you understand yourself as participatory to the reclamation of the Kingdom. Those
of you who have come forth and offered their hands and hearts, their vibratory fields will
be called forth in action. When you imagine union as a state of being, you imagine
yourself floating in an eternity of bliss and love. And, in fact, while you are in a body, you
will attend to the body and the requirements of form. You require shelter and food, you
require warmth in the winter, and you require the benefits of interaction with your fellows
in order to recognize what is true in every human being. The Christ has come in all, but
the recognition of this still remains precluded by the one who fears that she has no right to
the Kingdom. The Kingdom, as we have said many times, the recognition, the awareness
of the inherent Divine, is brought into manifestation through the claim “I know what you
are in truth.” The what again is always the manifest claim, and to claim “I know what you
are” is to recognize the inherent Divine and bring it forth. This is an action you take first
in the acknowledgment that it must be so because it can only be so, and then from the
position that that is always so because it could never not be so, and, because it is always
so, there is no need to claim it. It simply is. You are the benefactor of the landscape you
express in and through by nature of being.
When we speak to will in this regard, we are speaking of the acceptance of the position
that you are taking. “I have become an ambassador of truth, and in truth a lie will not be
held.” To know the self in truth is to move beyond the names things have been given, what
things have been called, and the reliance upon the language of history to predicate the
future. To be the ambassador of truth is to decide that what you see before you will be
revealed and then realized in truth. And to realize anything in truth is to see and to know
the divine principle that must be at the Source of it. As everything you see is lifted to the
Upper Room where you now abide, the world you see becomes the sparkling reflection of
the claims you have made in dominion as the one who knows who she is. You partake of
the bounty of the Kingdom simply by sharing it with anyone and everyone you meet. You
become the ambassador because the action of the Christ as you is to know the Christ in all.
And, as the Christ is known in all, all is lifted by nature of being.
He is interrupting. “What if someone doesn’t want to lift, something cannot be lifted?
What do you say about that?” Your recognition of the inherent Divine is a recognition of
what is only true and always true, and the mask the other wears cannot stand in the face of
truth because the mask he or she has taken is a lie. The personality structure, while valid in
its ambition, has never been the True Self. And when the True Self is unmasked, when it is
seen by the one who knows who she is, the Divine in the one you see becomes the action
of reclamation in the other. The Divine is the reclamator. All you are doing is knowing the
truth, and the reclamation happens.
“But doesn’t their will need to be invoked? Don’t they give permission?” Ascension
happens at the level of the individual through agreement, but it is rarely the personality
self who agrees or would decide. In most cases, the personality structure surrenders. She
cannot meet the opportunity for growth that is presented by the Christ by herself, so she
aligns as the one who may receive it. The idea of surrender to one’s true nature would be
the example we would offer you. To surrender to the true nature is the claim “I know who
I am.” You are not enabling the Divine to do the work of the Divine. You are surrendering
to its truth to embody as you. To know the truth in another is to enable them to make their
own claim. Now, the choice is theirs at the level of personality, but you can claim the
Divine in an individual or in all those residing upon this globe. The effect is the same. You
are claiming what is always true, and, in this claim, you lift those you know that you are
claiming, that you are realizing, in the Upper Room by nature of being.
In many teachings, you had to humble yourself, grovel before the altar. We will say
this to you. Humility is a requirement, but it may come in different ways. “I am willing to
learn, I am willing to know, I am willing to accept, I am willing to change” are all claims
made in humility. “I demand to change, I demand to know, I will be met as I say I should”
is the claim of the small self. Now, as you operate as the True Self, you claim differently.
The claim “I know who you are” holds the Divine as the claim. It is not a humble claim, it
is a claim of victory because the Divine knows the Divine and recognizes its presence in
all that it can encounter. The names you have been given in history, the heretics, the ones
who were burned, who spoke the truth and were denied their place, are being released at
this time because what was heretical was generally heretical to an institution, and not to
God. The understanding here is that the claim of the Divine, and humanity’s inherent
divinity, is the birthright that is being re-known. You do not grovel to receive your
inheritance. It is your right, but you must say, “I am worthy of receiving my inheritance,
but I accept it in deep humility because I know the Source of all things.”
Do you understand? You are being gifted with a great opportunity here, but you must
take it and say yes, and, as you say yes, we sing with you in the Upper Room. Period.
Period. Period.
DAY TEN

Each of you decides your idea of who and what you are commensurate with your
understanding and the values instilled in you by the world you express through. Each of
you decides what it means to be a man, what it means to be a woman, what it means to be
loved and to love. Each of you comprehends in accordance with the systems that you have
been regulated by, and by this we mean you understand yourself with a barometer that you
have been given for understanding. Each of you says yes to the scales that you express
through. Each of you says yes to the comparisons you make, one against the other, this
against that. Each of you decides to know yourself with the mirror that has been handed to
you to know yourself through.
Now, as the Divine Self, there is no mirror. There is expression, perception, what you
see, and the knowing that you instill in what you see because the one who knows has the
awareness of the claim “I am free.” Because she knows she is free, she is not seeking to
label, to emblemize, to create a dictate or a mandate of what a thing should be called. She
allows what she sees to be revealed to her. And what is revealed in the Upper Room will
always be known in truth.
What this means is you are no longer deceived by the veils of illusion that would seek
to tell you what is meritful and what is not, what is a good thing or bad, what is a pleasant
thing or unpleasant thing, because those things are known as values that you have abided
by. The thing is simply known and received, and the consciousness you hold at this level
of vibration and attunement receives the information in truth, and, consequently, the thing
seen is in fact realized or known in a higher comprehension.
So much of what you decide is based on the ideas of what should be, how things
should be. “This is more valuable than that.” “This is a higher claim than that.” And those
comparisons work as a grid or a measuring system that you are then bound by. If
everything exists within the grid, how can it be known anew?
Nothing can be comprehended until it is first seen or known in a high way. There is no
exception here, and we tell you why we say this. Immediately, you wish to know how an
atrocity can be known in a high way, how something you would call evil can be known in
a high way. But we would have to reprimand you by saying you are looking at the thing
within that scale of good and evil, light and dark, perhaps high and low, although high and
low as we teach it is simply a descriptor of resonance. When you clarify your meaning of
good and evil, what you will understand is that what is good has been spoken as good, has
been decided as good in comparison to something else. “She did well in school, she got a
B minus.” “He did poorly in school, he got a D.” “She’s an excellent student, look at that
A.” Within that scale, there is a codification of learning, and what has been learned has
been graded in a scale in comparison to others. If the scale does not exist and the grades
are not present, how you would comprehend the learning of one student would not be in
comparison to others, but in the alignment that the student holds.
The one who knows the truth of something has claimed the truth and has inherited the
wisdom of the truth as part of her experience. The one who learns information that he or
she may parrot may have learned recitation and nothing more. Experience, finally, is what
we teach you, and your experience as the Divine Self liberates you beyond the known,
beyond the frames of reference that you have used to decide what is meaningful, what is
good or evil, high or low. Each of you decides, in your own way, that the Divine as you is
the true meaning of being. The idea that what you are is a bunch of cells holding together
in skin for the purpose of dying one day will be what claims you in limited experience. In
fact, what you are is the manifestation of the Divine in form who has come for the reason
we teach you. Your knowing of who and what you are claims you in accord with a level of
agreement where the manifest world can be re-known.
Now, each of you decides what the will means through your choice to claim the self in
any intention. “I will pick the apple from the tree” is a choice you make. “I will eat the
apple” is the choice you make. “I will throw away the core” is the choice you make. “I
will marry the man or woman,” “conceive the child,” “grow old.” These are also choices
that you make, and the will that informs them is in agreement only to the choices that the
small self can comprehend. The will itself, when moved into union with true divinity,
expresses beyond a scale. And what can be claimed, or known, or decided need not be
conferred by prior history, but what is possible in the Upper Room.
In the Upper Room, there is no scale or barometer to decide you, to define you, to
claim you beyond the small self, because the small self is not operating at this level. And,
as you are free of the instructions that the small self has used to navigate a reality in lower
vibration, you are free to claim what can be claimed beyond the systems of logic that have
been endowed upon your species through the millennia. What this means is that collective
agreement to manifestation in limitation can be transcended by one who is not bound by
the scale of reason or possibility that is defined by previous information that has either
been coerced or settled upon by all of you.
“An example?” he says. You live to be the age you perceive yourself to be, and how
you understand age is through a shared calendar, an agreement to time that in and of itself
is a decision that you have claimed and have been bound by. We are not saying you will
exist forever in form, but the man who believes in age, and expects to become old, in
certain ways is quite well guaranteed that experience. “Oh, but my genes. My father had
this, I will certainly have it.” Perhaps you may. Perhaps you may learn through that
experience. But to define yourself in expectation of that experience is to hand over your
will to a decision that was made by others who came before you. The claim “I am free” is
in fact the claim of liberation from systems of control, agreements made in fear, and the
collective mind that believes what it was taught and will seek to confirm the old because it
cannot conceive that something more could possibly exist.
Again, to the Upper Room. Everything exists in the Upper Room to be re-known, to be
reclaimed in divine accord. A teacup may be known in a low octave or a high octave. It is
still a teacup. But the vibration of the teacup in the Upper Room or the higher octave is
resonantly different as you go up in scale. The same is true for the body through the claim
“I know what I am.” And the same is true in your experience of your world as you become
the perceiver who is not responding to historical data, but the revelation of the Divine that
may be seen by the one who knows who she is. And the act of will that is required here is
a very simple one:

“I am aligning the Divine Will to all that I encounter. I become as Divine Will in
my acquiescence to it. And I allow the Divine to decide with me, as me, and for me
as I become one in tone, in vibration, with the amplitude of the True Self expressed
as Will, the Divine as Will.”

The Divine as what you are, in alignment, is the act of will as the divine force that
expresses itself in certainty upon this plane.
“What does that mean, in certainty?” he asks.
In certainty means you are in your knowing, and any act of will is chosen in accord, in
truth, with the who and the what that you are. And the dilemmas of the past—“should I,
should I not?”—are actually released as the True Self in its mandate claims a world anew.
You become the vibration of the Christed Self in manifestation, in action, and in
agreement to everything you see. Underline the word everything. The Divine as you, in its
perspective, claims the manifest world and lifts it to its present. It does not confirm
negative amplitude or fear. It does not agree to the old because it exists beyond it. It does
not confirm collective agreement, simply because it exists in a realm that has not been
defined by the collective.
If you were all to imagine that a certain heaven resembled a certain thing, that is where
you would all go to upon your passing, to the expected realm of the hereafter. That would
be the collective agreement informing the other world. In fact, the Upper Room, the fabric
of the Divine in expression in manifestation, holds no barrier to definition, but cannot be
defined by the old because the old does not express here. Understand what this means.
Imagine you have a sweater, a nice old sweater. It has memory. The nice old sweater does
not exist in the Upper Room as it has because it does not retain the memory of what it
was, nor are you endowing it with memory or codification because you have no need to. It
is still a sweater, what you may know as a sweater, but in fact what it is is a thing you
might wear to protect the body and not more than it means. Do you understand the
concept? Everything you cherish, you cherish because you were taught value. Everything
you disdain, you disdain because you were taught its lack of merit. And the scale of value
that you operate with in this lower accord does not exist in the Upper Room. If you wish
to embark on a memory and decide its value, you may do so. We do not deny you that. But
we are saying the level of release that is available to you each in the high octave precludes
you from enmeshing yourself in the data of history that, like it or not, will reclaim you in
the low vibration that you know of as your history.
Why is your history low vibration? Well, in fact, it is not. But your history is only what
you think it is. Do you understand that? “My mother was cruel to me.” You understand
your mother, once again, through the lens of data, the information of history that you have
been claimed by—the claim of good and evil, good and bad, high and low, as decided by
your culture or the things you’ve thought must be true because you believed them to be so.
We are speaking to you as beings who can choose to align the will beyond the
codification of time, and all memory is is an idea of what happened in another time, and
the idea of time itself is really just a construct that you have invested importance in.
“When I was fifteen, I looked quite wonderful,” says the one whose memory of the age of
fifteen is fraught with the memory of what she was not, or should have been, or might
have been. “When I was fifteen, I looked a certain way,” and that certain way is an
idealization of self that is perpetuated by the lens of memory and nothing more.
The world you see, everything you see around you, has been labeled by those who
came before you, and you wander this world, interpreting those labels and thinking that
what things have been called are what they truly are. In fact, what is available to you in
comprehension in the Upper Room exists beyond the known, and, as you agree to this,
your learning truly begins.
We will stop this lecture now. This is the end of the last chapter of the text. Period.
Period. Period.
 5

THE RECLAMATION OF THE DIVINE

DAY ELEVEN

To justify what you have known, to decide that what has happened was what needed to
happen, is only appropriate at the level of the small self. The Divine as you has a
comprehension of necessity born in the present moment. She does not resurrect the past to
dissect it, she does not seek to rationalize to have it confer with her idea of what was, has
been, or could have been. She accepts an event as an out-picturing of consciousness that
was, and without emblemization, which simply means she is not looking to confer great
meaning upon an event. It is something else that was.
Now, if you look at your own lives and see how much time you spend looking at the
past, deciding what was, what had great meaning, what should never have happened that
you are still contending with, you will begin to realize that the present itself is a museum
of history and your artifacts are all over, and being interpreted again and again through the
perspective of the consciousness you hold at any given moment. Once you understand that
the only meaning anything has is the meaning you give it, you will begin to move beyond
the requirements of history to reinforce itself upon the present moment and then dictate
the future in agreement to what was. The challenge here is that the lives you live have
been built upon history, so to Paul it sounds an impossibility.
“How do I walk into a room and not call the chair the chair, or remember the curtains
from the day I purchased them? How do I forget what a color is when I don’t like the color
green and I see it elsewhere? What is to stop the memory or the dislike from collaborating
with my experience of the present moment?” This is a misunderstanding on your part,
Paul. As you ascend in consciousness, your perceptions change, and how you perceive
anything is a direct action of the consciousness you hold. When you forget a language,
when it loses its meaning, you stop relying upon it to communicate your feelings or your
needs. You have another language to direct you. Each of you decides that the way you live
your life is predicated either on history or the moment you stand in, and the moment you
stand in need not be informed by the tenets of history once you understand that it is you
who calls them forth. The chair is a chair because you know what a chair is through your
relation to history. The sky is called the sky and the properties of the sky as shared
construct are understood by you in a collaborative field, a shared idea, and the language
you use to describe it reclaims it as it has been claimed since the first thing was called sky
that, in fact, was something other, prior to its name.
“Prior to its name—what does this mean?” Very simply put, everything that has a
name was once nameless. Can you understand this? To move to the nameless is to move
beyond language, and, as language is moved beyond, the heredity that language would
cost you is actually dismantled. “But we love language,” he says. “It’s how we
communicate. You can’t take language away from us.” We are not taking language away
from you, we are actually giving you a new one. But in order for something to be made
new, it needs to move to the nameless, to the Source of its creation, to be made known as
what it has always been. The Divine Self, who knows who she is, can be without a name
and still be what she is. The names we have offered you for it are all symbols, ways for
consciousness to hold on to the idea, ways to comprehend something that is in fact
impossible to comprehend in language. But you do your best, we do our best, at this stage
of this teaching. The nameless, we suggest, is what you are when you know who you are
in completeness, when the sense of identity you have held has been dismantled, re-known,
re-created in such a fashion that your sense of self is actually absorbed by the Divine at the
level of completion. This simply means that, as you are, you are no longer what, you are
no longer the artifact, you are no longer the thing, but you have become the the. “What
does that mean?” The the, the thing with no name.
Now, to be the thing with no name creates you in accordance with the mandates of the
moment you stand in. In many ways, what you become is expression, full expression of
your divine nature. In the past we have used examples. You have become John as the
Divine, Alice as the Divine, but when John is no longer, when Alice has no name, you are
still the Divine. The artifact, in some way, becomes the language that you have rendered a
reality through, and, as you evolve in consciousness toward full expression, you
comprehend that the requirements of language, in many ways, is to re-assume the idea that
created the word, or the need for the word to begin with. “But is a world without language
possible?” Again, this is Paul misinterpreting the teaching. The comprehension we offer
you here is about what exists in what we call the Upper Room, where you may move to
the nameless and then begin to understand that, in that plane of expression, the nameless
plane, what may be known may be known in a new way. When you are not re-creating the
old, because that’s all you have known to expect, when you are not re-creating what was,
you can become gifted with the potential that the nameless holds.
What does it mean to know the nameless? It means to move to the comprehension of
the Divine that is present in manifestation and needs no manifestation to be present. It
becomes the agreement to lift beyond form, while maintaining form. It becomes the
agreement to become sound, to become the sound of the nameless, the tone or the
expression of it without the tags, emblemizations, meanings that have been endowed upon
it. Your idea of God, your idea of what must be named God, is informed by thousands of
years of ideology, and the idea of God itself has become a totem, a construct, a wooden
idol that you seek to pray to. God has no name. God is the nameless, the absolute, the
unobstructed. God is the manifestation, and the lack of manifestation, all at once. The
manifest world that you have named as things—the chair, the sky—are all God and named
as such by you. “I know God as chair, God as sky,” and beyond the name of chair or sky
there is only God, and beyond the name of God there is everything and there is nothing.
There is sound, there is silence, and they are one.
The great sound that we would call God, in intonation, is the song of the soul in
complete resonance with its truth. The name of God without sound is who and what you
are when even the form you have taken has moved beyond language or the names things
have been used to codify expression. What this means is that the entirety of being, in
assumption as what it has always been, is a great cry, a great silence, a beautiful song, and
a heartfelt weeping, all at the same time. There can be no expression without what you
know of as God, and therefore all expression, all great expression and small expression, is
God in expression as the who, as the what, as the sound of love, in knowing, in being,
without the name love to confuse it.
 “Now what does that mean?” he asks. Again, to language. You have heard the idea that
God is love, but even the word love is so tainted by history that its meaning is confused to
you. In love, in the vibration of love, what we know of as God, with the name God
attached, is an idea of a Source that is a benediction, that is caring, that will do what you
wish, as you wish it, if you would pray to it in a certain way. This is not God. This is not
love. All love is is the expression of the Source without the name love attached. If you
understand that God or Source, the nameless, exists beyond time, you can begin to
imagine that there was a time when even the idea of love was uncreated, unthought. To
move to the infinite in your potential is to actually release the codification of ideology that
would now limit you. And we must say that includes your idea of what love is, because
even that is now predicated by the inheritance you have claimed as a small self. If love is
God, and God is the nameless, then love is nameless. If love is nameless, even the idea of
love is in union and without names in the manifest Source that you experience yourself as.
If you understand where we are taking you in this instruction, it’s to a new idea of
infinity without the polarization of love and hate, light and dark, joy and sorrow. These are
all real things as you experience them, but only in that the language you use to describe
them is the language you have been taught to use as descriptors. You can say sorrow and
call to you the experience of sorrow that you understand sorrow to be, and the word itself,
the emblemization of emotion, codifies the emotion and claims it in a kind of separation
from the being that you are. “I feel sorrow” claims sorrow as something other. You can
never be sorrow. That can never be your being. But you may feel sorrowful. In that way,
you give identity to emotion and establish it in power and it governs your experience.
The nameless, we suggest, the Divine as who and what you are beyond codification
and the idea of form, must be created with an intention to know what the Divine is. When
the Divine has no name, and the qualities you would endow it with are no longer operating
through language, you begin to experience infinity. “What is infinity?” he asks. What
infinity is is the experience of the absolute. Because the absolute does not exist through
time—you may know it in time, but it is not through time that it is realized—you may
begin to comprehend what is always. And by always we mean what is always present, the
thing that informs creation, the thing that is manifest as you, and the amazing thing that
you become when you release the bondage that the small self has claimed through its
agreement to separation.
When we continue this teaching, we will claim you in the octave of infinity. We will
take a pause now for Paul. Thank you all for your presence.
(PAUSE)

When you decide things as the small self, you perpetuate the old because the small self
knows itself in history. When you claim the True Self and your great identity and you
move the will to a place of union or reconciliation with your divine purpose, your
expression, the manifestation of the Divine as who and what, begins to be how you know
yourself in accord with the world that you express in. That is the claim “I know how I
serve.” Now, in the infinite light, in the infinite Source, beyond time, beyond language,
beyond any idea you could possibly hold of what it means to be, the absolute may be
known in encounter, although not comprehended through the data, through the filters, and
with the language that the small self has used to describe his or her experience. The
willingness to experience infinity actually requires you to release the need for those filters,
for the language, because the nature of infinity, while it holds everything and nothing all at
once, is the way it knows itself through you. So to carry with it the language of old, to
decide what should be based on your presumption of what infinity is, is to claim yourself
as the small self and, consequently, know yourself in separation.
We are going to take a little trip with you now. Imagine for a moment that wherever
you sit, wherever you are, is a moment in time, a single moment in time, and everything
that may be experienced in this moment in time is available to you. Now imagine, if you
wish, that this is the only moment in time that you may ever know, because in fact that is
true. You may only know yourself or anything else in the present moment. Everything else
is history or expectation. When you expect anything, you use history to outline the
expectation, and while you may do this in the present moment, your escapade is actually
in your idea of the past or what you deem the future. So in this present moment, the only
moment there can ever be, we wish you to expand, to become larger than you think you
are. Imagine that the body itself, which is Source in vibration, is expanding, and the
energetic field is expanding as well. Imagine that the being that you are is expanding
beyond your idea of what it is possible to expand to. Imagine, if you wish, that the being
that you are has grown so much that you cannot see the outline of what you thought you
were. You have become an ocean or a sky in vibration. Now, from this perspective, where
the rules have already been broken, you can begin to understand that, in this moment,
beyond the limitation of form, you may begin to experience yourself beyond the idea of
time.
The idea of time is essential to understand. Your idea of time is based in collective
agreement to what time is, how many hours in a day, what constitutes a minute in time.
These are agreed upon things, so to move beyond the idea of time may not be to move
beyond time itself, but beyond the idea of time as a construct, as form, as a dictate that you
have ascribed power to. You are now as big as the sky, as great as the ocean, and from this
perspective you give permission to release the idea of time itself.
Now stay in this moment of great expansion and timelessness and imagine, for a
moment, that you are moving to a new plane of expression where time itself has never
been chosen, where the infinite now is the only expression that you may claim, and you
would be in truth here. In the Upper Room, the Divine Self as you knows herself in
infinity because she is not bound by the constructs of time, but in alignment to her eternal
nature. Your eternal nature inhabits the eternal plane, and, as you have lifted in vibration
to the Upper Room, you may claim your experience here in timelessness.
When there is no time, there is no limitation. There is no when, there is no “what if?”
because everything is expressed in this perfect now, and what is required is known to you
through the requirement, not through the asking of it, or the requirement that you would
seek fulfilled. When one is thirsty, one knows water. When one is tired, one knows sleep.
When one is one with God, one knows no separation. In infinity, in the infinite now, you
are met in vibration, in tone, in agreement to the True Self who exists beyond time, but
may know herself in time through the form that you have chosen to experience this life in.
Now, as we sing to you in vibration and tone, we are going to invite you to lift in
sound to the nature of infinity. Imagine the sound that you make when you join us in
sound is a bell that is always ringing—underline always—ringing in infinity, beyond the
decade, the eon, the millennium, beyond what you would construct as a system of
comprehension that you now know of as linear time. Beyond the known, beyond the sung,
beyond the tone, there is only one thing, the Absolute that is always present, the nameless
that exists beyond the known as infinity.
When we make this sound, we invite you, wherever you are, to join us in intention.
And all your intention needs to be is to merge with this sound, to become in union with its
tone, the peal of the bell. If you are moved to sing with us, trust that the note that you sing
is the perfect note to move into accord with us. And in this union we will experience
together timelessness and infinity. On the count of three, Paul.
One. Two. Three.
[The Guides tone through Paul.]
We are with you beyond form, beyond time, beyond your comprehension of what may
be known. We are with you in love, and beyond the word love in the true intention of it,
which is to cherish and hold dear as one with God. Period. Period. Period.
DAY TWELVE

Each one of you comes with an expectation of what it is like to know the Divine Self in
realization. You trust the ideas you’ve been given. “I may know myself as the True Self.”
But you don’t understand that the ability to recognize embodiment comes in
manifestation, not in the precursor to it, and the embodiment of the Divine Self is the
treatise we are offering you now.
The teaching of the Upper Room, the place of manifestation, the realm of
embodiment, may be comprehended by you first in ideology only in preparation for what
is to come. And what is to come, we have to say, is realization. When you realize who and
what you are, and you know it, the manifestation has occurred. There is no longer a
glimmer of hope. “I see my Divine Self up there on that mountain. I will race to her and
hope she is still there when I arrive.” It is the knowing that you cannot be other. And
embodiment, we have to say, which is the expressed realized self, the emissary or the
Christ in manifestation, has its own agenda beyond what the small self can even imagine.
“When I am holy and I pray all day and I do God’s bidding and I wear white” are the
ideologies that the small self might attach to her spiritual nature, what it looks like, what
you believe it to be, when, in fact, the realization of the Divine, the manifest Divine, is as
you, just as you, but in a new articulation, a new language or vibratory tone that co-
creates, in the manifest plane, dominion through the consciousness of the Divine. In other
words, the manifested self that in fact you are becomes participatory to the manifest world
in co-alignment, and the Divine in manifestation is what sings all about you as you know
yourself and your world. But it is you, not an idealized version of you, not the prettified
version.
He is interrupting. “Well, what of the world, then? Is it a prettified world? Is it a
peaceful world? Is it the same world in the higher octave? What do we see?”
Again, we have to remind you that what you anticipate is a product of logic, wishful
thinking, inherited ideas. The manifest Divine, or the True Self as who and what, in
knowing, knows what she sees. She excludes nothing from the fabric of the Divine
because all things are in manifestation. But we will say that the presence of the Divine in
its interaction with a lower vibrating field reclaims the field and lifts it to its knowing, its
purview. And the claim we make and will continue to make—“I Have Come”—is the
announcement that claims the resonance of the manifest world to the Christed Self.
Now, the idea here that we wish you to understand is re-creation. Manifestation in the
higher octave is re-creation. While you may know a chair as a chair and you may inhabit
the chair, your recognition of the chair in the Upper Room or the higher octave is a
translated remembrance of the old without carrying with it the identity or baggage the
object has held. In the new, the chair is known. In the new, everything you see is known
and re-interpreted, re-spoken, if you wish, in the language of the True Self.
“Now, what does that mean?” he asks. Well, the True Self’s language is vibratory, and
the language of the Divine, while utilizing the small self’s vocabulary, actually exists in a
new way. Through intonation and verbiage, the descriptors you use in new ways are
simply significators of your new relationship with that which is now manifest. Again, the
Divine Self is the one expressing here, and, while she has the ability to utilize all you have
known, she is translating language or vibratory tone in explicit ways with profound effect
upon the outside world.
“What does that mean?” he asks. Things are spoken into being in recognition of what
they truly are, not what they have been. And the realization of the Divine as you, or the
Word in action, is an articulation, not only of tone, vibration, and consciousness, but it is
the conduit for the expression of the Divine to flow through. And the Divine as you is in
no way limited by the articulations that you have utilized through history.
“Is there a new language?” he asks. Again, we have to say, Paul, what we introduced
this class with was the simple idea that the small self will seek to identify the Divine Self
and claim it as he thinks it should be, when, in fact, it is the Divine that claims the small
self and re-interprets it and reclaims the world through its expression of the small self. The
Divine as you, not you as the Divine, and the language of the Divine, in texture and fabric,
in tone and vibration, simply means that the one who speaks is operating in the Upper
Room. What is articulated at that level of intonation and vibration and tone has a causal
effect upon the expression of the manifest world. What you see, in fact, as the realized
self, is the re-interpretation of history in a higher form. In other words, we are not negating
history, we are lifting you beyond it where you may newly claim the vibratory world or
the octave of expression we call the Upper Room.
Now, each of you who comes to us in identity seeks penance. “Tell me what I must do
right and must release. Tell me what I have done wrong so I may rectify it.” And these are
the new ways we would answer those questions: The small self, who seeks penance, or to
abnegate what she is, or to self-define in low vibration, is in fact what is reclaimed or re-
known or re-pronounced by the True Self in the claims we have offered you. And the
claim “I Have Come,” which is the manifest Divine in full expression for the service to the
world she can offer, is the articulation or the renunciation of what has been. Now, by
renunciation what we mean is you are no longer ennobling fear, the small self’s fear, or
the small self’s negation of who and what she is. You cannot call yourself names as the
True Self. It’s preposterous to think you could. So the suffering self, or the small self with
the whip in hand, is actually held and re-known, and, in fact, appropriated in high service
because there can be no aspect of you that is separate from Source.
He interrupts again. “But can these things be released, or are they all re-integrated?”
Both may be true. If there is something that you have outgrown, there is no way to carry it
with you to the Upper Room. However, we have to say that if you have had an investment
in fear or in anger or in shame or self-doubt or debasement, they may need to be re-known
in order to be acclimated to and then moved beyond as you lift to the Upper Room. In fact
there is no self-abasement at that level of vibration. So what you integrate, in some ways,
is what you may call acceptance, or allowance, but for the purpose of integration and
moving beyond what has stood in the way of your expression. If there is no need for
something, it will be left behind. If it requires integration and realignment through you, if
there is purpose for it still, it will be made known and reclaimed in the harmonics that we
call the Divine Self in its expansion of tone.
 Now, this is a new idea for him, “The harmonics of tone?” The Divine Self has tone,
and every expression you can think of in the manifest world is also in tone. The fabric of
the experience that you inhabit here in shape and form, in solidity that you think is so
terribly real, is all sound and vibration. And the Divine as what you are, the manifest
Divine in skin and bone, in breath and blood, is also this. And, when you shift your
expression through the alignment as the Divine Self, the tone in articulation has the power
to know itself in the vibratory echo that confirms the divinity in anything else that has
taken form. The bell is rung as you, and it claims itself in sound, in tone, in everything it
encounters. The Christed Self as you is a manifest self. It is not an identity. It is not a new
way of walking around the world in your holiness. It’s the realization of the holiness that
has always been. And its tone, its allowance, is the claim “I Have Come.”
Now, when this is claimed as the True Self, the Monad, the divine expression of the
being that you are becomes as a diamond, and its many facets spread light without
intention because all the diamond can do is refract and reflect the light that is. It has no
other intention but to be, and because it is as it is, it claims the world in value, the
diamond in value and everything in value that the light may shine upon.
He interrupts. “But the light shines on some pretty awful things. We are not very
evolved as a species. We harm ourselves and each other. We war. We fight. We weep in
anger and despair. What does the light do upon the unholy?”
“What unholy?” we say. If nothing is holy there is no God, this is no teaching, and
your idea of the disposable self is perfectly appropriate to your growth. The identity of the
Divine is not gifted to you. It is inherited, implicit, and seeking to be known explicitly, and
this is done by the light that shines upon all. If something is revealed by the great light that
needs new ways, re-formation, re-knowing, reclaiming, it is done in octaves and in
agreement to the holiness that must be. You cannot make a thing holy, but you can sure try
to damn it. To damn anything, to put anything out of the light, is an action of the small
self, never the True Self. When the True Self sees an atrocity, it brings the light and the
action of the Divine to bear upon it. It needs no sword, it needs the claim of truth. “I Have
Come.” And it is never the small self who can claim that. The virtue of the small self at its
very best is it does not know its true authority. If it did, you would have been long gone,
and what we mean by this is the gift of this teaching is far more powerful than the True
Self in its expression has known itself through in form and field in centuries and in
thousands of years.
“Please refine this teaching,” he says. “What did you just say?” The realization of the
Divine in manifestation in consequence has not been fully realized in this way for
thousands of years. And, when we say in this way, we are not saying that there have not
been realized beings who walked the earth. What we are teaching is embodiment through
claims that have been called heretical in history and were always in truth. And the denial
of the inherent divinity, which is in fact your birthright and can only be true in a loving
God in a world of truth, was debased and withheld to you and from you in order for you to
be complicit in the betrayal of self that you have engaged in, in many ways, as a species.
When we teach these things, he grows concerned. He wants this teaching to remain
convenient to his sense of self or agreement to logic. What we have taught tonight is that
the claim “I Have Come,” which is an intonation of truth claimed as the True Self, is the
claim that can move a mountain. And it is fortunate that the small self, in its certainty, has
never attempted to appropriate it. It cannot be appropriated at that level. Sorcery has never
been this teaching, nor will it ever be.
To claim the Kingdom is to call it forth. To claim the Divine in another is to call it
forth. And the agreement to manifest, to know the self in realization at the cost of the old,
is the claim of the heretic and the holy man. They are often the same, you know. What
heresy has been indoctrinated as is speaking against the church or the institution. You
cannot claim heresy, in fact, as the Divine Self because the Divine Self is God as it knows
itself in individuation. The teaching of the Christ that you were taught has always been a
teaching of embodiment and manifestation and resurrection at the cost of the old, and the
Upper Room is where we sing and lift you to for the awakening of the world you live in.
This is no small teaching, friends. This is the Kingdom come to be through your
intention, through the sound and the force of your vibration in the articulation and in the
language of the God Self who has known itself as you.
We will say these words now to all who hear them. When you speak the words “I Have
Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” you are aligning to the alignment that will call forth
a new world. We will leave you, Paul, now. He is shifting, as he intoned the words. You
are, as well, as you spoke them. And the body itself, in intonation and expression in truth,
has come as you.
We thank you each for your presence. Period. Period. Period.
DAY THIRTEEN

Touch your face. Feel your face, please. Take a moment now and understand that what you
feel holds vibration. The solidity of what you feel is, in fact, an illusion. Everything is in
motion. Everything is in vibration. And everything you see before you can be re-
comprehended as vibration in what we call the Upper Room. The transition you make
from low vibration to high is in many ways the journey of the soul in remembrance to her
origin, his origin. And the origin of the soul, as we would explain it to you, is as of God,
an aspect of God that has chosen to learn through expression, in reconciliation with its
Source, through the passage of lifetimes that you undertake to know the self, to
comprehend the self and all manifestation as of God.
Now, nothing is separate from Source. Understand that. And any identity you can hold,
any way of knowing the self in form, is transitional within God. So you are God as Paul,
or as Philip, or as Alice, or as Joan. You are the Divine who has come in recollection of
itself in the aspect you have chosen to express through. Now, what the soul is is a
codification of vibration, with an identity, a soul echo, a remembrance of its vibration, its
awareness of what it is. The soul itself in comprehension with God is the manifestation of
lineage, and the lineage of God is everything it knows itself through. Everything that can
be known or even imagined is of God because nothing is outside it.
Now, the aspect of soul that you comprehend yourself through we will speak to as of
God in distinct ways. The manifestation of the Divine as God must be comprehended as
such. Paul needs a pause. We will take a moment.
(short pause)
What soul is is the manifestation of the aspect of God that expresses in vibration in an
understanding of independence in consort with the realization of Source. And the aspect of
you that seeks to be re-known, or the Christed Self in manifestation as you, is of soul, but
distinct from it. As you understand it, nothing is outside of God, and soul cannot be
outside of God. The Christed Self, or the aspect of God that seeks its realization as you, is
of soul, but it is not the soul because the soul itself is in progression, while the Christed
Self, in its realization, is not non-progressive, but is not here to learn. It is here to realize—
the Christ in realization through the form that you have taken. And the soul is of the spirit
and the spirit is God is the journey you undertake through these teachings.
Each of you who comes, who witnesses, who bears witness to the teachings either in
text or through our presence, is being received in multiple levels. The Divine as what, the
manifestation of the Divine as what, the form that you have taken and agreed to be in
knowing, in realization, in fruitfulness, we will say, the comprehension of the Christ in
form, is the ability of form to re-know itself in the octave of the Christ. And the octave of
the Christ, the Upper Room, as we teach it, is seeking to establish itself in dominion on
this plane through your own expression.
The realization—underline the word realization—of what you are, the manifest Divine
that has come as you, in some ways realizes itself and overrides some of what the soul
would choose to learn through because you learn in different ways as the realized self,
who is knowing itself as the Christed truth that has come in form for the benefit of all.
While the soul may choose to learn through fear, or through lower nature, because
everything is here to be learned through—not escaped from or run from, but learned
through—as the Divine Self sees itself and knows itself beyond fear, it releases the need to
confirm fear because fear is in low vibration. And the Divine Self as you, that has come as
you, operates in higher frequency and must claim all things in a conferrence of that high
octave in co-resonance. To justify fear in any way, shape, or form is to claim fear in its
purview, and the purview of fear, as we have taught, is to claim more fear to realize itself,
again and again, through itself as fearful. Now, to justify fear would be to decide that it is
meritful. While you may know yourself in a fearful situation, that is not choosing in fear
or acting in fear. To experience fear—“Where did I lose that thing? What will happen if I
don’t find it?”—is a response to a situation. To act in fear would be to decide that the
terrible thing that you’ve imagined could happen if you’ve lost the item will be the death
of you, and to confirm that through the actions you take is to claim the act of fear in
perpetuity.
To realize the Divine is present in all things is not to confirm that there are things
happening that you could not agree to or confirm as a personality self as a positive thing.
We don’t ask you to abnegate the power that you’ve been gifted with to discern, but to
understand that, as nothing is out of God, the very presence of the one who knows who he
is, what she is, how he serves, reclaims what is seen and re-known in a higher octave to
lift it to a new sight, a new awareness of reclamation. “The Reclamation of the Divine,”
which will be this chapter if we are allowed to complete it, has ramifications on what is
seen and known. It is not ideology. It is not presupposition. “Well, that thing is holy
because everything is holy, so just let it be.” In some ways, that is denial. You see
someone suffering. “Well, God is there anyway, so be it, it is taken care of” is to wash
your hands from the responsibility of what you are being aligned to as the witness of
suffering. In the sight of suffering, the action of the Divine is to transform pain through the
realization of God that can and must be known in the high octave that you perceive it
from. Understand, friends, it is the Divine that witnesses and acts upon it, not the small
self who would run and fix it as she assumes it should be fixed, and not as the aspect of
self that would deny responsibility for what she witnesses, but the self that knows who she
is, and, because she knows who she is, she realizes herself in participation to the thing
seen. Understand what this means. If nothing is outside of God, and the Divine as you is
present and you are witnessing suffering, you are claiming the action of God, the presence
of God in realization through what you are perceiving. To realize is to know, and when
something is known in the high octave, it is reclaimed and re-known and lifted to the
essence of Source that permeates all matter.
He is interrupting. “Are we fixing suffering, then?” That is not what we are saying at
all. If you think of fixing, you think of mending. To reclaim something is to know it anew.
To fix it is to put the bandage on it and send it back on its way. There are wounds that will
not be fixed with a bandage. And there are hells that cannot be released through
pretending the hell doesn’t exist. What a hell is is a belief in the absence of light or the
potential for healing, for realization, for re-knowing. What hell is is the decision that God
cannot penetrate or realize itself in what it already is, which would be an impossibility.
Now, in the dense field you have operated in, you have chosen to know yourselves in
confirmation of fear, of separation from your brothers and sisters and from the Source of
your being. So the idea that something can be reclaimed, realized, and re-known, and
lifted to what we call the Upper Room, would be an impossibility at that level of
agreement. But, as you have come, each and every one of you who responds to these
words, who goes into the echo of his or her own resonance as the True Self, as you have
come, you have been endowed and gifted with the responsibility to reclaim what you see
in the high octave of the Upper Room.
The Upper Room is the abiding presence of the Divine beyond fear, and when you lift
a thing to it through your sight and through your intention, you are lifting the thing that
has known itself in separation to union with the Source of all things. You can only do this
as the one who knows who he is, and who abides there in his vibratory echo, in her
embodiment and agreement to serve. We have taught you the teaching “I know how I
serve” already. We will return to it as needed. In this moment we say that those of you
who are present and who will hear these words and know the echo of them in the
manifestations of your lives, in the realization of the Divine in form, those of you who’ve
said yes, will come anew and in the claim we offer—“I Have Come.”
The claim “I Have Come” is the announcement of being, the announcement of
reclamation of the presence of the act of the Creator that can be expressed through the
individual soul through the Christed Self that has assumed the soul and claimed manifest
in form as who and what you are. And, as we teach this, “I Have Come,” the vibratory
echo or response of the manifest world will be the reclamation of the Kingdom, which is
the awareness of the presence of the Divine that can be known while in form. The world
you see before you is asking for reclamation. And reclamation, in this case, is the
realization of the Divine as can be seen and comprehended and known anew through your
presence and through the decree “I Have Come.”
Now, this is not a new teaching, Paul, but it is the complete application of all of the
teachings thus far. They have all brought you to this moment of announcement. They are
not to be confused, one with the other. This is the outcome of all the prior attunements we
have gifted you with: The attunement to the Word in preparation for the claim of identity,
“I know who I am, what I am, how I serve,” the claim of being, “I am here,” and the claim
of freedom, “I am free,” that reclamates you, announces you in totality in the claim “I
Have Come.” And this announcement of being as the Divine Self is what trumpets and
heralds the awakening of humanity.
The work has been done in preparation for this. We will attest to that. Each of you who
hears these words must attest to your own response to them. And the realization, the
manifestation of this field in these words, is the true teaching of the second coming of the
Christ. You have waited for a man in the clouds. What you have never known is that you
are all in the clouds in the Upper Room, and, as you are realized there, you anoint
anything you perceive and can imagine through the consciousness that abides there. The
small self—in its life, in its witness, in its agreement to be in form—is understood and has
acquiesced itself to the agreement of embodiment through the stages of realization that
are, in many ways, the requirement for the soul’s evolution. These are stages we will
discuss as we continue these teachings. But the agreement to embody, which is, in fact, a
requirement, aligns the body itself to its possibility for reclamation, and, once that has
begun, the incremental shifts are to support the individual in her ability to know and
maintain the identity of the True Self in expression. As you come to us in questions
—“Why was I born?” “What am I here for?” “How do I serve?”—we will always tell you
the truth. You have come to be realized, to be re-known, to be the ambassador of truth that
sings her song to the world before her. You have all come in remembrance of who you
have always been. And you have claimed it, aligned the soul to its true purpose, through
intention and the ability to sing and to know. “I Have Come” will be the teaching you
receive as we continue this text. Period. Period. Period.
(PAUSE)

Now, as we teach you the meaning of “I Have Come,” we want to announce two things.
The residue of your past actions, in many ways, is reclaimed in a higher octave through
this expression, and that is the rising above karma, as you have understood it. The release
of the old also requires your accountability for what you chose in a low way, but it may
now be met in a high octave, which supports you in recognition and without the
consequence that you may have incurred in low vibration. Once a thing is understood and
comprehended, it may be reclaimed in a new way. So we are no longer acting through the
old, but within the new as expressions of the Divine.
The other thing we wish you to know of: The consequence of this expression is that
the mandate of the Christ in expression is always truth. It can never reconcile a lie with the
need for the lie. The lie itself must be re-seen, known anew, and claimed in truth for the lie
to be known in a new way. What this actually means is that any lies you have known
yourselves through and supported in being will be made known to you for the purpose of
reclamation. The idea that fear can run the show must now be abandoned, once and for all,
and, once again, a lie must only be known as a creation of fear. As you release fear and the
mandates and requirements of fear, you also release the lies that you have assumed to be
true.
Now, this is not at all comfortable for the aspect of self that has built a life upon lies, a
belief in what was important, what should be done, or what must be done through the
dictates of others and inherited systems of lies. As you choose, again and again, to align in
the Upper Room, which is the place and being of truth, you commence a life in
accordance to truth, and that life will bring you what you require. Any encounter you have
with the old and the creations of fear must now be known as opportunity to be re-known,
free of the things that you have served in idolatry or fear.
Now, the Divine as what you are—which simply means the manifestation of the
Divine in physical form—can contribute to change as an expression of the Christ, once
you understand that the being at this level of consequence simply acts as the one who
knows who he is; expresses the vibration of being. The idea that you have been called to a
great act in some ways is true, but the great act is the transformation of being into the high
octave as the expression of the Divine that can now be known with manifestation. What
this means is any idea that you have held of what it means to be the manifest Divine is
replaced completely in comprehension of being it. You don’t question things about the self
when they are known or realized, nor do you strive to be what you already are, and the
consequence of being, the manifestation of the Divine as expressed by you, is the choice
to become the acknowledged one, the articulated one who calls the echo of his vibration
into the world to move into like vibration with all it knows and sees. The decibel you
operate at as the Christed Self actually lifts in totality and resonance what it encounters,
and the ramifications of this means that everything you see and encounter must be
understood in a new way.
Now, at this juncture we must say that the teaching that you are receiving, while for
the text, must be understood by each of you as an act. The manifestation of the Christ, in
echo, in resonance, is an act of articulation. When something is articulated, it is
announced, it is present, and the claim “I Have Come” is an articulation of being. The
articulation of being, at this level, commences the moment you say that you are willing to
embody and release the obstacles that you have utilized in self-definition in the low
octave. By low octave we mean the density of form and agreement to form that you
elected to become when you first incarnated in form. To bypass, to lift beyond what has
already been claimed, requires the self, the Divine Self, to assume the low self to its
benefit. So the idea of who you are—and underline the word idea, because all you think
you are and expect to be is simply an idea and nothing more—is assumed in the vibration
of the Christ and re-announced, re-articulated, in the claim “I Have Come.”
Now, when this is spoken, the agreement is made, first in the vibratory field in the
manifestation that you may know of as the causal body, which then agrees to assume the
entirety of the manifest self by knowing, or realizing, what it has always been. When you
decide that the what that you are, the form you have taken and its expression, may be re-
articulated and re-known, the vibration of the body, in connection with the energetic fields
that it expresses through, may be reclaimed again and again in the Upper Room. What this
means for some of you is that the idea of who you are is re-known, re-expressed, and the
announcement of the vibration “I Have Come” claims what you are now in commensurate
action with the level of expression you have claimed. By level of expression we mean that
the decibel of vibration or sound the claim confers through your alignment adjusts as you
articulate the self in manifestation.
He asks for other language to understand this. And, if we may, we will say we are
offering you the language that may best convey the thought. To reduce it through the
language of old and to define it for you, Paul, would actually be to limit the expression.
When you know yourself as a vibratory being, you may understand that the fluctuation of
vibration will call to you a variety of expression. In the Upper Room, which is where we
teach, the small self, in an assumed state, is no longer running rampage over your life. The
alignment you have claimed is commencing to know itself as and what you are in full
expression, and the variations or gradations of expression will always be agreeable to the
level of consciousness that you have aligned to. Even in the Upper Room, you may
understand yourself as claiming fear and then knowing the self in the small self that
chooses it again.
He is very confused. “Did I mishear? Can fear be claimed in the Upper Room?”
Anything may be claimed, but if fear is claimed, it is a choice made in lower vibration,
and it is the choice to leave the higher octave to attend to something through fear. That
would be a choice made by the aspect of self who still releases her idea of who she is, or
her attachment to what she thinks is important, and this would be an ongoing process as
you evolve. Understand, friends, we are not making you something you are not. We are
reclaiming you as what you are, and, by this definition, “I Have Come,” you have agreed
to believe or know or accept the consequence of manifestation.
Now, by consequence we simply mean that which is incurred by vibration. If you have
a twenty-watt bulb in a lamp, you accept a dim light. You don’t expect to see the entirety
of the room in illumination with the low wattage. When you are putting the hundred-watt
bulb in, you see much more. The expression of the light is more inclusive. The
ramification of the alignment to the claim “I Have Come” is the brightest voltage you may
use. But the body itself must go into the agreement that it can be held. Otherwise you are
playing games.
“What does that mean?” he asks. Very simply, it means that to speak the words that we
offer you through attunement will indeed attune you at the level you can hold. What you
cannot hold in lower vibration will not be met until you are able to release what is holding
you down, what the idea is of who you are that is operating in such limitation. So, if you
understand that you are met through your own experience of the Divine as you embody,
you will understand that, in this path, the obstacles in the way will be revealed for the
purpose of lifting beyond them. You are never trapped by a creation of history because any
creation of history may be re-known, and the consequence of your vibration, which means
what your vibration brings to bear upon the material realm, must be understood as the
opportunity to lift the world to the level of expression of the Christ.
Now, as some of you stand before us in an awareness of what you have been, you say,
“I cannot change. I have tried to know myself anew.” And, for you, we say, please stop
trying to change and start allowing the Divine to reclaim you. If you are so powerful
through the work of your own hands or mind, you would have done it already. To
comprehend surrender as the divine expression of God must be claimed in innocence. We
will explain this now. In innocence means the aspect of self that is in agreement to who
and what she is does not hold the agenda of the divinity that the small self would claim.
She is innocent of sin, and by sin we mean agreement to the old in opposition of truth.
Very simply put, the Christed Self is innocence. Do you understand this? In her innocence,
she is expressed, and the mandate of innocence, the one who has not been taught what to
think or believe, is to see the world as a new expression, unendowed with the
ramifications of fear. Do you understand this? The infant is not told who to trust and who
not to trust, what is good or evil. She learns these things as she is taught, as she grows and
confirms the legacy of fear that she was born into. The Christ is born as and through each
of you in a reclamation of innocence, and the claim “I Have Come” is the coming of the
Christed Self to reclaim the world. How this is manifested as each of you will be known to
you by your expression of it. And no words we speak to you can fully prepare you for that.
The reunification of self with Source is beyond language, and the intonation of sound
that we now use to circumvent or rise above the old may be comprehended as a way forth
beyond language. The articulation of the Divine as what, while utilizing language in all of
the attunements you have been gifted with thus far—in fact, how they are attuned—is
through the vibratory attention that you operate as when they are spoken. The meaning of
the words themselves are, in fact, secondary to what the meaning has been endowed with
in tone.
So, finally, Paul, we say, yes, this is in the text. You must support yourself by trusting
the language we use when we teach, and not try to fix it as you would have it be. Your
small self likes things the way he likes them, and this is not a teaching for the small self.
The teaching of the Christ in manifestation, which we will continue later, is the teaching of
reclamation of being. Period. Period. Period.
DAY FOURTEEN

Each time you decide that you are worthy of being who you truly are, you encourage
every aspect of the self to claim what it may know. Each time you decide that what you
may claim may exist beyond the known, you align to the potential that already exists and
has not been expressed in the material realm. Each time you say yes to the manifested
Divine as you, you claim it. The agreement is made and the projection of the Divine, the
expression of your being, claims what it encounters in a high light, a high tone, a high way
of being. As you say yes to what you truly are and have always been, you demonstrate it
through the life you live, and the manifestation of the life you live must move to a new
agreement that exists beyond the known, beyond the ideas you’ve held, the agreements
you’ve made and seek to justify because they have been there so long. Each time you say
yes to what you truly are, you give it permission to be claimed, expressed, and known for
the good of all.
Now, today is a new day, and a new teaching will commence. The claims you have
made thus far, culminating in the claim we offered you, “I Have Come,” have been made
known and responded to in field and form. And the old is moving to a new way of
understanding itself—just ideas, just ideas, just ideas. What we mean by this is everything
you’ve known has been just an idea. The male you are, the form you have taken, is an idea
of form and an articulation of form that has moved into manifestation. Everything you see
is an idea made into form, articulated, constructed in manifestation through intent and
through the awareness of what is required in a manifest world. At this day, you have an
opportunity to remove the old as you might pull back a curtain to allow the light to shine,
and, as the light shines upon what was, the ideas that inform them may be comprehended.
And, as they are comprehended, they may be released so that the new may be known, may
be called into being.
What we are saying to you each is that the manifest world, as you have comprehended
it, is a manifestation of the ideas of humanity that have been claimed over centuries, over
millennia, and each of you decides your relation to what you see through the fabric of the
world that you have decided is so real. As everything is in motion and vibration,
everything may be known in a new way, and the malleability of form may be
comprehended by you as you ascend to the level of vibration where the refinement of
being claims you in less density. As you experience vibration, the palpable vibration that
comes when you claim the intentions, you are beginning to manifest in response to the
higher realms. The vibration of the Word, as expressed by you, is a high claim of knowing
and being, and its resonance has an octave that you participate in through your alignment
to it. At this moment, anyone who hears these words is participating in an act of
manifestation, and the manifestation of the Divine, the who and what you have always
been in high alignment and real expression or manifestation, is what has come.
Now, to deny the Divine as what you are, which is a temptation for most of you, is to
deny the Divine in all manifestation. “She may be divine, she’s a good person, I cannot be
divine, I am not a good person” separates you from the Source of your being and
predicates your allowance to the claim of your divinity on some idea of good or bad.
Again, just an idea. The manifest self, the physical being you know yourself through, has
come to be regarded, in many ways, as a form that is here to serve the mind, do its duty,
and then be done with. In fact, what form is is expression, as is everything else you can
see. And the articulated form you have taken may be re-known, re-understood in a higher
way as you ascend in form and field. What this means is that the vibratory oracle that you
are, the full being that you are, may be reconceived beyond the form you have taken. And
this is not done by will, as you would think it, but through alignment to the inherent
perfection that the Divine holds in form.
Now, when you think of perfection, you think of an idealization. “I should look a
certain way or act a certain way that resembles an idea of what perfection must be.” But,
in fact, what perfection is is agreement to the absolute, because the absolute is perfection,
cannot be other than what it truly is. The masks that you have worn, the small self’s
identity, in some ways precludes the shining truth of your being to be claimed and held
and known. As you decide that the what that you are, in form and field, is expressed in
fullness, the vibration of your being, assumed in fullness, claims the world it sees in like
accord. And the being that you are is removed from what it was because it knows itself in
a new field—the Upper Room, as we call it.
Now, the Upper Room as the manifest place that you align as and to is simply
agreement to the Divine in the high octave that you sing in. It is agreement, or vibrational
accord, that supports you in maintaining this. And the form that you have taken, and we
include Paul here, must be re-known at this juncture to support the vibration in holding
itself in fullness in a new octave. Now, the body itself, as understood as an organism, has
functions that it must claim, a shape that it must adhere to in one way or another, for you
to recognize yourselves as the what you think you are. But the body itself again is an idea
that may be rendered new through the agreement to be in manifestation in fullness in the
Upper Room.
At this day we say that, upon these words, these articulations of vibration and tone,
you may give a new consent to what manifestation means and give permission to the body,
the idea of the body, to be exact, to be rendered new in high accord. The claim “I know
what I am” is the agreement to what you are in high vibration, that the form of all things is
of God and can be known as such. But the acquiescence to be rendered new in form comes
at a cost, and the cost is a simple one. Any identity that has been held in opposition to
truth must be reclaimed in a new way, and the only way that this is done is through
alignment and agreement to become what you can only be manifest as in a high octave.
As we say these words to each of you, we are offering them to you in a new
agreement, a new way of being, a new expression that form may take. And, as you
understand what is being requested of you in this encounter, you will have a choice to
assign yourself to the act of liberation of form, as you have known form, for the purpose
of reincarnating in fullness as the Divine Self. The opposition that form has held to this
encounter in some ways is based on reason that has been adapted and encoded in the
systems of form, that form itself must adhere to certain laws and cannot exist beyond
them. The claim we offered you, “I am free, I am free, I am free,” claims the self beyond
the encoded agendas that have been utilized to maintain your adherence to control or
systems of control that you have been in alignment to. And the body itself, at this juncture,
must undergo its own rebirth, its own encounter in transmutation.
Now, what this means is that you are accessing the syllable of vibration or tone that
instills within you the causal body as the manifest body, which means that the Divine Self,
known in spirit, knows itself as what it is in form, in blood and tissue, in the vibration that
we know of as the Upper Room. And, in this articulation, this name that we will claim you
in, you are offering yourself, in some ways, to be re-known, re-articulated, as the manifest
being who exists in a high octave. Again, we have said we have worked hard on identity,
the claim of worth, the agreement to be, and the manifest form itself has been prepared for
its new self to become form as what it is.
Now, we say these words to you each in the comprehension that they may make no
sense to the small self, but this is no longer a teaching for the small self. We are speaking
directly to form, and claiming form, and form itself exists without personality, and, if you
must know, without an agenda predicated by fear. That would be the self you know of as
Paul or Alice or June who uses those words, “I am afraid.” Your leg will never be afraid,
nor will your eye. You may feel fear in the body, but the body itself is not what is in fear.
It is in response to what has catalyzed it in a fearful expression. So the words we use are
spoken to form in directness, and your agreement to them is actually uttered, not only by
the mouth you speak through, but by every cell, every aspect of the body you know.

On this day we claim that the forms that each have taken are regarded new, are
resurrected in the true identity of the Christed Self, and the Monad, the Infinite, the
True Self of God, come as each one, has now been given permission to embody in
fullness. And, as we say yes to the form of those we speak to, as we say yes to what
they believe themselves to be, as we speak to the blood and the bone and the
marrow, as we speak to the hair and the lips and the tongue, as we speak to the
fingers and toes and vertebrae and intestine, we sing to you in the awareness that
what you are is being re-known. And, as we invite you, each of you in form, to join
us in tone, we acknowledge the manifestation that has been what it was in its new
name.

[The Guides tone through Paul.]

“I Have Come. I Have Come. I Have Come.”

Be as you are. Be as you are. Be as you are.

The body itself is asking itself a question. “Am I new?” And the claim we answer you
in is yes. In the sound of truth echoing through each cell, the organism you have known
yourself as has been given permission, as agreed to by you, to be reclaimed as the
expression that aligns in the Upper Room, but can claim the world in manifestation. That
which is God, knows God in all. That which denies God, denies God in all. That which
gifts itself to God, gifts itself to all. And that who knows who she is, who sings in truth,
sings for the world.
You Have Come. You Have Come. You Have Come.
(PAUSE)

Trouble comes through the agreement to fear. If you understand this, you have a way out
of trouble. Trouble comes when what you decide is informed by fear. You may believe
you are leaving fear behind, but you choose in fear all day long without understanding
why. The moment you decide that you are safe as you are, you can become free of fear.
The moment you agree that who and what you are, the True Self as you, is beyond fear,
fear cannot reach you.
Now, fear has tentacles. It will seek to call you from the Upper Room back to the low
because you have prescribed its power, and you may say yes to it, if you wish, even from
the Upper Room, and embark on the journey to the lower to have your encounter with
fear. Perhaps what it will teach you is that it is a liar, has no real merit, and would seek to
assume you as what it is, which is fearful.
The planet you exist on is now comprehending itself in a very different way than it has
thus far. In some ways, what it is saying is “I will not be touched, I will not be misused,
and I will no longer allow the being that I am to be named in fear.” To be named in fear
means you have decided that something is full of fear, or fearful. Now, the planet knows
itself in freedom. It knows what it is. It is an organism, and a life-filled one. And the
organism itself is seeking to replenish itself at the cost of the old. Everything must be
reborn, you see, in order to survive in the high amplitude that is present now. When you
understand yourself as an organism, a complete being, in relation to another organism,
another complete being, you move into an agreement that is respectful and in love. The
moment you defile the planet and decide what the planet should be, on your terms—“I
will get what I want from this thing, I will make it mine, I will dominate it, I will crucify it
to get my needs met”—you have created the separation in form from the self that knows
who it is and the organism that knows what it is.
Now, the temple of the body, the structure that the body is, can be comprehended in
several different ways. You may understand the organism as flesh and bone, or you may
understand the organism as a vehicle for learning and experience, or you can understand
the body as an incarnation of a soul seeking to express itself in a shared construct which
you know of as reality. None of these are false, but the highest regard that you can claim
the body in is in its union with the matter that surrounds it. This is not done by lowering
vibration, but by realizing the high vibration that exists in the material realm through the
recognition of the inherent Divine.
Every leaf on every tree is oscillating. Every sunbeam, every pile of dirt, every pond
or pool, every ocean or lake is alive in vibration, and, as you witness God as the leaf, as
the dirt, as the lake, as you align to it at that level, you can move into communion with
God as expressed in physical manifestation. The one who knows who and what she is
knows what she sees, and, as the Divine sees the Divine in all, and, as the old is
relinquished, the world is made new.
 Now, is the world benefiting through your encounter with it, the Divine as you in an
encounter with the leaf and the pond and the ocean? In fact, it is. As the Divine is
witnessed by you, as it is reclaimed by you, as it is lifted to its true nature, the manifest
structure that you know of as water or leaf or dirt actually begins to rise in vibration to
meet you where you are. The encoding of the vibration you hold in the claim “I know how
I serve” and in the claim “I Have Come” promotes the encounter of the Divine with the
manifest world in material form in the way that is required to lift it.
Now, as we teach you this, we must tell you several things. Each of you who has come
to this encounter has made the agreement for form itself to be re-known in the high octave.
We begin with the form you have taken, the Word made flesh. But your encounter with the
world is your encounter with the Divine. When you speak to miracles, the water into wine,
the parting of the sea, you are actually speaking to alchemy, and the illustrations of
alchemy from the times of old are actually the adjustment that the manifest world makes
in its encounter with the force of God in articulation.
Now, if you understand that we are not promising you you will move mountains and
part seas, but we are promising you you will lift the mountain and lift the sea to the octave
of the Divine by nature of your presence and agreement to know what things are in a new
idea, you will understand what it means to make a new world—“Behold, I make all things
new,” the claim of the Divine Self in its encounter with mankind and with the landscape
mankind expresses in.
Now, when you stand and face the sun, you feel the beams of the sun, the heat of the
sun, upon your skin. There is no effort there. The sun may make your skin brown, bleach
your hair, make you burn and blister if you are not prepared for it. The sun may heal the
earth, dry the rain, or scorch the earth in its strength and power. As you become as the sun,
as the light that witnesses the world, the rays of your being, your vibratory field, in waves,
claims what she sees, what it encounters, with the Christ vibration for the purpose of
reclamation. Behold, I make things new.
Now, to understand the purview of the Divine Self, we will restate what we have stated
prior, in prior texts. The purview of the Divine Self is everything she encounters,
everything she sees, everything witnessed and even imagined. If it can be held in
consciousness, it can be known, and what is known by the Divine Self can be reconceived,
as the one who knows who she is endows it with a vibration of the presence of the Christ,
or, if you wish to use another word, the light that is always shining.
Now, ask yourself this question: “Am I willing to be what I am, in expression, for the
benefit of the world? Am I willing to know myself, in a new way, beyond the tenets or
structures that have limited me? Am I willing to let go of any idea I may have ever held
that will serve as an obstacle to the risen Christ operating as what I am?” It sounds like a
tall order. Paul wants to run away, leave the teaching behind, go find something better to
do than listen to these words. But we must say it is not as hard as you believe it to be, once
you understand that everything is just an idea. Who you are is an idea. What you do is an
idea. Who you know is an idea of who you know. All that needs to transform is a simple
idea, and the ideas that serve as obstacles to your realization are the very things that you
are gifted in an encounter with now. Anything that would preclude the light from shining
as and through you will now be known, will now be addressed, will now be resurrected, or
unburied, if you wish, so it may be known and seen and released for the benefit of all.
Now, at this juncture, we must say to Paul, we are taking the reader to a place that is
not so comfortable, so please allow us to do this. Any shame you hold about the body, any
shame you hold about your sexual being, any shame the body holds that it has used to
deny the Divine must now be reclaimed in a higher way. Any belief that your limitation in
form could possibly preclude the action of the Divine as and through you must be
understood as a false teaching. The idea of the body as a temple is all well and good, but
even what is within the temple must be known as holy, not just the structure, but all that
has known itself within the temple walls. And that must include every encounter with pain
that the body has known itself in.
On this day we would like to offer you a new teaching, on the resurrection of form and
the release of form from the disability that it has claimed itself in. Unlike the planet you
express on, which would never do itself harm, you have harmed yourselves incredibly
through fear and through shame and through disregard of the True Self, who knows who
she is and can never be ashamed. The teaching you receive now is about the requirement
for release that is now present, as the body itself begins to flower. Anything that would
obstruct the flowering of the body can now be attended to, and will be attended to as you
align to it.
We will say these words on your behalf:

On this day I choose to encounter each one who encounters these words in a
promise of the new, an agreement to the new, that the being that you are will now
be re-known in a pure state, a return to innocence, as the Christed Self requires
itself to move as you, to move through you, in participation with the re-creation of
a world. And anything that is not of God, or of love, or of agreement to God, that
which you have held in darkness, may now be released in offering to the Creator to
be healed.

We imagine that, before you, you see an altar prepared for you, a perfect altar
surrounded by flowers and cared for by those of us who would support you each in your
requirements for realization. If you would, imagine yourself lying upon this altar and
offering yourself and the body you have taken for the purification or release that is
required by you in service to the greater good of all. As you say yes to this, please allow
the promise to be made, met as you, as and through you, as the body itself is reclaimed
and re-known.
Allow, allow, allow.
(pause)
What you are now is, in an established way, the emissary of the Divine, and the
permission granted to release what is required for you will be done as you rest, as you
agree to it. And, if there are actions you must take to ennoble this choice, to verify it for
yourself, it will be made known to you. We will say these words in closing:

On this day we choose that each one who reads these words will be met in
perfection in the structure that they hold, in the body they have known, as it is
reestablished as the Christed Self.

Stop now, please. We will close this chapter now. Period. Period. Period.
 6

CLAIMING THE KINGDOM

DAY FIFTEEN

Now, as we teach you about what you are, you must comprehend that the manifested what,
the True Self as what, claims rather different things than you have known yourselves
through. The body itself, an organism, if you wish, has been primed to meet the octave
that it has been expressing through. And the senses you hold, in all ways, have become
attuned to the reality you have known.
As you lift in vibration in the Upper Room, the availability to information through the
sensory systems is increased in vibration as well, which means you are activated, in some
ways, to be a receiver for vibration consummate with tone or the octave you express in.
The Divine as what, the manifest what, claims in the Upper Room the availability in
service in the claim we have offered you, “I know how I serve.” And, if, in fact, service
requires your attunement to a level of amplitude of vibration and tone that encourages you
to access information beyond the known, it will become available to you. What we are
actually telling you is that you embody in the Upper Room with the ability to know. K-N-
O-W.
Now claircognizance, if you wish to call it that, or knowing, is a gift, but it is also the
availability to act, to become instructed by the Divine Self for the purpose of supporting
others or changing the world. Now, we use the word changing intentionally now, because
the world you are in, by impact, by agreement, is in transformation, and the tone you
claim and that you carry, in many ways, is the tone that resurrects the divine principle that
is already active or present in the manifest world. The idea of claiming the Kingdom, very
simply put, means you are claiming into manifestation the inherent principle, the active
principle, the causal feature, the God in all. And calling that forth in reclamation, or, if you
wish, resurrection, decides for you your relationship to the manifest plane.
Now, when you know, you are operating in your knowing, and the consequence of
knowing, we have to tell you, will always be action that is concurrent, or in agreement,
with the knowing you have. If you know how to walk to work, you find yourself at work.
You don’t question the way. You may take a detour. You may choose to sit on a bench and
enjoy the sun. But you know your way to work. There is no question, really. And the
knowing that we speak to now, in octave, in the Upper Room, is the knowing that is
required for you to serve in fullness. We tell you this for one reason. The ability to know at
the level of agreement we are teaching is a gift, and you are accountable to the gift as it is
given to you.
Now, when you know, you are not questioning, nor are you self-deceiving, nor can you
deceive another. It is not possible. And the teaching of truth that we have offered you
already, truth as a field that you begin to operate in—“I know who I am in truth, what I am
in truth, how I serve in truth”—is the support that you require to ennoble the activation
without self-deceit. In the claim “I know who I am,” the recognition of knowing claims
the form, the what, the manifest self, and its expression, commensurate with the value or
level of vibration that you have come to, is the service you bring in agreement to know
what is required of you.
Now, Paul is interrupting. “I can imagine many people saying, ‘Well, I don’t know.
You are telling me I know, but I don’t think I do.’”
When you know, there is no thinking. There is recognition. And the knowing that we
speak to actually bypasses systems of agreement that you have utilized to confirm the old
reality. Now, if you understand that any equation has an outcome—two plus two equals
four—you can also understand that how something is conceived of is always in resonance
at the level of its conception. In other words, the man who makes the painting claims the
identity of the painting in recognition of the consciousness he holds as he paints. The
painting is the out-picturing of the consciousness at the level of alignment the painter
holds. The painting exists without the painter. It may hang in a museum. But it still claims
the vibration of the painter at the level of alignment he grew to and was at at the time the
painting was conceived of.
As you lift to the Upper Room, what you claim and how you claim it is in alignment to
the higher octave, and what you claim and where you claim it must then move into accord
to the vibration you know yourself in. So the ways of being that you have utilized to
confirm a reality, the old equations, if you wish, are in fact transposed, re-known, in the
high octave. Once again, the example: The concerto may be played in a low key or a high
key. In the high key, the value of the concerto lifts what it encounters to meet it in
resonance or tone. And the acclimation to the high vibration that you have come to
commands you to interface with the manifest world for the purpose of recognition, or
recognizing the Divine that you now know is there. You are not seeking the Divine, you
are not looking for it under which rock, in each book that you may read. You are knowing
it—in the sunset, in the ocean, in the body you hold, in what you see before you. And the
claim you make upon what you see—“I know who you are in truth, I know what you are
in truth, I know how you serve in truth”—is the reclamation of the Divine that is always
there.
Now, you don’t need to speak the words, at a certain point, because you have come to
be them. The one who knows what she is does not need to remind herself to shift the dial
of the radio she is to play the high broadcast. In the Upper Room, you reside in the high
broadcast and lift what you encounter to its meeting with the Divine that is its essence.
The manifestation of God in this world is known by one who is the manifestation of it, not
the one who is seeking to find it, remembering where he put it, or finding the right book to
give him the instruction of where he should go in his seeking. The idea of becoming, truly
becoming the embodiment of the Divine in recognition of the Divine in all, is the
manifestation of this text. And the manual we offer you actually exists beyond words,
because all we are truly doing is remembering you in the octave you express in that we
call the Upper Room. And the one who knows who she is, knows who others are; knows
what she is, knows what is in all things. And the service of being becomes simply the
occupation of knowing. And, in knowing, you are acting in righteousness.
Now, by righteousness we mean in accordance with truth, and, if an action is required
of you, you will be in your knowing, and the transmission of your being, which means the
tone you sing through, will be present in whatever you do. Now, anything you encounter is
operating in tone, in vibration, oscillation, if you wish. That is the word he is interrupting
with. He is learning a new vocabulary here as we speak through him. Because everything
exists in tone, everything may be met in tone, and, as you have appropriated the field of
the True Self as what you are, you don’t need to act to transform something as much as
recognize what it has always been, and perhaps has forgotten, perhaps been denied,
perhaps been refuted. You cannot make a rock divine. It is already divine. But your
memory of the rock, as a small self, precludes its divinity. As the True Self as what you
are recognizes the rock, the rock is holy, and its tone moves incrementally to meet you in
the tone you are singing at. Now, you are not singing vocally, although of course you may.
The embodiment of the Christ is a tonal action. And the tonal action we speak in is the
expression of the Word articulated in the phrase “I Have Come.”
Now, in dominion, which is the Christ’s purview known always in accordance with
truth, the action of being becomes the action of claiming the Kingdom, and not just for the
self that you have been, but for all that you perceive. The dominion of the Divine, the
purview of the Divine, is all that is manifest, can be conceived of or imagined. The
purview of the Divine is everything, because the Divine is one with everything and does
not agree to separation.
“But we are in separation, still,” he says. “We differ in many ways, one man from the
next, one culture from the next.”
If you wish to look at the cosmetics that are interacting here, you will see ways that
you have decided or perhaps appreciated differences. There is nothing wrong with
differences, but they do not equate to separation. Mankind’s humanity, in expression, is in
fact one tone that may express in variance, in degrees. The Christed tone or the embodied
tone is beyond that in an octave or two above, if you wish a descriptor. What exists in the
high octave is expressed for the purpose of lifting what has expressed through the low.
Now, the differences that you utter—“That is a male or a female, a child or adult”—
are in fact descriptors. But the qualities of description, in most cases, come through the
information or the broadcast of what is perceived. “That looks like a child. It must be a
child.” “That looks like a female. I will presuppose the form she has taken based upon
what I see.” And, while we are not faulting your eyes, we are lifting you to a new sight
where you are not denying the child, or the gender of the one you see, but you are seeing
them in participation to the great dance of humanity as humanity lifts to its true nature,
which is the Christed Self in tone.
“Now, what does it look like,” he asks, “humanity lifting?”
You are actually seeing the beginnings of it, and much of the chaos you perceive is the
undermining of the old structures that in most cases have been complicit to fear. As we
have taught in prior texts, the action of fear is to claim more fear, and, in the wave of truth
that is present now, everything that has been hidden will be revealed in order to be seen,
and then re-known, and then lifted to the high octave. You cannot manifest the Divine
when you are hiding things from the self or your fellows. You can only perceive the
Kingdom with the eyes that know the truth. And what you have seen before you, across
this globe, is the beginning of great change that will be continuing as humanity encounters
itself through its past creations. What has been claimed in fear, chosen in fear, hidden in
fear, must be re-known, reclaimed, brought to the altar, and lifted.
Now, the altar is consciousness. Do you understand this? And God itself, expressing
through consciousness, is the alchemist. When something is perceived in a new way, it is
transformed through the interaction with the perceiver. Do you all understand this?
Nothing is left untouched by the mind that is operating in agreement to its knowing as the
Divine. When seen by divine mind, known by divine mind, everything is re-created or re-
known, because the Divine cannot leave anything out. Everything is of God, or absolutely
nothing is.
Now, the challenge here, in the transition you are all undergoing, is that the manifest
world is in agreement to its chaos, but has been complicit in its creation. And, if you
understand what this means, it’s really very simple. There can be no creation that you
witness that you are not in vibrational agreement to. And, because the consciousness that
you hold has been conditioned to decide what things are through the knowing of history,
and not the present moment you stand in, you end up re-imprinting the messages of
history on the things you see today.
“But is that wrong?” he asks. “If an act has been named in prior times, and we see the
act today, does the act not exist?” The act exists, not as it has been known, but as it is,
because everything perceived in the present moment, and responded to in consciousness,
is lifted in the moment you stand in, not as what it was, what it was once known as, but as
it truly is. In other words, the orphanage which you are all a part of, where every child is
known by no name, with no parentage, is suddenly transformed by the memory of one
Source. And every child becomes one, one of one Source, in an octave of truth. To name
the child through the old names—“He looks like a Smith, we’ll call him John Smith,”
“She looks like a Doe, she may be known as Jane Doe”—imprints the intention of the
history upon the one seen. Until the one is seen in truth in the moment she stands in, she
cannot be reclaimed in her True Self.
Imagine this. You are deciding that the woman on the street must not be a fine woman,
based upon her dress or her actions. You are defining her through the consciousness you
hold, but utilizing the memory of what you believe a bad woman to be or a how a good
woman should look. In your naming of the bad woman, you reduce her in vibration. By
realizing who she is, which bears nothing to do with how she appears, but the value she
holds, the intrinsic value as a true being, you claim her in the Upper Room, because only
in the Upper Room does she exist without the names that she has used or been claimed by.
Again, the phrase “Behold, I make all things new.” So, as you witness your world today,
you are claiming the truth the moment you decide that the truth can be known in the
moment you stand in. If you are busy impressing the old upon what you see, trying to sort
out the details to conform to a narrative that has once been known, you end up entangling
yourself in the vibration of old, when the highest act you may take is in knowing.
Now, when you know who somebody is, you are not excusing his or her behavior, or
claiming no responsibility through what they may have incurred. But you are knowing
them beyond the act, beyond what they have thought they were, because it is the self, in
denial of its divinity, that will act in opposition to truth. And the ones who have forgotten
what they are often have the greatest investment in maintaining their ignorance, because to
be exposed to the light would actually claim them and release them from the very thing
that they think they are, which is separate from their Source. When they are known in
truth, they are resurrected, or lifted to the Upper Room, through the sight you bring to
them.
“So what happens to someone when they are seen anew?” Again, the vibration of
consciousness informs the object, whatever it may be, or whoever it may be, and, in the
high octave, the lifting occurs first in the vibrational field. But in the claim “I know what
you are,” the manifest self is being recognized in correlation to the vibration of the one
who speaks it, or knows it, or is it at the level of correlation where a simple interaction
calls forth the commensurate vibration. The example would be: As you know who you
are, there is no question, there is only knowing. You are not fixing, you are not appending,
you are not deciding what should be, how somebody should act, you are knowing who
they are. And, in their level of accord to the who and the what, they manifest their
potential.
“Is this done instantaneously? We can’t rob people of free will. What if they don’t
want to lift?” It happens instantaneously in the interaction with the higher vibration. Once
the higher vibration is known to the lower, the lower may lift, commensurate to its ability.
The reason we focus on form, “I know what I am,” to go into an agreement with “I know
what you are,” is that it bypasses systems of deflection. Now, you are not overriding free
will. You are simply recognizing what is already true. And you all must understand this.
You are not making something up or changing somebody. You are claiming what exists in
the Upper Room that you abide in. Because you know them from that vantage point,
because they are known by you there, the recognition of what is always true is what lifts
and reclaims. The small self’s agenda, while in difference, is actually manifest in low
octave, and, as one is lifted to the Upper Room through witness, they are also re-known.
They are independent from you. The Will of the Divine Will is as present in them as in
you. You are not making them do anything. You are recognizing what they are and can
only be.
“And how are they changed?” he asks. “Do they get better? Do they act differently?
What are you really speaking to?”
We are actually speaking to vibration, but because you know yourself in interaction on
this plane through personality structures, you are asking, “Do they change in an agreement
to what has been claimed for them?” No, they don’t. They become what they truly are. Do
you all understand this? We are not making you other. That has never been this teaching.
We are claiming what you already are. And, as you claim from the level of embodiment
you may know yourself in, you work as we do in recognition of the implicit Divine that is
now known by the one who knows who she is.
Now, when we teach, in our authority, we call you forth in a reckoning of sorts. We
invite you to the journey with the understanding that what you believed yourself to be is in
many ways released, or at least re-understood and utilized in a new way, as you ascend in
vibration. The caution we have always offered you is that this journey is one that is
chosen, and you must agree to it. There is no magic wand here, but there is alignment, and
the alignment is made in agreement, and in knowing. You are free of the small self’s rule.
We will say this again. In knowing, you are free of the small self’s rule. We are not
disbanding the small self, saying it doesn’t exist, but she is no longer the captain of the
ship, he is no longer the king on the throne. His way of being, in many ways, becomes
assumed in grace, in the octave of truth, as the Divine as you in manifestation calls a new
world into being.
We will say this is the beginning of a new chapter. We will call it “Claiming the
Kingdom” because that is the title we are offering you now. Period. Period. Period.
DAY SIXTEEN

Now, when we teach you what you are, we come with different ways of integrating the
information, not only into your experience, but into the manifest world that you operate in.
The idea of being who and what you truly are is actually unknown to most of you because
you operate in agreement to what you think, what you have been taught, and you bypass
your innate knowing without even realizing it. The truth of who and what you are, the
being that you truly are, knows full well who she is, and the manifestation of her being,
her true being, is the creation of the Christ as the what that you are.
Now, by Christ we mean the aspect of the Creator in form in realization in the
manifest world that, by nature of her presence, calls all things to her in agreement to the
Christ, or the vibratory essence of the Creator that exists implicitly in all manifestation.
The of that you are, the divine of, is of all things. The being that you are, the true being, is
also manifest, in manifestation, in anything you can see. But the one who sees and knows
has gone into an agreement, a vibratory agreement, of who and what what all else is.
Now, the conditioning you’ve received, which in some ways supersedes this, is being
addressed by us in different ways. We give you the intellectual information that you may
need to comprehend the changes that you will undergo, but the change itself is alchemical,
is the manifestation of God in its expression relaying itself, re-knowing itself, as the chord
you play, as the musical note that is your expression and tone in the articulated world that
you see before you.
“Articulated world? What does that mean?” It very simply means that everything you
see is in echo, an articulation of thought. And the comprehension of what you see, when it
is no longer filtered through the old programming, claims you in a vibratory agreement to
what can only be in truth. Now, an articulation is a spoken word, and, as the Word is made
as you, as you are articulated as the verb, the energy of the creation in action, the verb that
you are, the action of your being, begins to speak to the world before you. You become the
Word, not only in essence, but in action. And the echo of this, which is your impression in
field and form upon that which you encounter, claims the Kingdom into the field of the
Christ Mind that you are now operating in.
“The Christ Mind. That’s a new teaching.” In fact, it is not. The Upper Room, where
we instruct from, is the Christ Mind. And that’s the easiest definition for you, if you really
wish to know. The idea of consciousness can be understood as mind, if you wish. And the
mind of God, understood as the Christ, in its transmission, is a plane of experience that
you are aligning to. And, in this alignment, everything that is seen, and is lifted to it,
claims itself in the high resonance, the Upper Room, the Christ Mind, the presence of
God, however you wish to name it. Your own experience becomes the teaching here.
There is nothing we have taught you thus far that you have not been able to say, “Yes, I
know this is so,” in your own experience. As we move to you in alchemy, as we sing to
you in a new song, the idea of physical manifestation must be encountered in realization
for the teaching to continue. We will have some resistance from him in this teaching
because he doesn’t yet believe that the manifest world is actually in process of realizing
itself through this interaction. When you speak a word, there is a response to the spoken
word. If you announce something, there are ramifications to the announcement. The
articulated word, spoken by the lips, has an impact on what it encounters. When you move
to vibration and you become the articulation of the Word, the vibratory echo of the
manifest self, in agreement to what it realizes as truth, calls to it a new manifestation. Very
simply put, as you realize yourself, your world is realized, and the manifestation of the
Kingdom is the result of this.
Now, if you think of the Kingdom as a lofty place where everything is floating and
lovely and everything appears to be pretty, you are emblemizing it through the small self’s
idea of what the Kingdom is. The Kingdom, indeed, is a high manifest world, but because
everything exists in multiple octaves, you may claim anything and everything in the
Kingdom to be re-known.
“How is this done?” he asks. “Teach me the practicality, please. I am tired of
definitions.” A practical application in your case, Paul, would be to realize the body that
you stand in, in the Upper Room. The body you exist in exists in multiple octaves. As you
claim the body in the Upper Room, in the Kingdom, if you wish, and with the Christ
Mind, and you articulate the body in its perfect state, you will align to the perfection that
is already expressed as you in the Upper Room. And the manifestation of it, the form
taken, will then become the expression.
Now, for those of you who think that means you look like this or that, you would be
mistaken. What you appear as, in all ways, frankly, is an illusion and a negotiated one. The
small self’s negotiations about what she thinks she is creates a manifestation of form that
you go into agreement to. In the Upper Room, where you are operating as Spirit, you
apply the form of the True Self to the manifest self. “I am Word through my body” was the
opening to this. But the Word in full expression, which utilizes form and expresses as the
body, must be comprehended, very, very simply, as the manifestation of God that can be
known in form.
Now, those of you who say this cannot be so are already deciding that the what that
you are, the skin and bone, must exist separately from the ethereal. Form and flesh, while
operating in low vibration, can be lifted through the alchemy of the Word to a new
expression, the articulation we speak of that in fact exists in the Kingdom. The
manifestation of the Divine as who and what is this teaching, and not only this teaching. It
is the teaching of the time that you are choosing to incarnate in. As you decide that you
have the right to be at this level of choice—and underline the word choice because it is
imperative that you understand this—you create the opportunity for the manifest
expression.
“But what does it look like?” he says. We bring the body to the Divine. We claim the
body in articulation, “I know what I am.” In doing this, the transition you take upon
yourself is realization, and nothing cannot be realized when it is claimed in truth. Now, a
small realization—“This is my fingernail, I finally know what a fingernail is, I realize my
fingernail as what I have been taught it to be”—is a small way of saying something can be
re-known or understood in a new way. But to realize the entirety of the body—every
organ, every fiber, every blemish—as holy and in manifestation in the Upper Room that
we teach from, is the guarantee that the entirety of being is in ascension or realization.
Now, the idea of ascension for too many of you has been emblemized in fruitful ways,
but the ways of choice—“When I am ascended, I will be this or that”—are usually
contrary to the truth of your being. The Divine as you is who is realized at the cost of the
old. And its claim “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come” is the manifest self, the
realized self, calling forth the Kingdom through his encounter with it. The idea that, as
you ascend, you go someplace pretty, you create opportunity to grow butterfly wings and
evade your responsibilities, would be foolish. True ascension is the realization of the
manifest world in the upper octave, and not at the exclusion of the body.
The Jesus teaching, in all ways, was exemplary of realization. But it has been
misconstrued and taught in fundamentally wrong ways throughout the millennia It is time
to turn the page on the idea that realization is an opportunity that has come to one, and
only one. If it has not come as one, it could never have come at all. And each of you here,
by nature of your agreement, is testimony to the potential for the Divine to come to
fruition in the form and the field, and then in the landscape that you are expressing in. The
totality of being, the Divine as all things, is always true and so rarely known. And, before
anything is realized, it is known. In your knowing, you are in realization, and the moment
realization occurs, the alchemy of it begins to see itself in all before it. Very simply, this
means that it is instantaneous. We will say this again for Paul, who expects another long
trek up a mountain. Instantaneous very simply means that realization, although it may
have taken lifetimes to occur, happens in the moment you stand in, and no other moment.
And, as you are realized once, you are realized for all time.
Now, commensurate to this is the misunderstanding that once you have a great idea
you always have it. It was a great idea to marry your ex-wife. At the moment, you thought
it was a good idea. That’s a rather different thing. As the realized one has come into form,
she ennobles others to do the same thing, but she must maintain the frequency, the
manifest self, in the Upper Room where this occurs. And the reason no one wants to do
this is you do not want to give away your riches and your selfishness and your pride and
your ideas of what it means to be who you think you were supposed to be, once upon a
time.
Nothing is excluded from the Divine. You cannot be operating in fear and acting as its
principle, but fear itself must be of God, although it doesn’t know itself to be. Understand
this: There is a patch of rain, sunlight all around it. Above the cloud, above the rainstorm,
there is still sky and light. The cloud itself exists within the sky, but is knowing itself in
density in its raining. The Divine as you will actually claim you and all those things you
say are not of God as you give yourself to it. But to give yourself to it is to surrender the
idea of who you have been.
“How is this done?” he asks. “How do we surrender an idea of who we are?” By
realizing, very simply, that it is only an idea. Do you understand this? “I am the life of the
party” is an idea. “I am unattractive” is an idea. “I am outside of God” is an idea. “I am
unworthy” is an idea. “I will not be loved” is an idea. “I cannot change” is an idea. “The
world will end” is also an idea. And, in fact, the world does not end. As you surrender
your entirety, it begins anew in the Upper Room, within the Christ Mind. There may be
lessons to learn in the lower octaves, and when there are you will discover them. If you are
fortunate, you will realize how to bring them to the Upper Room so that they may be
learned in peace. If you wish the challenge of the old, go back to it, but then don’t
complain.
We are giving you the technique to maintain your vibration. You have asked for this. It
is coming to be met by you through your body, within your experience on this manifest
plane, as you lift it to the Upper Room where the True Self resides.
The manifestation of God in man is simply man in its unified state. Do you all
understand this? The mysteries of the past that you entangle yourself in are all this
teaching. You have never been separate. It is just an idea. You have never not been loved.
It is just an idea. And anything else you may claim in fear and seek to justify is the
articulation of the old self seeking to reinforce its law, its need to be separate, or its need
to be right at the cost of another having his or her being.
We are preparing you all now for alchemy, and, if you are ready for this, for the form
itself to be moved to a new expression of being, a new articulation of sound, a new Christ,
will be born in mankind. And to be born means to have come, and herein lies the claim we
bring you in this text. “I Have Come. I Have Come. I Have Come.”
God as humanity does not deify humanity. Humanity is deified by its surrender to its
true nature, not at the cost of its uniqueness and its bravery and its suffering, or anything
else that can be learned here, but with them. You have all come, and even suffering, when
it occurs, can be learned through and known in holiness.
We will stop this lecture for a moment for Paul. We will intend to resume it later in the
day, if, in fact, we are permitted to teach this class as we wish. Period. Period. Period.
(PAUSE)

Each of you decides that the lives that you live are the result of the choices that you will
make. This is always true. And every choice that is made in a high accord brings to you a
benefit, a new choice of commensurate value. Each time you operate as the True Self, the
Divine as who and what you are, you claim an opportunity, a new opportunity, to be
realized anew. This is an unfoldment. Although you may be realized, you are not stopped
from deeper realization, from new unfoldment, from new awareness, and a deepening of
your experience of the Divine Self. This is not a one-stop train. You don’t get off in the
Kingdom and lie down in a beach chair and expect to be served what you want.
You are about to go on a great adventure, and the second half of this text, if we are
allowed to complete it, will be the expectations of the one who has claimed the Kingdom
and arrived there, for the adventure unfolds before him or her, as she arrives, not as she
plans. You cannot plan for realization. Realization itself takes you beyond the known.
Realization itself claims you outside of the paradigm that the old has claimed you in.
Each of you decides that you are being prepared for this journey through your
attentions to these teachings. Each of you decides how much you may claim, entirely
dependent upon your ability to receive. Not everyone decides that their incarnation in this
lifetime is for full realization, but for the unfoldment of it, perhaps, to commence in a new
way. And we welcome all of you to what you may choose.
Now, some of you decide that the thing that you are, the identity of form, is intractable
to thought. We will give you an admonition here. Every thought that you have about form
actually claims you in an experience with it. What you believe to be solid or liquid, by
your experience, is always confirming what is a solid, what is a liquid. When you begin to
move to the higher octave, where thought itself is seen as a key to manifestation beyond
the known, you begin to move beyond the expectations or the dictates that the manifest
world has been instructing you in. Agreeing to the old confirms the old. Aligning to the
new claims you in accord to it. However, in order to receive it, you must create the
opportunity and choose.
We are addressing choice now because we wish to continue in this teaching for the
benefit of the reader, for the benefit of the student of this work. And we will invite you
now, if you are willing, to choose this path, this path of unfoldment to the requirements of
the soul’s destiny. Underline the word soul here. The soul’s destiny. Not the small self and
not the Christed Self, perhaps, but what the soul can claim and benefit from. Every
lifetime claims the soul in a new evolution, and realization, the claim of realization, is
what the soul commences as in manifestation as the Divine Self. There are stages here and
agreements made at every doorway. The door is open now, we say.
Yes, Paul, this in the text. We will stop now for the morning. We have much to say this
weekend, if we are allowed to speak. Period. Period. Period.
(PAUSE)

Each of you decides that what you will claim is allowed by you. This is true in a lifetime,
and in a moment. Each moment presents the opportunity for a new claim, and the
realization of who and what you are—“I am free, I am free, I am free”—announces you in
a field that is in vibrational accord to the claim made.
Now, the denial of freedom—“I am really not free, you just say I am”—will be met in
vibrational accord as well. The knowing of who you are is what predetermines the
outcome of any claim, and the belief that you are not free, which is the small self’s
dominion, must be known in a different way as it is claimed by the Divine Self, who by its
nature can only be free.
Now, as you are announced in freedom, as you claim it for who and what you are, the
oppression that you have known through circumstances begins to transform. In other
words, you are no longer dictating what has been oppressive by your expectation for it.
“Now, what is oppressive?” he asks. Anything that you have contended with that you
believe could or would circumvent your own ability to know yourself as free of it. Any of
those things, then, becomes the false god.
Now, the Divine as what you are is in a manifest body, and things happen to a body
that may inhibit the body’s expression. But the True Self expressing as and through the
body is still free. But what freedom means—and full freedom, we have to say, is the
realized expression of the Divine as what—may not be what you think in the small self’s
purview. The idea that you no longer have the headache, the painful back, the cancer, may
be ways you know yourself in freedom. But your freedom cannot be predicated upon those
things. If that is what freedom is, you have denounced yourself and decided that these
things are more powerful than you in your true state of divine expression.
Does the Divine as you have the bad back? In manifestation, perhaps, you may
experience yourself through these things. But they don’t deny the divinity of the form you
have taken, nor do they depend upon your realization of the True Self to be released from
them. In fact, you may know who and what you are upon your deathbed in the most
profound way you ever have while being in a body. The being that the body is, in
vibration, exists in some ways in suppression of its true nature, in the lower octave. And
what we mean by this is you are always realized in the Upper Room, but your accord in
the Upper Room must be known, must be realized, and those things that exist in low
accord can be lifted and can be re-known.
“Does being re-known mean it is being healed?” he asks. In some ways, yes, but your
relationship to illness may be what requires healing, and not the illness itself. There is
nothing wrong with being born without sight, except that you decide that it is wrong. The
one who doesn’t have visual sight has other ways of accessing visual information, or what
you would believe to be visual. The idea that sight is of the visual eyes alone is mistaken.
There is nothing wrong with being born of a small size, or of a vast size. They are
different ways of being known, of being expressed, as being articulated and, having an
idea of who and what you are beyond the mechanisms of form as you have been birthed to
will, give you the opportunity to move beyond the rigidity that your relationship with form
has taken.
The claim “I am free” does not decide that you are free of the cancer, but it does
decide that you are free of the idea of what the cancer is, and, in many ways, the idea of
what the cancer is is what is consuming you, and not the cancer itself. The belief in your
disability, what you have known yourself through, as being an infraction on a perfect state
must be understood now. To be in a perfect state means to be realized as the Divine, which
is always in perfection. Do you understand this? Not when your skin clears up. Not when
the appendix is out. But with the poor appendix, or the poor eyesight, or the poor skin. If
that is not the Divine in expression, you are waiting to become a mannequin, an idea of
what it looks like to be perfected. Perhaps one day you may choose that experience and
realize yourself through it. But that is not what we are teaching you. Realization, at this
level, is alignment and expression with the causal self, the perfected self, the divine
blueprint, if you wish, as the what that you are. And those aspects of self that can conform
to this perfection may well choose to do so. But if you take this teaching as an opportunity
to give yourself the goal to be something you may never be, you are missing the point of it
entirely. You do not become divine. You already are. The body already is. It has not been
yet realized as such because you have been bound in low vibration to those things that
would support the loss of the divine expression, because it tells you it cannot be so.
He is still upset by something we said earlier. “But if somebody is consumed by
cancer, they are not being consumed by the idea of it. They are being consumed.” Perhaps
the body is, but the idea of the issue claims you in agreement to it, and in vibrational
accord with every piece of bad news you can collect to contribute to your fear. Once you
realize that everything in manifestation is first an idea, the idea itself can be re-known in
the Upper Room where the manifestation of the Divine is present without obstruction.
“But does this mean that the body is healed?” Perhaps it does, but the soul may be
choosing the lesson for other means, or it may be time for the body to release itself and
have a different experience of itself without the form it has known itself through.
We know this is challenging, Paul, and it’s why we waited to bring this teaching until
we are halfway through the text. Unless you agree that the being that you are, in its
totality, can be re-known, re-articulated, you are going to be dragging your history along
with you. And it does not come to the Upper Room in this way. You may re-see it from the
high vantage point and re-collect it to bring it to the light for transformation, re-knowing,
re-identification. But don’t expect to bring a bucket of pain to the Upper Room and sit on
it as if you are protecting a fortress. What a waste of time. You would do this if you could,
you know, most of you. You enjoy the pain. “Oh, I’m going to the Upper Room. But
there’s that woman I can’t stand. Let’s bring that pain with us, too.” And there you go,
contributing to your own misery.
You will not align to the Upper Room while you are abnegating the authority you have
to choose to be there. Did you all hear this? You will not enter the Upper Room and
manifest there when you are denying you can. We are speaking of choice. We are speaking
of recognition of one’s own authority. And we are speaking of the principle of realization,
that the one who knows who she is realizes the world in like vibrational accord.
Now, when you have an illness, you have something that is challenging, an
opportunity to learn, an opportunity to heal. But if you predicate your well-being, the
entire being, on one solution, you will lose the opportunity for true health, and we must
say true health is manifestation of divine awareness. Anything else may be chosen—a diet,
a plan of expression for the body. But, finally, we have to say, true well-being is the
expression of the Divine operating as you. And, if that comes along with an illness, the
illness is embraced and then realized anew in the Upper Room. You may receive a healing,
or a new relationship with the malady, but you will not be a victim to it because the True
Self as you cannot be a victim to anything.
He interrupts again. “But what if my Divine Self is walking down the street and gets
hit by a car? What happens then?” The Divine as you is not hit by the car. The body is.
And the body may be crushed, but the soul is not. And while the soul expresses through
the body, and while the body itself may be in high vibrational accord, while you know
what you are, the Divine in expression, the who that you are is present, with or without a
body. And, if you attach to the body through fear and oversee its protection in fear, you
probably contribute to the very circumstances that you are seeking to avoid.
Each of you who comes to us comes with a belief that things will not work out as you
want them to, and, for the most part, we have to say, thank goodness for that. You would
be living small lives in safety, and small lives in safety are far less wonderful than an
expansive life that can be known through new circumstances beyond the known.
We bring you this now, and, as we complete the first half of this text, we would like to
announce that the first half of this text—you may call it Part One—is The Upper Room.
We will continue with the second half of this text in days to come. We have great
opportunity here. We wish to take it. And we are thrilled and grateful to have your
company on the journey ahead. Period. Period. Period.
PART TWO

Realization
 7

DELIVERANCE
DAY SEVENTEEN

Trouble comes when you decide what should happen based upon an agenda of history.
Difficulty comes when you access the small self as the font of wisdom that you perceive
yourself to be at the cost of what would be brought to you in a higher way. The Divine as
who and what you are actually claims you in a kind of safety through your awareness of
who you are, what you are, and how you serve. And trouble comes to the small self, but
may be met well and in great faith by the True Self, who knows who she is.
Now, as you stand before us, as you claim who you are, as you decide what you should
be as a small self and relinquish that claim before us, you become a testament to the lives
you live in a higher octave, the Upper Room, the Christed Self as what you are in its
expression, not the small self’s expression predicated upon history, but the Divine as you
who stands before the world in service in an expression of its own knowing. Now, we say
these words intentionally. Its own knowing. The Divine as you operates in knowing—
capital K, Know. It does not ask. It does not seek to find. It does not question. It allows.
And, in the allowance of its being, knowledge is present. Now, true knowledge moves
well beyond accessing information. True knowing is the quality of expression of the tree
that has no question that it is a tree, of the bird that flies, but does not question flight. True
knowing is a state of expression. And aligning to this in the Upper Room is your lesson
for this morning.
Each of you decides, prior to incarnation, the length of the life you will live and the
ambition of the soul to meet its needs for growth. And, in a higher way, every life must be
seen as an opportunity to learn that is met, or perhaps not met, in high ways. But, once you
understand that there is no such thing as a wasted life, and knowledge comes in all
experience, the divinity of your being can begin to amass what you know of as wisdom.
Wisdom and knowledge are not the same thing. The wise man knows, but the wisdom is
accrued through experience. And we say wisdom is a gift of being, but being as the Divine
Self is the gift of knowing, and the claim “I know how I serve,” the expression of the
Divine in alliance to its requirements for service, is the agreement you make when you
align to the who and the what that you truly are.
Now, knowing cannot be sought, nor can it be found. It is present, as is the sea. And,
once you know the sea, there is never a question. “That is not a puddle, that is an ocean.
That is not a river, it is the sea.” And the awareness of this knowledge, in your presence
and agreed to as what you are, claims you all at once in the sea of knowing that is ever
present.
Some of you decide that when you know things, have answers to things, you have
ascended. Knowing is a perpetual state of agreement to God. That is the key. Knowing is a
perpetual state of agreement to God. Now, as God is the ocean that you abide in, the ever-
present ocean, you abide in knowing, as you know God.
“But we don’t know God,” he says. “We grovel, we pray, we pretend, we react, but we
still harm one another, we still war, we still weep. We don’t know God. Don’t tell us we
do.”
 But you do. And this is the tragedy of your lives. You do know God in the heart of
your soul. You do know God. It’s in every fiber of your body and anything you see.
Because God is all, you are already in the sea of its divinity. So you say you don’t know.
The True Self as you is of God. She knows her expression, and her expression is the sea. It
is the sea. The Divine Self’s expression is a wave of vibration that assumes all that it sees.
Expression, expansion, and alignment claim you in knowing.
Imagine there is a flower before you. Choose any flower you like. See its petals, see its
leaves, see the flower, choose its color. But see it clearly. And then decide the flower that
you see is in your mind, and, consequently, an expression of consciousness. Do you
understand this? The flower you see that you call rose, magnolia, anything you say, and
the colors you claim it in, are in your mind. Now, we will say what this means. You know
what blue is, you know what red is, because you have been taught blue and red. And the
differences from the rose and the petunia are known by you dimensionally through shape
and form, but your projection of the rose you see in your mind’s eye is only a figment, an
idea of a rose, of a flower, of a petal, and the scent that it emits is also the idea of what a
scent is.
Now, we do not deny the flower that you see in your mind’s eye. We wish you now to
realize that this flower you see is something that you are one with. Merge, if you wish, as
the idea of what a flower is claims you in the idea of what you are. And, as you merge, as
the idea of who and the thing you see become one, the vibration or resonance of the union
you experience is in your knowing.
Now, to know the self as one with God is to claim the self beyond the known, beyond
the decided upon, beyond that which has been chosen by your lives thus far. And the
agreement to be assumed by the ocean of God, and know yourself in oneness with it, is the
teaching of knowing. The example would be when you stand in a thunderstorm with your
eyes closed. You feel the rain, you hear the thunder, you know yourself in the experience
of the wetness and the shaking of the earth. You know yourself in your being. It is not an
intellectual act. It is a state of expression.
Now, as the what, the Divine in form who has come as you in this agreement to
embody at the level of the Upper Room, you must understand that even the idea of
separation is an agreement to be in separation. Do you understand this? Everything is an
idea, spoken into being, articulated in form, and even the idea that you are separate from
Source claims you in separation because you are that powerful, and, because what you are,
the form you have taken, is an expression of the Divine, it aligns at the level of choice the
one speaking the agreement has aligned as. The five-year-old speaks with the wisdom of
the child, and the speech of the child, invoking a world, is limited by what he
comprehends. But, as you have agreed to align to the Upper Room, the manifestation of
spoken word, choice, and mandate must be comprehended as the vibration of God
emerging, and deciding, and claiming the Kingdom into being.
Now, as you have claimed the who and the what and the expression of service in high
accord, the knowing you seek at this level of expression must be known to you. Again, the
word known. Not must be had, must be understood, must be found in some old text. Must
be known. And the agreement to know, in embodiment, is to become the sea. As you live,
as you rejoice, and, as you serve, the expression of the wave that you have become, in
octaves, in resonance, in vibration, the totality of experience can be understood as a single
note played in multidimensional octaves into infinity. And the single note, we must call
God. And the variance of God, the high and low, the universe itself, is still one note that
contains within it every imaginable expression, and beyond what you can imagine.
You seek to control this through your understanding, but you cannot understand it. You
seek to fix it, to remedy your predicaments of separation, through study, through perusing
the texts of old, but the answer of knowing exists in the agreement to be as one with the
first note played, the very first note, the very first tone, the very first sound. In the
beginning was the Word.
The teaching here is the assumption into the infinite by every aspect of being in union
at the level of causation. And causation, the act of being and expression in alignment with
the infinite truth, is the domicile and the purview and the expression of the one who knows
who she is.
If you would imagine now that before you there is an ocean, a deep ocean, the bluest
ocean you could ever imagine, and you stand upon its shore. And, as you stand upon its
shore, you agree to what you have known, what you have chosen, how you have lived,
who you have lived as. And, as you agree, you release the body as you have known it. You
may release the clothing, the name you have gone by, the color of your skin, and your sex.
These are ideas, as well, that you have chosen to abide by. And, as the vibratory being that
you are, embodied now in truth, you walk forward, step by step, and immerse yourself in
this bright blue sea. You will not drown here, but you will be assumed. And to be assumed
in the sea of knowing, as we teach it now, is to incarnate at a level of agreement that
accesses the totality of your being as a receptive one to the Source of all things. This
means, very simply, that you are releasing the illusion of separation as you enter the sea
and let it surround you.

“I am one with the sea of knowing. I am one with my agreement to know. I am

aligning to my knowing, in forgiveness of what I have thought, believed myself to
be, and perhaps chose in defiance to truth. But, as I float, as I am assumed in the
sea of knowing, I give myself permission now to experience what it is to truly
know.”

When you align yourself now to this vibration, empty your mind of all expectation and
let it be informed by knowing and being. Beyond language, if need be. Beyond symbol, if
need be. Knowing requires no language and no symbol. The articulation of sound has been
degraded, in many ways, through symbol and language. And the pure essence of tone that
we align in and express through is the Source of all, as we align to it.
Give yourself permission to align and know.
Let yourself be received by us. Wherever you are, wherever you sit, wherever you lie,
let yourself be known, just as you are. And, as we know you, as we accept you in our
knowing, we support you in your acceptance of the knowing that is available to you in this
perfect sea.
We will stop this lecture now. Indeed, this is in the text. Period. Period. Period.
DAY EIGHTEEN

We have come, we have come, we have come. And, as we teach you, as we recognize you
for who and what you are, we give you the opportunity to choose again the Upper Room,
the place of vibration where the manifestation of the Divine can be present in fullness.
And the recognition of this—“I am in the Upper Room”—will claim you in many ways
beyond the known, beyond the claims you’ve made in history and would seek to justify as
a small self. In dominion, you may claim anything, and the realization of the Divine as
what you are, the manifest form you have taken in agreement to be in vibration in the
Upper Room, claims you as the one who can call into being a landscape in recognition of
her True Self, his innate self, which we call the Kingdom.
Now, each of you decides how far you will go on this mission. Each of you agrees at a
soul level that this will be the lifetime for realization, or that the opportunity to present
itself as realized may be taken. But the claim you make, “I Have Come,” which is the
claim of the Christ in incarnation, is only true when spoken in the Upper Room. The
Christ has come as each of you, you see, and the Upper Room is the abiding place of the
Christ. And, as the vehicle of the Christ, the body you have taken and the mission the soul
has claimed to be incarnate at this level, the choice is made to announce the self to the
world: “I Have Come.”
Now, ideas of what it means to be in manifestation must be claimed anew because the
ideas of old, what it means to be ascended or incarnate at this level, have been fraught
with confusion, misinformation, and a kind of pedagogy born in history that would seek to
find itself in the tatters of old books, in the imprinting upon walls, when in fact the
encoding of truth is done at a soul level and is read there, is announced there, by the one
who knows who she is.
When retribution comes to the small self, it is always in repayment for history, things
done prior that are seeking to re-know themselves in karma. When you ascend at this level
of vibratory octave, you are actually bypassing systems of retribution because who you are
claiming yourself as in truth is not at the lower vibration where she can be struck. If you
imagine a stone being thrown, the body may be struck, but the soul self, in its incarnation
that has risen to a level of agreement, is actually free of any onslaught because she abides
in a place where she cannot know them—underline the word cannot—cannot because they
do not exist.
The idea of things coming at you, crashing upon you, being out of control, is
completely the small self in its agreement to know itself through the chaos of the
agreements made in prior time, in this incarnation, or through the incarnations of history,
that still play themselves out upon this lifetime in the shared landscape that you all know
yourselves in. As the risen Christ—underline the word risen because it is the ascended self
that abides in the Upper Room, and not the small self, who judges or fears—you are
limited only by the agreements made in fruition in tangible ways that support your
ongoing sense of knowing what you are. In other words, the absolute state of incarnation
as a realized being is still coming to you in stages and in increments, even as you abide in
the Upper Room or the high landscape or octave we teach you in.
 Now, the idea of fear and being claimed by fear must be understood, finally, as a way
to know the self in fear, and to be in fear is to be in agreement to it, and to be in agreement
to it is to verify it. To verify anything is to make it so, and to make it so is to realize it or
know it at the level of function and form that it has taken. To know the self beyond fear,
the Divine Self as you who exists there, is to align to the level where fear cannot penetrate.
As we have said prior, if you wish an experience of fear, you may go back and choose it,
but it is no longer a requirement for how you may learn your lessons. You may choose it,
you may move beyond it, because you have choice, still, in ascension of who you are as
embodied. And the requirements for choice made in alignment with Divine Will—“I know
myself as Divine Will”—are always in accord with the progression of the soul, which
seeks to realize itself in fullness.
Again, the octave of agreement we are singing to you from is always available to you,
but the Upper Room is privileged, in some ways, for those who have claimed it and may
abide in it because they have chosen to release the self that knows itself in and through
fear. It is not denying fear as much as not agreeing to it, and to move beyond fear to
incarnate at this level will require you to pass through it as you would any journey with
many stops.
The realization of the Divine as what is always predicated on the expression you have
taken. Expression can mean form, the body you have taken, but everything you see about
you is expression, an articulation of consciousness that has been codified and named and
agreed to. To justify the old, to claim everything in the old way, is to taint the moment you
stand in with the information or data that has been inscribed or articulated in and as form.
To renounce form is not to release the world, to release the things of this world, as much
as to release the attachment to what things have meant, how they have been. When one
renounces the world, one does not stop living in the world, but the world one lives in is a
vastly different world where the names things are claimed by have very little meaning
because the Divine Self does not attach to the values that have been given them. “Look at
this wonderful diamond my partner gave me. My partner must love me very much to
spend so much upon me.” The identification of the value of the diamond as a monetization
of love could make no sense to the Divine Self, who understands a diamond as what it is, a
beautiful thing wrought of the earth. And the manifestation of love could be the impulse to
give, but the coal would have been fine, the crust of coal. The piece of earth given in love
without the monetization would have been fine, or absolutely nothing at all.
Look at the life you live, and look at it now. See what you value and why you value it,
what you have attached to, what you believe to be so important. “I am nothing without my
bank account or my father’s love.” “I am nothing without the watch I wore on that special
reunion with my fate. If I don’t have the watch, I have nothing to remember it by.”
Anything you see that you value is being valued by you, and much of what you value has
no value other than that. An umbrella in a storm has as much value as a fancy home when
you are being rained upon. The denial of truth, what you think is so important at the cost
of truth, must be met by you now if you intend to mandate an experience of being that
precludes fear.
 Imagine, for a moment, that the things that you value most were not present in your
life. Most of you would stop listening to us now if you were able, close the book, turn off
the computer. “Don’t listen to these words that tell me not to want what I have.” We are
not telling you not to want anything. We are actually inviting you to see why you want
what you have and how you create that as a basis for more of the same. The limitlessness
that is the Upper Room can hold anything and nothing. And the self that abides there is
perfect, with or without the fancy watch, the diamond ring, or the home. Each of you here,
by nature of being, is a divine being, and the realization of it, the manifestation of it, and
the abiding in it within the Upper Room, grants you the opportunity, not only to rejoice in
what is there for you, but what you can now share with the world.
The idea of plenty, for most of you, has colluded with the idea of getting a lot. “Look
at the plentiful life I live and all of the things I have gathered.” Enjoy the Upper Room
where plentiful is a state of being, and nothing accrued. You cannot accrue riches in the
Upper Room, but you may know yourself as rich, and there is a difference. Everything of
this flesh will one day not be present in the form it has taken, and nothing you see in the
room you stand in will be present in four hundred years. Everything will have been made
new, and the dust of your body will be somewhere other, taken some other form, and the
vibrational being you are will have announced itself in some other manifestation, on some
other plane, in some other way of expression. To deny the Divine in the fabric of form is
to commit a strange kind of heresy. God is in the diamond and in the fancy watch and in
the beautiful home because God is in the brick and the mortar of all things. But God is in
the hovel, God is in the cave, and God is the one that dwells within the hovel and the cave,
as well as the one that has found itself, finally, finally, finally, in the Kingdom.
To realize the Divine in manifestation is to know God as form, but the moment you
worship form you are in heresy, which is denying the truth, because the only thing that can
be worshipped is love, because love asks nothing of you but to be of it, and its source of
supply is endless. “But is God love?” he asks. “Don’t we worship God?” The
understanding of worship is confused to you, Paul. To bow down to anything is to decide
that you are lower, but to realize the God within holds you in deep humility and reverence
for the Source of all things, and to bow to that in reverence is an act of grace and an
agreement to your participatory nature to the world you express in. God is in the rock. Do
not pray to the rock. Pray to the Source of the rock, which is the same Source as your
breath, and the stars above you. To exclude anything from this equation is to deny the
Kingdom, which encompasses the rock, the stars, and every breath you take. In dominion
you may claim the requirements or needs of any given day and expect to be met by them.
But this is not the small self groveling before an altar, saying, “Take care of me, pay my
rent, find me love, show me employment. I will not do my part.” You all have a part, and
the moment you stand in the awareness of who and what you are and offer yourself in
fullness and claim the Upper Room, the articulation of your being, the pronunciation of
your name—“I Have Come”—ennobles you to claim the world for the benefit of all. Do
you get to trust that your needs are met in this plane of expression while you abide in the
Upper Room? In fact, when you abide in the Upper Room, you are in the presence of the
Divine, and that is the Source of all, so anything you can claim in realization may be
known to you in the perfect form it may take for you.
“I don’t understand this,” he says. “This sounds like magical thinking. Don’t mislead
us, please.” It is not magic. It is alchemy in a higher sense than you understand, Paul. The
density of vibration that you all operate here in this plane in accord with has precluded
many of you from the experience of what manifestation is in a way that concurs with this
teaching. But if you already understand that there is not a thing in your life that you are
not in resonance to, that you are already in manifestation and seeing the manifestation of
your consciousness, individual and collective consciousness, all around you, you will not
realize how powerful you have already been. The vast difference in the Upper Room is
you are not placating the old reality. You are not suffering for it. You are not perpetuating
it. You have reclaimed yourself in a new way, and consequently what you call into being
in manifestation is not only of like accord, but is the perfect thing for you to realize to
learn through.
The adjustment is a radical one because you’ve been seeking your needs through the
material realm and seeking to grant favor with whatever forces you think there are to make
them known. You forget that who and what you are is of the Source, and your progression
as a soul actually requires you to realize, to know, how to call into being into manifest
form what the soul requires. If you understand that you are already doing this at a level of
density, but the idea of cause and effect is confused by you because, in some ways, when
you claim something in consciousness, it appears so far later down the road that you don’t
connect it to the inclination that was originally present or the seed of manifestation that
has now flowered.
Now, we are saying this for Paul, who is in the background yelling, “You are not
talking about instant manifestation, are you?” Of course, we are, but not in the way you
think. Realization is instantaneous, and to realize the truth in anything is to re-know it in
that instant, but this instant that we speak to is the eternal now, the infinite moment
beyond time itself. As you accrue the wisdom of experience with this, how you know your
world in realization is sustained by you because you mandate that the high octave of the
Upper Room is where you know yourself, and you claim the Kingdom from this purview.
The teaching of the Jesus expression that you have been taught through was identical to
this, but you limit yourself in the awareness that you are causal. Jesus knew who and what
he was and demonstrated the action of it. Others have come that have identified and
claimed the Kingdom, but the multitude has been refused, and been refused for good
reason. You opt to kill your brothers, you opt to choose in fear, you opt to starve your
neighbors, you opt to judge, and each act we have just claimed has a ramification or
karma. And the karma of humanity must be risen beyond or you will destroy yourselves
incurring more. How do you move beyond karma, but through realization, and to realize
the Christed Self is to manifest a new world and lift the world before you to its truth?
He is interrupting. “But haven’t you said in the past there is still karma in the Upper
Room?” If there is something you need to learn through, yes. You are accountable to your
past actions. But to rise above the claims of history in liberation also offers you the
opportunity to be released from the retribution of history, which is how we began this
teaching tonight. The arcane way of looking at progression over lifetimes in remorse or in
payback through karma must be now re-understood: That while every action has a
response, the action claimed in the Upper Room has the response of releasing you from
the mandates of history as long as you don’t conform to them. To deny your divinity is to
deny this potential, and that is why we began, when we began to teach through this young
man, with the attunement to the Word. “I am Word through my body. Word I am Word. I
am Word through my vibration. Word I am Word. I am Word through my knowing of
myself as Word.” To become articulated as the Word is first done through the claim of
identity and manifestation, and the soul will rise to the occasion as the announcement is
made. The Divine as who and what you are is not only here, but it is already lifting your
expression to the Upper Room.
On the count of three, we intend to lift you all, once again, to the Upper Room where
you may be known and you may experience knowing in completeness, the vast sea of
knowing that is here for you, from whence you may choose.
One. Two. Three.
Be lifted, and be sung. Let the field sing, and let the Christ be known through each of
you in this articulation: “I Have Come. I Have Come. I Have Come.”
Blessings to you each.
DAY NINETEEN

Each of you decides, prior to incarnation, how far you may progress in alignment toward
realization, but we will say the choice may claim you in a new life beyond what you
would expect without exceeding the potential that you have at this time. Most of you want
realization in complete fullness. “Let me be at the top of the mountain in the Upper Room.
Let me sing the song of love and forget myself entirely.” The small self is not forgotten in
this transition. She is still present, but she is not who and what you are, the authority of
your life, the queen of the Kingdom. She knows her name, she knows her role, but her
accountability to her own self is still present, even as she has been assumed by the Divine.
The Divine as who and what and its expression as you does not decide for you that the
woman you have been is no longer. It does mean the woman you have been is no longer
who she thinks she is, or what she thought she was. The dismantling of a structure of
identity, in some ways, is actually a rebuilding from the residual ideas that have been
discarded, and then re-made, and then re-assumed in the high octave of the Upper Room.
Imagine this. You get rid of a pair of shoes that you have been walking in, but you still
require shoes. The idea of the shoe is not the wrong idea. The old pair was outgrown, the
new must be brought to you. The idea of the shoe, a thing you put upon your feet to
protect them from the earth, is not a bad thing. But, if you have identified with the shoe,
the old pair that is discarded, you will rely upon the old idea of what a shoe should be,
perhaps at the cost of the new ones that would be brought for you to walk in. The Divine
as you is in an encounter with reality, and the creations of the small self will always
surround you until you realize—underline that word realize—that the manifestation of
God is all things, and that there is not one thing, not one thing at all, that cannot be re-
known and re-created, the new pair of shoes, if you wish, in the Upper Room.
Now, calamity comes when a system is falling apart, and the reliance upon the system,
the things that you have used to get through the day, can no longer conform to your
expectations. When a system fails, a new system may be born, but in every case you find
yourself grappling with the repair of the old instead of seeking what can be born in its
place. You seek to remedy your politics on this plane, you seek to remedy the disharmony
that exists between factions across the globe, you seek to protect the systems that you have
that you believe in, because, without them, you perceive terror. “What if there is no money
in the bank? What if there is no electricity coming from the outlet? What if what I’ve
thought I was and how I’ve cared for myself is not what I thought I was? How do I care?”
In some ways, the external systems that you see collapsing in your world cannot be
remedied, cannot be fixed, nor should they be. A new one must be born in a higher
agreement. And the consequence of this is that what you are seeing before you, the turmoil
that you experience, either in politics or factions across the globe, are the manifestations
of the chaos of systems that are collapsing because they were initially created or later
informed by fear and a need to control others that cannot exist in the high octave that is
now present on this plane. Your understanding of who and what you are must become
reliant on the eternal truth, and not the small self’s idea of what it should be. The Divine
as you, who has come and must be seen in a new way in all she perceives, must be re-
created on this plane at the cost of the old. Who you think you are, the broadcast of the
small self and its small expression, must be comprehended as the manifestation on this
plane that you are contending with, not at the level of the individual, but of the collective.
Who you are in the Upper Room or the higher octave is the one who can claim or realize
the new world into manifestation. But, if you believe for a moment that you are returning
to a state of predictability through harmony, or what you think is harmony, with the old
organisms or old systems of creation, you would be wrong-minded. The Divine as you is
not reliant upon the old. Do you all understand this? The Divine as you does not seek to
re-create through formula what you have thought was necessary.
Now, your contribution, individually and collectively, to the manifestation of a new
world must be understood as something that happens in a new way. Underline new. You
know how to bake a cake through the recipe of old. There is nothing wrong with the recipe
that you have used. But, once you understand that the failings of systems will not be
remedied by the old recipe, but what may be claimed in a new way, you will find yourself
seeking to fix, and not re-create or re-know. The world you see before you must be created
anew, in accord with the octave of truth in the freedom of expression that the Divine
knows itself in, and at the cost of what has been claimed, in a way, through fear, to judge,
to control, and to decide what things should be in an old template that has claimed you, all
of you, in fear.
This is the day of a new encounter, a new reliance upon the claim “I Have Come,” and,
as we teach you this, the Divine as you, in witness of a world who can claim “I Have
Come,” you will realize that the manifestation of God that is present for you can be re-
understood and reclaimed in the manifest world through the one who has shown herself in
realization in fullness.
He is interrupting. He has several questions. “At the beginning of this talk, you said
we would not all be realized in fullness.” In fact, what we said is that you will be realized
at the level you can be, and the level you can be realized at, which is the vibratory accord
that you may take, will be what claims you in a new way, well beyond the known. We are
speaking to those of you who have an idea that the realized state that you come to is an
abandonment of a small self. A realization of who you are that decides who you are not or
could not have been would never support integration. And you must be integrated, all of
you, finally, to be a true expression. God does not come through you and annihilate the
ideas of who you are and leave you blubbering on a street corner not knowing how to read
a street sign. What would be the purpose of that? The skills amassed, the lessons learned,
are present, but you are not relying upon them to dictate identity, nor are you moving into
conformity with what you think they should be.
Now, the small self, in her purview, knows where she lives, what her occupation is, the
names of her children. Be grateful for that. You would have a hard time, taking the
neighbor’s children away from her, thinking that they were your own. The small self has
some things to give you. But the Divine as you also knows these things, and is claiming
you, in accord, to a new level of realization, through the alignment and through the claim
“I Have Come.”
Now, when you speak these words, you are speaking truth. The Christ as you, the
Divine as you, is who has come, in embodiment and expression. And the expressed state
of being is not a passive state. The action of the Divine, the causal act, is to reclaim
everything it encounters in like vibratory accord. And the small self’s desire to justify the
old will be reinterpreted by the Divine Self so it is no longer operative. You are not going
to fix yourself. Do you understand this? This is not about fixing yourselves. The reliance
upon the old and the systems of old that are collapsing around you are, in all ways, mirrors
of the individual’s journey of reliance upon fear that is being released in this process of re-
creation.
The small self does not decide how she will be fixed, because fixing is not operative.
The True Self as what you are is the director now, and will claim it as it is required, and
will manifest what is needed as you are assumed in agreement to it. If you can understand
that the wheel of the ship that you have been navigating is now being helmed by the
Divine Self, who understands the winds and the destiny before her, you will understand
that the best thing you can do, sometimes, is allow her to captain your life and stop trying
to give her the manifestation that you think you should have to be who you thought you
should be. “Well, I just want a marriage that works and my children to be happy, and here
you are captaining my ship beyond the known. I didn’t ask for this. I just want my small
life to work. That’s really all I came for.”
The small life you’ve lived is being re-interpreted, re-articulated, and what she
requires, the True Self as you, will mandate the passage of this ship, not your requirements
for what you think should be. You are not abandoning control, you are giving over the
helm quite willingly to the aspect of the self that is now realized as you in the claim “I
Have Come.” Every attunement prior to this was in preparation for this decree. And this
decree upon the external world will manifest in a broadcast that is equationally different
than what you have believed could be so.
“What does that mean,” he asks, “equationally different?” The idea of cause and effect
is an equation of sorts. “When I do this, this will occur.” The vibration of the Divine as the
full broadcast of the individual, and its manifestation and the ramifications of that
encounter, is a new equation that has not been known through you until now. Until this is
known or realized through each of you, it will remain in conjecture. And, as we continue
this text, our intention is to give you the opportunity to be in this encounter of vibratory
accord to witness the impact of the causal field in a high octave, claiming a world into a
new light.
We will commence with this teaching, as we are allowed. Thank you each for your
presence.
(PAUSE)

Trust yourselves, please, to know what you need to know as you need to know it. Don’t
dictate outcome based on history because this guarantees you the residual effect of prior
choice and prior learning. To be realized is to be in the moment, and only the moment you
stand in. When you ask why not anyone or everyone will be realized, there is a process
entailed in this agreement that must be undertaken for it to occur. The soul understands the
capacity of an individual soul to realize itself in accordance with the mandates of its
required learning, the lessons it has come for. In this lifetime you may have chosen the
lesson of realization and all that it entails, or you may have chosen something other. Please
do not decide that one lesson is better or more noble than the next. That is, again, the small
self with its edicts of what should be.
Now, the Christed Self will realize itself at the fullness of equation that it can manage,
and, if you wish to realize the self beyond the known, the way is being paved for you in
this teaching. If you wish to know yourself beyond what you have claimed, you must stop
agreeing to the facts that you have utilized to dictate your reality. He doesn’t like this.
“Well, we have facts for a reason. They are facts.” In fact, what you think you see is
evidence of a reality that can be re-known or re-interpreted in another way. In the higher
room, the Upper Room, truth is prevalent, and truth understands itself in a rather different
way than the small self’s assertions would. When we said a new equation, we were
speaking to something new. And, again, cause and effect, as understood by you, will
always be the ramification of prior learning. “I turn on the water faucet, out comes water.”
The expectation is water, and that is what you agree to. When you move beyond the
known, you actually move beyond systems of compliance or heredity to dictate what
reality is. Imagine, if you wish, that you lived on the twentieth floor of a high-rise
building. You understand the view from the twentieth floor. You understand the mandates
for living there, but, because twenty is as high as you can imagine, you cannot assume that
there is anything beyond it. What if, in fact, there were? What if there were different ways
of being expressed that would call into being different effect? And different effect we
mean as different than what the small self would predicate through its identification of
history, or through history, as the decider of the present. Everything exists in multiple
octaves, and the transition from one octave to another requires the transposition of the
notes of music that are being played from one key to a key in a higher octave. When you
do that, the affect of the music is very different, and your experience of the sound—“Well,
that is a familiar song, I have not heard it in this key before, in this new octave”—you
would have a way of comprehending what the translation means.
In your realized world, in the world you share, you have agreements about what things
are, what they mean, and you create expectations around them for the purpose of
expectancy and the norm. The norm is what you want, and nowadays what you believe the
norm to be is in transition, the confused state of affairs, the chaos you see. What was once
expected is no longer expected, and none of you quite know what to think or how to react.
The small self always seeks the old as a way to know itself because it has no framework
and no ability to see beyond what it has been taught. The reliance upon the Divine Self is
crucial now, because, unless you do this, you will find yourself replicating the old at the
cost of what might be brought to you. The small self, you see, in her edicts, would rather
see a house fall down upon her, as long as it is a house she knows. She cannot imagine
living in something that doesn’t resemble what she has known. She will fix the battered
roof until there is nothing left to fix, than experience herself in a very different way of
abiding in a place she might call home.
The idea of the Upper Room is a translation of one reality to the higher that has always
co-existed with it. You must understand this. The Upper Room is not a creation of
something new. It is only new to the experience of the small self. The small self cannot
abide there, nor can she imagine it. If she were to imagine it, she would throw in a few
angels, perhaps a headstone or two. “It must be where you go when you’re dead.” It is not
where you go when you’re dead. It’s where you know yourself in union with the Divine,
and nothing more. Dead or alive, the idea is still the same. There is a place of agreement,
of energetic accord, where you may know yourself beyond the dominion of the small self.
It’s the Upper Room that is the new equation in any new choice. How you attend to your
child or your work or your belief in God may be vastly different in the Upper Room,
because the conjecture that you have used to realize all of those other things are rather
different in the higher octave. “I know my child. I know his name. I know his
predilections. And he must do better in school, if he is to succeed.” When you decide that,
that your child’s behavior in school predicates his future, you are ascribing to a success
that is born in the lower octave—do you understand this?—and the prescriptions of
behavior that you would mandate to have him succeed within an existing system. You
ascribe to the systems. You make them real. And then, when they start to fall apart, what
do you have? “I spent all that money on school, and there is no job.” “I invested all those
years in a marriage, and there is no love.” “I believed in my government, and my
government is failing me.” “I believed we would have peace, I have marched for peace,
and now I see avarice and war.” “What do I do now? How do I behave? How do I live in a
world that will not conform to my ideas of what should be, based upon what has been, or
the ideology I would hold for what should be?”
Again, the True Self is realized only in the present moment. The Upper Room exists
eternally, but you may only know it in the moment you sit in. You will not know it
tomorrow or next week, but you will know it in the instant you experience it. And
realization occurs here because the Divine Self as you is who is realized, and she is only
realized in the upper vibrational self that she has ascended to. The Upper Room, where the
True Self abides, is a level of realization. What exists in the lower octaves can and will be
reclaimed, re-created, or re-known in some other way by the one who expresses herself
there, because that is the law, and the law is co-resonance. You cannot be a turtle and be a
kangaroo at the same time. It is not possible.
To realize the Divine as who and what you are reclaims the identity of the body and
the expression of vibration in a new song. You are not as you were. The small self’s
identity has been assumed or reclaimed in this new purview: “I Have Come.” And its
expression and its manifestation and impact upon what it encounters is what claims a new
world into manifestation. The ideology of a Messiah who will fix everybody, return you
all to Eden, is somewhat misconstrued. The Upper Room, the abode of the Christ
consciousness, the level of expression that can be attained by a mortal while in form, is
what has come as you, the level of attainment or vibratory agreement that incarnation can
occur at while in form. Underline form. So many of you debase the idea of form, or, in
fact, deify it without realizing that all form can be, all it can ever be, is expression, and
identity through form is a process of naming or self-identification through a language that
you have inherited. “I live in a room. My name is Paul. I know this or that in the ways that
I have been taught.” He is languaging his experience and expressing or articulating in
vibration the manifestations of thought or identity as can be known.
The True Self as you exists beyond the articulation of the small self. And,
consequently, how it calls things into being, in progression, is a different equation than
you have known. “What is the different equation?” We will try to tell you this now. The
Divine Self, the True Self as each of you, has a new language to articulate. It is tone and it
is field. It does not mean a sofa is not a sofa. It means the sofa is re-known in a higher
octave that has been lifted by you, by nature of expression. A vowel, spoken, is a sound.
The only meaning it has is that which you have endowed it with. The name you go by is
simply an idea of what you have agreed to. It is not who you are.
As we reclaim you each, one and all, beyond language and beyond the reference points
that language might offer you, we are lifting you to opportunity, a new opportunity to
transgress, in some ways, upon what you have been taught or thought could be. The action
of the Divine is the Word. Do you understand this? In the beginning was the Word. The
Word is tone, in frequency, informed by the Divine that can know itself as and through
anything because nothing can be outside of God. Treason, we suggest, the small self’s
treason against the Divine, is the foolish belief that she is not of God. And the re-
articulation of the True Self, as manifest in form, is what we have come to bring—as form,
in vibration, an articulation of sound or tone that the field that you hold incarnates as,
while knowing itself still as flesh and bone and marrow and blood and saliva. You
understand, yes, that you cannot be separate from Source, but you don’t understand that
the realization of union must transpose the sound you make, the energetic tone of
vibration, to a new octave, and, in that new octave, “I Have Come” announces itself to lift
the world to a new vibration.
This is not a small act. This is an act that is antithetical to almost everything you have
ever been taught, but, if it were not so, we could not teach it to you. We speak in truth, we
know ourselves in truth, and we know you in truth, as well, beyond the structure or old
articulation. “I am the mother of three.” “I don’t like my husband.” “I had a father. He left
us.” The small self’s narratives are present, but you are not those things because you
cannot be those things in the higher room.
“Now, what does that mean?” he asks. “Her father never left her? She never had a
child?” That is not what it means. It means the divine expression, in her announcement of
being, has moved beyond levels of identification in limitation that would deliver her from
her true destiny, her true destiny being the Divine Self that is realized through the mother,
through the one that was left, through the one who lives in such and such a place, has such
and such a heritage, and can know herself as the Divine through all these things.
The action you take now, in deliverance, which is the title of this chapter, is the re-
creation of truth in any idea that you have utilized to define the self in aspiration that can
be claimed beyond the small self in limitation. This simply means you are releasing the
idea of what you could be, as prescribed by the small self, to realize what you are and
have always been. Here is the teaching of transmission to a new key, a new octave, a new
expression. Here is the answer you have sought.
The being that you are, in her way, in his way, is enormous in its expression, and the
allowance for the enormity has been precluded by a simple idea that you are not of God,
and the bypassing of that idea, the re-knowing of the Divine as what, while this teaching
in fullness, is still an idea until it is met by you in occurrence, or realization. Until it is
known in realization, it is an idea, and just another idea of a potential that you may claim.
In order to give you this, we must assume you, and, for us to assume you at this level of
tone, relies upon our ability to call Paul forth as the vehicle for our expression. When the
teachings are new and discomfort arises within him around the ideas we express, we still
do our best to transmit the teaching as clearly as we can. But to assume you will rely upon
him, for we assume him in this agreement to be with you. So we would invite Paul now, as
he sits, to allow us to come through as a field. We will bring you all up to the Upper Room
in this moment simply by intention, so you may be met by us in this moment.
As we say yes to this assumption through the body of Paul, and the expression of Paul
in field, we are actually making an agreement to each of you, wherever you may be, that
you may be known and realized beyond the self, beyond the edicts of history and the
challenges you may have defined yourselves through, one and all. “How is this done?” he
asks. By alignment. This entire teaching is alignment. It always has been. Everything else
is information, and information and alignment are rather different, don’t you think? Paul,
we will align you now as you speak these words, and then we will call everybody forth in
one accord:

“On this day I claim that I am allowing myself to be realized beyond the known,
beyond any agreements made or chosen by me in any time that would preclude this
destiny. As I give permission to realize myself beyond the known, I am known, I am
received, I am delivered, in fact, from any idea of limitation that would prescribe
my destiny, any agreement made in any time that would coerce me from the truth of
my being. As I say yes to this, I give permission to the entirety of my being to be re-
known, re-created, and re-sung in vibration. And the song of my field will be in
eminence and knowing for the benefit of all who would encounter it.”

We say these words through you, Paul, not as you, as much, because it is we who sing.
And, as we sing through the body and soul of your being, we sing to all for their own
knowing, to be acknowledged and reclaimed in union with the Source of their being. On
the count of three, Paul, we lift the field you sit in, and we bring it out in a wave around
you, so that anyone who hears these words may be met by them. Just give yourselves
permission to be met, wherever you may be.
One. Two. Three.
(short pause)
Allow. Allow. Allow.
Be received. Be received. Be received.
Accept. Accept. Accept.
(short pause)
 What is occurring now is a vibrational accord or alignment that is available, as
accepted by you each, to assume you in fullness in the stages of agreement you can align
to. Here are the stages of agreement: “It can be done. It will be known. I have known and I
have claimed my ability to receive, and I am allowing myself to be created in the high
room, in form and field, for the benefit of all.”
The alchemy of this choice is systematized by the individual, who can only agree to
the manifestation of this at the level she can concur with. And you must understand this.
You will only receive this in vibration at the level you can hold. As you can hold more,
you will be agreed to and re-known in more, in agreement to more, and what you may
understand as completion. At each stage of evolution, humanity is given the opportunity to
release an idea of what it is to agree to a new model or embodiment. This is this time, and
you have each come in participation to it. Be received by us, wherever you sit, wherever
you be, and say yes to who and what you are in God. Period. Period. Period.
(PAUSE)

Each of you decides, prior to incarnation, the level of agreement that you will hold in a
lifetime. This is done at a soul level, not through the personality, who has decided that she
will ascend, will know glory, will claim the Kingdom in the way she thinks she should.
The True Self as you is who claims the Kingdom. The Divine as what you are is what
manifests the Kingdom in mutual vibratory agreement to a sound or a tone that is key to
catalytic expression of the Divine.
Now, the form you have taken, know it or not, holds within it the challenge for
ascension, or to be re-made or re-known in a higher octave. And by this we mean the
expression you hold holds within it the opportunity for realization in form without the
agreement of the small self hindering it. But the small self is required, as the occupant of
form, to allow the environment that the small self knows itself through to be lifted. And
here is the challenge. Each of you who decides that you can and will align in the Upper
Room for the purpose of expression must decide that permission is required and given by
all aspects of self in order to realize what you may in the Upper Room. In fact, what you
cannot do is drag an aspect of self to the Upper Room with you which refuses to realize its
divinity.
“What would be an example,” he asks, “of an aspect of us that refuses its divinity?”
If you look at your culture, or any culture for that matter, there are aspects of self that
are perceived of as without God. You may claim the body is holy, but you hold deep
shame of the body. You cover your parts in shame, and the expulsion from Eden, as
depicted, has those people cowering and covering their nakedness. The Divine as what
you are is in perfection in every cell of your being, and that includes the aspects of you
that you may feel shame about. Whether it is how you perceive yourself, or how you
perceive others perceive you, it matters not. What you have condemned, you have
removed from the garden, you have put outside of God. Now, to debase the body is to
deny the Divine within it. “What do we mean by debase?” he says. How you care for it, or
how you don’t. The challenge here, again, is what aspect of self is in care of the body. The
small self’s assumption of what she should look like, how he should behave, are usually
predicated on the expressions of the world that she abides in. You denounce the foods of
the day that you are taught to denounce. You ascribe to this or to that as what you should
be. And you end up replicating cycles, again and again, that keep you in bondage to an
idea or a system of expression.
We have to invite you now to a new potential, beyond the known. And the realization
of form, and that is the body you have taken, must be consented to as you agree that the
body may be re-known, and known in a new way in its field. What we mean by this is that
the field that the body holds is its expression. There is nothing of the body that is not
replicated in the etheric, and to re-form the body is to realize the perfection that exists in
the etheric and can be made in manifestation as the what that you are. Equivalencies here,
if we wish to use that word, are, simply put, as within, so without. But if the governance of
the body is the small self with its agenda and mandate, you will be doing the best you
know how, but you will not be in transformation. The Divine as who and what you are,
who knows who she is, also claims form as its expression. And to truly surrender the body
to a renunciation of what harms it is not an intellectual act, as you all think it is. It’s a
simple act of attending to the Divine and providing it the opportunity to claim you. As you
decide that you have the right to be, at this level or juncture of decision, you may also
decide that the form that you have taken can move into a new coherence and abide in the
Divine, and that the functions of the body, which includes your sexual self, may be re-
known in a higher alignment.
“But what does that mean?” he asks. Very simply put, the Divine as sex, as the act, as
the urge, as procreation, or without procreation. The ability of the body to express itself in
a sexual self is a gift, and to deny the gift is to debase the body. To decide that the gift
should rule the body, and should be the reason you are, would also debase the body
because you are not operating in alignment to the requirements of the True Self. “Does the
True Self have a requirement for sexual being?” Of course it does, as does every flower,
every tree. Perhaps the difference in this form is the identity and the objectification of
others that actually operates with the sense of separation or the denial of the inherent
Divine.
To deny the Divine in your partner is to deny the divinity of the sexual act. To love
your partner is to love the body, and the expression that the body has taken. Not every love
is expressed sexually, but sexual love, we would have to say, is a way to know God, as is a
walk on the beach, or singing to your daughter before she goes to sleep. You may know
God in a sunset, or upon the lips of the beloved. It is still the presence and the interaction
with the Divine that has come and is being known and realized as who and what you are.
Paul is interrupting. “Why this digression and attendance to sex?” Well, we have been
asked about it, so we are choosing to answer. But beyond that, the incorporation of the
holiness of form into the absolute, which is the simple ascension of the body to a higher
octave of expression, cannot happen when you are debilitated by shame, or self-denial, or
a desire to demand that others be your object of gratification and not be in love with them.
And, to be in love, we must restate, is to be in the vibration of love, not a romantic
ideology, but the presence of love that is known in relation with another. To deny God in
another is to deny God within the self. And to deny the sexuality that is present for you,
whatever it may be, is to deny the Divine its opportunity to express through it. “How does
the Divine express sexually?” you may ask. In love. In an awareness of the beauty of the
potential of the senses to know themselves in this agreement in tandem with another.
There is no one right way to be expressed sexually. You have your proclivities: She prefers
a brunette, he prefers a man, she prefers a man, what have you. But if the denial of the
Divine is present in the predilection, the act itself will be in low vibration. And, if the act
is in low vibration, you are supporting fear, because the denial of the Divine in anyone or
anything is the portal to this. To agree to the Divine in any partner is to love the partner.
This is true in friendship. It is true in matrimony. It is true in love, whatever form the love
may take. The awareness of the Divine in the one before you, when you are loving them,
is the presence of the Divine that claims you each in consort that you may know
yourselves through.
“How is this ascension?” he asks. “Or is it?”
You may be in love in the Upper Room. You may be in passion there, as well. Why
would you exclude the joy of sexuality from your true expression? If every time you make
love, you have to go back down to the cellar, you are going to have a very difficult time
navigating the octaves. And, if you have not yet made love in the Upper Room, we expect
you’re going to like it very much. “Why?” you say. Because there is no fear. The
vulnerability you express in is absolute because the fear that would preclude you from
knowing another, truly knowing another, cannot be present in that octave. Many of you
say you wish to know intimacy, but you do not know intimacy because you are hindered
from it in your expression because you create the walls born in fear that would keep you
from love, and, in many cases, quite sadly, from allowing yourself to know love.
What if, in this instant, it was safe to be loved, both in body and in heart? What if it
meant that you could be in a relationship beyond the ideas you’ve held about what a
relationship can be? What if the ability to be loved, in truth, were not predicated on
anything other than your being in truth? Because, in truth, you are unafraid. To give
yourself permission to be known by God, to be realized by God, is in and of itself a way of
being consumed by love. And this consummation by the absolute is the greatest love you
will ever know. But to allow this is to become naked in all ways before the altar to let the
Divine express through you in perfection. And, if you have denied the form you have
taken and the functions of the body, or the pleasures of the flesh, you will deny those ways
of knowing God and keep them hidden.
“But what of vices?” he says. “Don’t we have these vices that must be attended to?”
Of course you do, and you think you must fix them as the small self does. But you have
never truly fixed them because they are not things that are broken. They are simply ways
of thinking of the self, and the ideas of them have the ramifications in the form you have
taken. An alignment to the True Self actually gives you the opportunity to lift these very
things to be re-known in a higher way, but they will not be re-known as you fight them.
That is the small self seeking its attempt to correct something that is best left upon the
altar for deliverance. To be delivered of anything is to be released from it, and from the
responsibility of it as well.
“What does that mean?” he asks. Very simply put, if it is your mandate to control
something—“You’d best feed the cat or the cat will not live”—please feed the cat. But if
your mandate is something that cannot be claimed by the small self—“I will release
myself from jealousy,” which cannot be done by the jealous self; “I will release myself
from this addiction,” which will not be done by the small self, who is the one addicted—
you will have the understanding of what it means to know the Divine as the one who can
deliver you.
“How does it happen? How are we delivered from the things we suffer from?”
This is a very good question, and, while there are many answers, and individuals may
have different ways of responding to their own needs, we will simply tell you that the idea
of surrender, which is in fact a simple offering, not one that must require you to grovel
before a god and say, “Take it,” but a simple offering: “Let it be of you. Let it be yours.
And, if I am to do something to support this act of deliverance, let it be known to me. Let
me know. Let me be in my knowing so that I may gift you with the entirety of my being.”
The entirety of your being. That includes your sexual self, or your addiction, or what
you know of as a vice. It includes your need to reprimand your fellows, to always be right,
or to never be right. It includes any ideas of who and what you are that operate at the
exclusion, or in the denial, of the presence of the Divine.
As you are challenged by your lives, as you seek deliverance from the world you see,
as you understand the requirements for your development in the days you live in, and in
the days you see passing by you, as you say yes to the opportunity to grow, you must also
agree that the opportunity for deliverance is present. As you say yes to the potential of the
Divine as you, the aspect of the Creator as you, in its realization to be the one who can see
you through to the higher room, when you seek to find yourself in the relics of history or
the debasement of self that you have been instructed in by your parents, your culture, or
your religion, everything is lifted to the Upper Room. Period. Period. Period.
DAY TWENTY

Each of you decides, when you come to an expression on this plane, that you will realize
yourself in accordance with your needs. But the needs of an individual soul will vary
somewhat. Each lifetime is an opportunity for progression, but progression doesn’t always
come in a singular way. The totality of experience in an incarnation is what is assessed
when you commence a new lifetime. “What do I need?” “How can I know myself?”
“What are the ways I may experience the glory of being?”
Now, your divinity is impressed in you at the inception of your soul. You cannot be
separate from God, so this impression stands with you, progresses with you through each
lifetime for the singular purpose of realization. In one lifetime, a level of realization may
be met and you may find yourself, in the next lifetime, learning through what you have
claimed in the last one. Imagine that at the end of a lifetime you find yourself moving to a
new town. The next lifetime becomes the experience of the town that was just moved to.
So many of you decide that your destination is realization, but, in fact, it is not a
destination. It is a way of being expressed and knowing, that continues to progress
onward. There can be no finite state of realization.
If you have taken form and chosen to learn this way, the opportunities will come to
you in form. When you release form and you understand yourself in the ethers, the lessons
come in the ethers. There is no moment of arrival that supersedes your prior experience,
because your prior experience is part of the journey, and the totality, therefore, of what you
are comprehending.
Now, once realization occurs, realization is present in any idea you may hold of the
past. And, because the past is just an idea, to realize the past is to realize the moment that
you stand in, and, consequently, the past is comprehended in the new level of alignment.
The idea that you should be someplace else, made some other choice, had a different
experience, becomes impossible, because, in the moment of realization, everything makes
sense—not logically, perhaps, but in its innate perfection. You can only be where you are.
You could have only chosen this experience to learn through, to realize the sense of self
that the soul was coming for, for the lessons learned.
When you experience trials in your life, you are claiming opportunity. The small self
may say, “No, no, no,” but the True Self says, “Yes,” for any opportunity to be realized.
And some of you choose realization through trauma, or through crisis, because you
understand that the small self cannot have the tools to remedy a situation and your reliance
upon the Divine becomes essential. When you understand that this is a journey, an
education, an opportunity, and that realization is a stage of it, and not the penultimate
moment of it, you will comprehend that being realized is simply another way of being.
To justify the old, to mandate that the old be present in the new, is to claim a
separation from the moment you stand in, and the moment you stand in is the only
moment when realization can occur. When we teach what you are not, we give you lists.
You are not your history, or your body. We go on and on with all that you are not for one
reason only. The temptation is always to attach the self to a way of understanding the self
in complicity with the old, and, in doing that, you forget the moment you stand in because
you are not attaching just to an idea of what you are—“I am a man,” “I am a woman”—
but you are attaching to the legacy that those names carry, what it means to be a man, what
it has meant to be a man, what a man should be, and what it will be if you become fulfilled
as a man. You may have that journey. It’s a valid journey. “I will understand, in this
lifetime, what it means to be a man.” But the idiosyncratic nature of language may mean
many things to many people, and your idea of manhood is, in fact, colored by your status
in the world, what you were taught to admire, or aspire to be, or eschew and never be.
The dominion of the True Self transcends form. It incorporates form, as we have
taught you thus far. It does not exclude it. But it transcends it. As you have designed the
path for you through these incantations of realization, as you have chosen this way as an
incarnation, as you have come to the point where realization of form and expression
becomes part and parcel of how you know yourself to be, you may come upon realization
as the authority who may claim the world from the perspective of the higher room. And
dominion here is one thing, and one thing only. Creation. To be in creation is to be the
manifestor, and the manifestation of the Divine Self will always be commensurate with the
vibration that she has claimed. If you are speaking the letter “V,” the letter “V” is what
you attune to. And, in “V,” the vibrational accord is such that the manifestation of
language will be the letter “V,” or the sound of “V,” in what you encounter. The note you
sing that is played by the harmonics of your being is what calls into expression, in like
accord, the manifest world.
Now, because everything exists in multiple sequence, in vibration, in a scale with
variations that may be comprehended, infinite variations that may be known, you have
infinite possibility to create. But, if you understand that the Divine Self, in its tone, in its
mandate for its own realization, cannot comply with the requirements of lower vibration,
because, in doing so, it lessens itself. It releases itself to the density of the old, and, in the
dense planes, the opportunities for manifestation, while still present, operate in low
accord. What you claim in the basement is at the level of the basement. What you claim in
the Upper Room holds that vibration.
Now, to be known as who and what you are is to be seen, and we will say this for Paul,
who does not wish to be seen. The claim “I Have Come” is actually a visible claim, and
we will explain this now. To become visible as the Divine Self really simply means that
your expression from the Upper Room has transcended the barriers or the equations of
limitation, so that you may be operative, while in body, as the True Self for the purpose of
manifestation. This is rather different from systems that may have been taught about
getting what you want in Spirit. This isn’t getting what you want, this is manifestation of
what you are in like vibration to all that exists in the Upper Room. And all that exists in
the Upper Room can be found in this plane in lower density. You may lift anything
through your encounter with it. But to lift something means to recognize it as worthy, to
know it, to realize it. And, if you are judging it or frightened of it or deciding what it
should look like, you have decided, based upon the formulas of old, what should be there.
Now, as you realize anyone or anything, the mandate of the Divine, not the small, the
Divine Self, is to know it in love and in recognition of its right to be. “But what of the
dark things?” Paul says. “I get an exterminator if the bugs come to the house. I hit the
wasp with a book if I don’t want to get stung. What are we to do?”
When you realize the Divine in anything—and this is crucial to understand—you are
comprehending it within the fabric of reality that is in fact operating in a higher dimension
or octave. The bug itself, the idea of the bug, carries the history of bugs that you are
frightened of. By realizing the bug, by realizing anything as of God, you have translated
the legacy of the thing to claim it in its true inheritance. Now, does the bug go away? That
is not the issue here. It’s realizing what is, and has always been, in existence in a high
octave. The radiance you have as a self is far more encompassing than you can imagine,
and a single being, in realization of the globe in its inherent perfection, lifts the globe and
all that dwell upon it to the high octave. You don’t decide that the bugs have to stay in the
cellar, or that the man that you dislike will go into a locked room while the rest of
humanity lifts, and that’s what you do when you damn another or damn anything.
Everything is lifted, everything is known, and then realized as of its Source. This is
articulation, the spoken word made manifest through the announcement of being. “I Have
Come.”
Now, the radiance of this, as a claim, is, in fact, infinite because God itself is infinite,
and you are not speaking as God as much as you are aligning to God and allowing it to
express in its perfect way. The juncture you stand at through these instructions is you have
been claimed in embodiment, but you don’t know what it means, once embodied, to be.
And what you are, at this level, is a manifestation of the Christed Self, not the
manifestation, but a manifestation. The claim “I am the Word,” the Divine as you, is
known in multiple ways, in infinite ways. You are not transgressing on religion, you are
not claiming to be somebody you are not. The alignment you hold is what is expressed and
what is naming itself in its encounter with the manifest world. Underline encounter. As the
vibratory being you are—the oracle who knows who and what she is, the expression of
God as a bone, as a lung, as a hand, as an auric field, as one part of the vast mystery that is
God—is expressed, its infinite nature moves toward what it sees, envelops and lifts, and
the manifestation of this, the Kingdom, can be known in articulation or co-resonance with
the Divine Self, who speaks it into being. To articulate is to speak.
Now he asks, “How is this done?” It is done in tone in the field you hold. And the
speaking of the words “I Have Come” is the announcement of the Divine that incorporates
itself in the remembrance of the Divine that is present in all things. God as the rock, as the
tree, as the lung, as the hand, God as the sunset, God as the snowstorm, God as birth, God
as death, God in surrender, God in struggle. There is nothing outside of it, and no
experience is excluded from it because it is all part of the tapestry of the divinity that is
expressed in this plane. You see yourselves in a mire of suffering, in your confusion, in
your warring, but even these things are of God, just examples of the behavior of those who
have forgotten who they are. “But are they of God?” Yes, of course. And the knowing of
them reclaims them in the higher octave where their expression can be re-known. Their
expression, how they serve, how they impart their frequency, may be re-known, not
through correction, but through realization. Realization is not correction. Realization, the
new, the present new, the profound new, the divinatory new, the new that is comprehended
by the totality of being, is what is realized. “Behold, I make all things new.” Not the nice
things, not the awful things. All things. No exclusions.
Now the manifestation of the Christ as humanity is misunderstood. You don’t wear
sandals and a robe, you show up at your job if you have a job to go to, you bathe the child
when needed, you care for the body as you can. But the opportunity for realization is not
the province of the holy man, once you understand that all men are holy. This is not just an
ordinary act. It must be an ordinary act for fruition to occur. You don’t think about
breathing, in most cases. You don’t make your heart beat. You trust your heart to beat, you
trust yourself to breathe. Imagine what it would be like if what you knew around you was
simply God in manifestation because what else could it possibly be? And that is where we
take you in this teaching. There is no effort in being. You don’t strive to be. You cannot
strive to be. You are. And you are already the articulation of the Divine in whatever form
you have taken, and the purview of the Divine, as we have taught you, is everything she
sees or imagines. Whatever you see, you are in relation to. Whatever you assume in your
mind is present for you in a mental process that is the beginning of manifestation. So, as
you are already the Creator, and of the Creator, the realization of it from the Upper Room
claims the opportunity for the dominion of the Divine Self on this plane in its encounter
with the reality in the name “I Have Come.”
Now, dominion is not rule. It is not exercising control. In this case, it is
comprehension. The one who knows who she is does not seek validation for it. The one
who knows she has a right to sit in a chair doesn’t beg permission. The one who knows
dominion is simply being, and that the consciousness held is always in relation to what is
seen, does not question manifestation. Because she perceives it, she is in accord to it. The
same is true in this moment for all of you. As you lift in dominion, as the claim is made, “I
Have Come,” the waves of vibration moving through you, of and through, are claiming
what it experiences in like accord. And the lifting begins.
Now, the lifting is inherent, indwelling, the realization of what is that may have been
cauterized, suppressed, withheld, abandoned. The Divine in the blade of grass, the
ordinary blade of grass; the Divine in the ruined castle; the Divine in the ruined life, the
one you perceive as abandoned and lost. God is in all. And your realization of God in all
claims what is all in a reckoning. And a reckoning, again, a facing of oneself and all of
one’s creations, is a blessed opportunity to transform. You don’t fix. You reveal. You
reveal the Divine that is inherent, and the lifting of the thing that is seen may commence,
and the ramifications of that lifting may not be what you think, or come in order or in
ease. When you lift a fifty-pound block, you expect strength is required. When you lift a
pebble, you expect ease. In some cases, the fifty-pound block will be the graceful
movement, and the lifting of the pebble, that one damn thing that you cannot find God in,
will be arduous, but only arduous to a small self, who imagines what it should be. The
Divine as you realizes the equality in the pebble and the huge block because they are both
made of the same thing. Everything you see, know it or not, is a vast field of frequency
that is moving and alive in a resonant field, and, as the lifting of the vibration that you
have taken is announced in fullness, “I Have Come,” the mandate of being of this
expression is the realization that all form, all form, all form, finally, is malleable to
consciousness because all form is is another idea. Do you understand this? What if form
itself, manifestation itself, was just another idea that has been agreed to?
Some of you have experiences in the higher planes of the fluidity or lack of time. One
moment you are in a bed, one moment you are flying across the sky. You don’t question
that reality. You know that reality and its properties in different ways because it is a
different rule, or law, that has governed it. As you align to the Divine, and you begin to
understand that everything is an idea in manifestation, and, consequently, everything can
be re-known as a new idea, you can understand that what you are being claimed in, in the
Upper Room, is, in fact, the authority to transform the legacy of humanity from
separation, self-imposed isolation from its Source, into union.
We will complete this chapter now. The title was “Deliverance.” We will continue
when we are ready. Period. Period. Period.
 8

RE-ARTICULATION
DAY TWENTY (CONTINUED)

Trouble comes when you seek to figure this out to support the small self’s need in
dictating what should be. When we hear Paul speaking—“What does this mean? How
does it happen? What is its effect?”—we also hear him say: “This cannot be so. It will not
be so. How can I believe this? What is the authenticating experience for this new teaching
that you say has manifestation in the empirical world?”
The Divine as what you are, the manifestation of it, has been the teaching for some
time. And understanding that the teaching of manifestation begins with you and form itself
is the second step toward realization of the purview of the Divine Self in action, “I am
Word.” You may understand that the names you have been given, in small ways, in fact
circumvent the potential you have always held. This means very simply that what you
think you are, based on how you have been trained in limitation, coerces you, know it or
not, to enable systems of control that would operate to limit you from your true divine
nature. True divine nature. Listen to that phrase. True divine nature. Always true, of God,
expression. That is what it means. Always true. Divine expression. You cannot make it
other because it is always true. And, because it’s always true, it may be known as such. “I
know who I am in truth”—realization. “What I am”—manifestation. “How I serve”—
expression in dominion as the aspect of self that has incarnated as you, which we call the
Divine Self, Eternal Self, True Self, Christed Self. It matters not. You still walk around
and introduce yourself as Hank or Sally. That’s how you know yourself in agreement to
be. But who has come as Hank or Sally is the Divine, and it is she who announces herself,
he who claims, “I Have Come.”
When “I Have Come” is claimed, the manifestation of the Divine essentially claims all
it encounters in its true nature. Now, the small self cannot claim “I Have Come.” He may
try to and the effect will simply be, “Hi, I’m Hank, I have come.” And somebody else will
say, “For what?” There is no manifestation at that level. But in the Upper Room, the
Divine as Hank, who has come as Hank, announces his presence from the Upper Room,
not the cellar, not the street. Now, the Divine Self on the street is still in the Upper Room.
The Divine in the Upper Room encompasses the street and the office and anywhere else
you may think you are, or experience yourself as being, in this manifest world that you
agree to operate through. But to be in the Upper Room is to hold the vibratory equivalent
of all you encounter, and the claim “I Have Come,” the manifestation of the Divine as
what, is how you serve.
To understand service more fully is to understand that the Divine as what, in its own
tone or expression, is what is transforming the world. And, as you are taught in the Upper
Room to comprehend a world in a higher way, the instruction that is essential to your
being must be known to you. As we have already taught you knowing, and claiming
yourself as the one who may know, we will not reiterate it now. But, in the Upper Room,
as you know, you may be called in an encounter with the world that would deny the
Divine. “What happens then?” You have become visible, in a way, by nature of
manifestation, and the manifestation that is claiming the world in a high accord may, in
fact, meet resistance by the level of frequency that does not wish to be assumed.
 “What does this mean?” he asks. Imagine you have a fish that only knows itself in one
body of water. It cannot believe it will survive if it is moved to another body of water. It
will do what it can to maintain itself. It will run from the net, bite what it can, find refuge
under a rock, than withstand the potential for demise that it believes it may experience if
transplanted, or, as we say, transposed, re-articulated, re-known in a higher vibration.
When this occurs, the opportunity to realize the Divine in the face of fear, in the face of
struggle, becomes service in a very different way. This has never been a teaching of
coercion, nor will we allow it to be that. We will not allow it because we honor free will.
To lift another to the Upper Room, to lift an aspect of self that has been in denial of God,
would refute God, would say no to the potential for change. To understand that these
denials are all fear-based, while an act of will, can still be met by the Divine who
comprehends all things in union. Understand, again, the fish that may be transposed or
moved to a clearer pond, a higher pond, a more sustainable pond for the very fish that has
known itself in the depths of the dirty water, but cannot imagine that there is another place
to live. The vibration you hold is not overriding the will of the fish. It is not doing that. It
is not reclaiming the fish beyond its will. It is knowing the fish, realizing the fish, in the
high tank, the new pond, the clear ocean that is the Upper Room. You are only knowing,
or realizing. You are not fixing, you are not counseling, you are not dragging, you are not
coercing the fish. You are knowing the fish, regardless of the resistance, because you
understand yourself beyond fear. You are not claiming the other in agreement to what she
believes.
“How is this not coercion?” he asks. “We are still lifting the fish that wants to stay in
the dirty water.” You are realizing the fish, the Divine as fish, in the Upper Room. You are
not moving it in practical ways. Realization is a transposing of a piece of music from one
octave to the next. It’s a re-telling, or re-naming, or reclamation from one level or octave
of vibration to another. Because you don’t need permission to witness God in anything, or
God as anyone, because you are simply claiming truth, what is always true at this level,
the lifting is not done through effort, but by nature of your being. You can’t try to be the
Divine, lifting the fish to a clean ocean. You can only be the Divine who realizes the ocean
and the fish in a higher octave where they may establish themselves in a new way.
Now, dominion actually is not fixing. It is not correcting. And, if you wish to do those
things, you may choose to. You may fix the roof of your house. You may choose a new
address that will better serve your purposes. The Divine as you is present in choice, as you
align to the Divine as will. And the Divine as will is something you become reliant upon
through the alignment in the Upper Room, because that is how you choose. To decide that
the manifestation of the Divine is all things is to realize the entirety of being as one Source
in multifarious levels of expression, one great concert played in many octaves, known in
the manifestation that you perceive. But always understand, it is the level of alignment,
vibratory accord that you express in, that aligns you to a world that may be perceived and
re-known. Yes, the Upper Room.
Now, to understand fear as a creation and an idea is helpful. All fear is based in a
premise that God is not present in that moment, and therefore fear is always a lie. “What
about fear for your life?” he says. “I wake up in a burning building. I am afraid. I want to
live.” The fear that you are expressing here is somewhat different than we are teaching
you. You are having a reaction in the body toward self-preservation. You call it fear, but
that is adrenaline, and not much more, propelling you out the door to safety. To realize
your demise in a burning building, and to be afraid of what comes after, is rather different.
“Oh, my dear, I am going to die. What will happen to me, to my loved ones? All this
money I put into this house, and now we’re all on fire.” That is the realization of the
temporary nature of the physical plane that is always in transformation, and the fear of not
being able to control the outcome of a situation. That is somewhat different than releasing
the body, because that has no fear. Releasing the body, when that occurs, is a gift, and
usually a graceful one, depending on your level of attachment to the form that you have
taken.
To decide who you should be in any circumstance—“I should be noble and
courageous,” “I should be afraid”—is usually to prescribe to the history a situation has
been given. In other words, you are taught when to fear by your upbringing, by your
culture, by the systems of agreement that you have been in alignment to. In the Upper
Room, you are not operative through these systems, although you may call them into
being and lift them to the Upper Room in order to be re-known. In service, we suggest,
every encounter to the resistance of the Divine becomes the opportunity for the Divine to
be excavated and re-pronounced in form.
“What does that mean?” he says. The one who is angriest at God loves God the most.
Did you know this? The one who is most angry at God holds the deepest love, and a sense
of betrayal has encompassed him or her and protected her from her own longing. To
realize God in the one who hates God is to know God in manifestation, and the knowing
of God as the one fearful of God, angry at God, debasing God, to know the Divine as that
one, is actually to offer liberation. By lifting her to the Upper Room, you are not telling
him or her what to believe. You are simply realizing them in the union that is always
present. When you see a battlefield and men warring, killing one another in a cause
justified by them, or believing that what they are doing is right, the opportunity to know
God, to claim the self on the battlefield, the Divine Self—“I Have Come, I Have Come, I
Have Come”—is to realize God in the manifestation before you and lift it to the Upper
Room. Any poverty, any act of avarice, is an act of fear. Any act of judgment against
another is an act of fear. If you want to play on those things and perpetuate them, stay
downstairs, have those experiences. Or go to the Upper Room and claim the presence of
the Divine upon them. “I Have Come, I Have Come. I Have Come.”
He is interrupting. “How is this different than the initial claim ‘I am Word through the
thing I see before me,’ or ‘the one I see before me’?” You have become Word in
manifestation. Do you understand this? You have become the manifestation. Be and come.
“I Have Come.” And the claim you make upon the world you see is the expression in
service in vibratory field. You are not telling people not to war. Nobody has ever listened
to that, if you think back to it. But to know the Divine in presence upon the battlefield is to
claim all you see beyond fear, or any justification that fear would present itself as. Any
banner of false lies playing out on the battlefield that would justify the killing of a man for
a false cause must be re-known by the Divine, and, in the knowing of it, men do put down
their arms.
“Is this a metaphor?” he says. “I can’t imagine that happening.” Then you don’t trust
God to indwell in man. The realization of the indwelling God as the man with the gun
claims the man beyond the violence he may have been trained in, and corrects the self-
justification, not through an action you would take, but because the need to act in that
false way does not exist in the field of truth that you are operating in. Like attracts like. If
you were to go down to the battlefield with a pamphlet, expect to be shot and probably
with good reason. To lift yourself to the high room and then lift the battlefield and all who
dwell upon it to realization is to claim the Kingdom in the face of fear, and it’s an
opportunity to know, not only who you are, but the power of the Divine.
“But,” he interrupts, “what if this war needs to happen? You say we don’t correct
things. And here you go telling us to correct things.” You are not correcting anything as
much as realizing it. The realization of the Divine may or may not re-create it in what you
would think as a correction, but that is not what you are doing. By claiming the presence,
by knowing the purview, by claiming the action, it is the Divine that must manifest and
call forth the new thing. You cannot decide who will live or who will die, what should or
should not happen. That is not your purview. But your purview is to know who you are,
what you are, how you serve, know who you are as you express it, and allow God or the
Divine to act in its own way. Your claim “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come” does
not make you the hero. It makes you the true witness, the true witness to any act, and by
true we mean the one who knows God, realizes God or the Divine, in any act, in any
human, in any situation you may encounter.
Don’t think for a moment that you can use this to get your way. “Look at that
battlefield. I want these ones to succeed and those to fail.” Get ready for a bad lesson in
knowing what you are. That is what would come. Any act that you would take to coerce
another, or utilize these vibrations to get your way as a small self, will be refuted
immediately. And you will learn the lesson from that, and, hopefully, move beyond the
need to decide what should be, and claim, instead, what can only be, which is the Divine
that is inherent in anything and everything, regardless of what the small self thinks of it.
Now, as we close this lecture, we will say, yes, this is in the text. It is the beginning of
a new section or chapter. We will title it when we are ready, and we are completing this
text, we expect, by the end of this summer.
(PAUSE)

Now, when we ask you questions about what you think you are, you look to the known to
answer them. You look for the mirror to validate your experience. You seek to find what
you expect to find and confirm it. You do this unknowingly, but the catalog that you cull
through to find your answers is the catalog of the known, and the new idea, the principle
of the idea that the Divine as you operates in a higher tone, claims a different reality into
being, exists in a new way that the small self can’t comprehend. You will find yourself
challenged by this, as you claim the old and seek to claim the new.
In order for us to work with you in the high octave, we must release you from an
identity that demands to be known through the qualifications or systems of agreement that
you have utilized to navigate this experience you know of as your world. But your world
exists in other realities that are contained within them, and known in them, by the one who
can realize. When we explain it this way, we are trying to get you to understand that the
reality you experience yourself in is one level of resonance, and, within this world, there
are many ways to see and to know, and what is comprehended in the higher alignment
does not have a name as you have named it through the criteria of experience.
So how do you negotiate living in a manifest world that has been named by others, and
claiming a new world into being in the Upper Room? How do you participate in a daily
action, going to work, seeing your friends, learning something new? How can you attend
to these things from the higher octave and realize them while you operate effectively in
the agreements made in human nature?
It’s quite easy, you see, theoretically, to tell you the Divine has come as you. It is the
Divine who goes to work, has the experience with the friend. But it is quite another thing
to experience it. And to realize it means to experience it, and that is the vibratory octave
we intend to bring you to now in shared agreement of a new manifest world. In order for
this to be claimed, you must make one choice, and only one choice—that anything you
can see or imagine that has been claimed prior to knowing was claimed as an idea, a
simple idea that may be re-conceived. The idea of the spinster is claimed by the spinster,
the one who knows herself as such a thing, or by the one who would decide for her. “That
poor woman who never wed, that spinster down the hall.” The idea of spinster has
ramifications in the practical experience of the woman and the neighbor, and the
realization of who she is in agreement to the True Self is what reclaims her beyond the
known. Even the idea of gender, the woman down the hall, or place, down the hall, is
agreement to an idea, born in situation and remembrance. The agreement we make to the
new, in comprehension of your being, is that what you see is in fact malleable to vibration,
and that the claim “I Have Come” is actually a claim that will demonstrate itself in a re-
articulation of matter.
Paul is challenged already. We will continue regardless.
To name anything is to give it a way of expression, a mandate in some ways.
Everything seen that you can name has been called into being, and the name is the co-
resonance with the thing that you operate in. When a mandate is made by a collective
—“We will call this thing, agree to call this thing, by this or that name”—the manifest
thing coheres with the name and its properties. And the manifest thing has been made in
form, concretized in consciousness, and aligns to the level of density that it is called to.
When you claim a new thing into being, or remember a thing as its Source, a vibratory
object known in one way, perhaps named one thing, that can be re-named, you give
yourself opportunity to engage in the alchemical act that we are speaking to. If all things
are God, all things may be re-known as God, or as the Source you know of as God.
If you can imagine an ocean, all that abides within the ocean knows itself in union
with the sea it expresses in. God is no different. It is the sea you express in, and everything
that exists within the sea is of the sea, and may be re-made, returned to the sea, and
reclaimed as such to be re-made in other form. You understand that energy is never
destroyed. You must understand that the selves that you think you are are also eternal, and
the body itself is a form Spirit has taken in realization through the act of creation. Now,
you are made, you are born in form, but the body itself is in union with the sea it comes
from, and, at that level of expression, it may know all things as of the sea, as of God.
If you would like, in your mind, imagine for a moment that you exist in a vastness
where everything that has been named is simply energy in vibration, a tone expressing, a
sound or a known way of thinking of sound. Everything before you is in resonance, and
you are in union with it by nature of being. You are not separate from the room. You are in
the room. You are not separate from that which is in the room. You are in a shared
landscape.
Now, imagine, if you wish, that the landscape itself is what you know of as God, the
room as God, the chair as God, the window as God. And, as you claim these things, allow
yourself to release any ideas of what these things are beyond the idea that you are in union
with them in Source, that you are in one vibration, in oscillation or tone, in experience in
union. You may feel this as the field you hold begins to go into agreement with the
landscape you are claiming. Now, you may open your eyes and do the same exercise with
what you see before you. Your idea of who and what you are, your idea of the room you
sit in, your agreement in separation—all ideas that can be surrendered to a new claim. And
the claim “I Have Come” is the claim in union that the Divine brings through to reclaim
the manifestation in oneness with Source.
So do this now, if you wish. Allow the body that you hold, the idea of the body, the
idea of where you sit, the idea of the room, the idea of the building, wherever you may be,
another idea that has taken form, allow the ideas to become one idea. “I am in union with
my accord in my new name, I Have Come.” And, as you express, feel the field that you
have taken begin to move, and move into agreement with the field or expression that
everything else has taken. You are moving into oneness, in union with an expressed
landscape that is being transformed by your agreement to it. Not the small self’s
agreement. The small self is just another idea. And, as that idea is dissipated, is
surrendered, as it moves in its own union, everything may be known as the divine
expression.
The claim you will make now, if you choose it, is the claim of agreement to be
remembered in this expansive knowing. And the claim you make, in permission for this to
be granted, is assured at the level of the soul, who knows how far you may move in
realization. So what you receive will be to the degree that you can be operative in the daily
life you express in as the manifest Word.

“On this day I choose to allow remembrance of the entirety of my being, that any
idea I may have held of who and what I am, any idea I may have known of what
other things were, by old vibrational accord, may be reclaimed, re-known, and
remembered in union with the Source of all things. I know who I am in truth. I
know what I am in truth. I know how I serve in truth. I Have Come. I Have Come. I
 Have Come.”

Be as you are.
(Short pause)
You are in union. You are in oneness. You are in accord. You are in love. You are in
knowing. You are free. You are free. You are free.
Be in this place as long as you wish to stay here. It is always here. It has always been
here. It is what is, beyond the known. Period. Period. Period.
DAY TWENTY-ONE

Each of you decides when you arrive here that this is the opportunity to claim an identity,
to learn through matter, to learn in relation to your fellows. Each of you says yes to an
opportunity to create a life and challenges, which are, in fact, opportunities with which
you learn through. Each of you decides that you can agree to a livelihood or a way of
being in a material realm that supports you. And each of you says yes to what you may
know, what you may comprehend beyond the known.
As you idealize a small self, as you say, “This is who I am, this is what matters, this is
what I came for, this is what you should think of me,” you claim your experience, not only
in agreement to your fellows, but what they may make of you. You are all in consort, in
one way or another, to an agreement to witness a collective landscape. And it’s the
collective landscape, when lifted, that we announce as the Kingdom.
Now, the individual is participatory to the landscape. Everything she sees she confirms
in the language she has been taught. “That is a tree, that is a man, that is a wedding, that is
a birth. I comprehend these things and the meanings of them through the tribal language,
or agreement, that I have come to know myself through.” But what if, in fact, the tribal
language was simply a way of meaning, and claiming meaning, to comprehend a world
that otherwise makes little sense and has no value? Imagine, again, that you are looking
around the room you are in. Nothing has a name. You wouldn’t know what a fork was,
what a tree was, what you were sitting upon. You would just be being, in coherence, with
a landscape that is in some ways unnamed, without value, and without necessity. And by
necessity we mean you don’t understand why you need this or that. It simply is.
Now, because you are here in this shared field that has been named, you are
accountable to the names that things have been given. And the meaning of those things
over time, which have been established in a shared construct, is the way you understand
the languaging of meaning in consort with your fellows. “We will call this this or that.”
The temptation always, in any case, is to decide what things are based on what you have
been taught, and lose the relevance and opportunity that is actually available to you in a
new landscape that is unnamed.
We have said prior, when something new appears, ask it what it is. Ask it for its name.
Don’t go busying yourself looking for the template to fit that thing in that confirms an
idea. If you wish to know the new, to comprehend the new, you will not when you seek to
reinforce the old upon what you see. Imagine that anything that can be seen can be
revealed, unmasked—unnamed, in fact—to a true meaning. Again, this does not mean that
a fork is not a fork. In this dimension or octave, you comprehend these things and their
uses. But to move beyond the known is to move to the landscape of resurrection, and all
things may be resurrected or realized in the high octave in a perfect way.
“What does that mean,” he asks, “a perfect way?” It very simply means that the idea of
what the Divine is, in all cases, precludes your witnessing of the Divine. The idea of the
fork claims the fork in the same kind of way. And the alignment you hold to anything in
manifestation that has been named has been coded, made so, and, in doing so, the density
of vibration it adheres to claims you in like vibrational accord. Everything may be lifted.
Everything may be re-known. But it must be unnamed, reclaimed, re-comprehended, and
this is only done in the Upper Room.
In the lower landscape, or shared construct of reality, the manifestation of form in its
density serves to confirm a reality that is actually transient. Even your understanding of
time and the meaning of time is in some ways deciding for you what your experience is. If
you didn’t know what a minute was, if there wasn’t a collective idea of an hour or a day,
what would experience be? Now, to lift beyond these things in all ways simply means
your experience of them is translated, and the manifestation is translated as well. And by
translated we mean it exists, but in a new way. We are giving Paul an idea, because he is
asking the question. “A word in French and a word in English are the same word, but in
translation. Is this the same idea?” Yes and no. But release the idea of idea and the
manifestation can confirm itself. What you do not do is lift the idea to the Upper Room.
To do so would claim the heritage of the thing you lift. It’s far easier, in fact, to claim the
Upper Room, the eternal now, and then realize time, than to try to understand time,
because to understand time is a mental process that will bring you back down to a level of
logic, and, in fact, participation with the old structure of what time was meant to
understand itself as. To realize anything is to know it. And, to know the fork, or the
timepiece, or the idea of time itself by saying time and moving into comprehension with it,
aligns you to what is possible in a new language, or a new way of being.
“Well, how do we understand this? If there is no name for time in the Upper Room,
what, in fact, are we claiming?” You are claiming the infinite moment where anything
may be realized and, in fact, reclaimed in a new idea, a new possibility beyond the known
and the limitation of ways of responding to a physical realm through heredity. Now, for
those of you who say, “This cannot be done,” we must tell you it is being done every day,
but you don’t see it. Your comprehension of your reality is a testimony to this teaching.
Everything you witness, you are in comprehension to and alignment with, and it’s justified
through the shared landscape and vocabulary. Simply to lift to the Upper Room and claim
manifestation lifts the vibration of everything seen to an agreement, or accord—a-c-c-o-r-
d, or a-c-h-o-r-d as on a piano—that lifts you and the thing seen into agreement or
alignment. And the new way of seeing simply means you are not encoding what is visible
through the intentions of historical data. You are not deciding what things were. You are
experiencing them in the moment you stand in, in their new way. Again, “Behold, I make
all things new.”
Now, this is less an exercise in forgetting the past than realizing the present. And to
wake up from a dream of dense vibration and to find yourself in a new landscape is rather
what we are saying happens when you move to this level of assumption. You have been
assumed in a higher octave, and, consequently, your experience of manifestation must
come with a level of consciousness you have aligned to. It is not about denying what was,
it’s about experiencing what is, and the experiencer, in this case, the True Self as you, is
not reliant upon the old as the small self has been. Your idea of ascension, in some ways,
is rather limited. You think you take yourself as you think you are to the Upper Room,
when, in fact, who goes to the Upper Room is who you have always been and can only be
in a higher vibrational state. This does not erase you. It does not take away your memory.
It creates the plasticity of experience that lifts you beyond the re-creation of historical
data, which is the requirement of claiming the manifestation that we call the Kingdom, the
Kingdom again being the awareness of the Divine in all manifestation.
This is somewhat different than walking down a pretty parkway and saying, “Look at
the pretty trees. Look at the pretty flowers. I see the Divine here. All is good in my
world.” The understanding that realization of matter, the realization of the Divine as
matter, is actually a claim of alchemy that lifts the vibration of what is seen to a new
alignment is the true meaning of the claim of the Kingdom. And the manifestation of God
that is already here is revealed in its blooming. To deny the Divine is to deny the
Kingdom. To debase the self is to deny the self its access to the Kingdom. To deny
another’s presence as of God is to deny both of you the entry that you say you seek. So to
articulate what you are in a high way simply means you are no longer claiming the old,
justifying the old, seeking to have it mean what it meant, and claiming others in the low
accord that has become this shared landscape. Understand, we said become. The density of
this plane is your own making. The alignment you have held to the action of fear is the
one thing, we would suggest, that perpetuates this, because everything we named, every
avarice, every way of deciding who’s worthy and who is not, can only be made in fear
because, as you now understand, the divine presence is in all, not just the things you
approve of, or would like to see, or would like to claim agreement to.
If you would imagine, for a moment, that there is something before you, or perhaps
someone, that you would claim as a monster, and decide for a moment that your
articulation of the word monster is what makes it so, and your ideas of what makes a
monster are agreed to through cultural choice and history, you will see that, in fact, you
are the monster maker. And, to reveal the monster as the holy being he or she may be, that
it may be, is to release the names it has been called to the claim of truth that is always
present and always known by the Divine Self: “I Have Come. I Have Come. I Have
Come.” In this claim, you reveal the truth and claim the witness. And the unveiling of the
truth of the monster, what has been degraded or allowed itself to be, in its release in
separation is reclaimed and re-known and then lifted to the upper template, or Upper
Room, where it may be known in fulfillment.
“What does this mean,” he says, “template?” The idea of a template or a mold is not an
untrue idea, and the Divine Self, if you wish, can be understood that way, the truth of who
anybody is that exists beyond form or personality or history or idealization. The idea of
the being in a perfected state, in a blueprint, if you wish, that it may claim its accordance
with, is not an untrue teaching. To lift anything to the Upper Room is to reclaim it at its
essence, and by essence we mean the thing that is, of itself, and cannot be any other way.
Once that is understood, anything that hinders its expression or blocks its expression can
be reclaimed, re-known, as the alignment progresses. The teaching of claiming the
Kingdom, which we have given you, is not about artifice, but realization, which is factual.
You are not conjuring. You are knowing truth. But to know the truth of anything is to
agree to it, and that means you cannot confirm the lies it has taken on.
“What is an example of that?” he asks.
 “I am an infirm woman.” “I have loved no one.” “I am unworthy of love.” “No one
can be in this claim I make for myself.” The delusion here is that one cannot be loved, or
is unworthy of love, and the realization of love within the one who has denied that love
claims her in truth, and the truth is she is deeply loved, as are all. Your ability to do this as
the True Self has enormous ramifications on the individual’s life and on the landscape that
individual expresses through, if you can understand that the echo that we teach in, the
broadcast of vibration as announced in the claim “I Have Come,” has manifestation
throughout the world and throughout time itself.
“Now why time?” he says. “I thought time didn’t exist.” The construct of time does
exist because you agree to it. But because the Divine in its moment of expression is
eternal, the ramifications themselves are eternal. When a landscape is transformed, it is
made new. It is not painted over for the moment. And the realization of the new at the cost
of the old is the manifestation of the Divine where the denial of the Divine—or the lie—
has been played out. By this we mean that the dominion you hold, as the one who has
come, is to reclaim the landscape in the high template of the divine purpose that it was
intended for.
Now he’s very upset. “Intended for what? What is this teaching?” You understand the
legend of Eden, and the idea of the garden and the presence of the Divine and the
expulsion from it, which was, in fact, the denial of the Divine through the manifestation of
fear. Once you understand that fear is the lie, and the landscape informed in fear is what is
being transformed and transmuted, the idealization—the true meaning—of Eden is
understood.
So he asks questions, one upon the next. “Is there no poverty in Eden? Are we all
healthy? This is feeling preposterous.” Very simply put, the idea of union in an
experiential way, the realization of matter and each individual as of the same Source, is
what is transformed and made created anew. You are not denying what exists, you are
reclaiming what is, in the high octave. Now, the metaphor of Eden, simply put, is the
metaphor for landscape operating in presence without the denial of the Divine. When you
understand that the reclamation of the True Self has its own mandate for a landscape to
operate in, you begin to comprehend the meaning of this. We are not teaching you that the
world you live in will be what you want it to be in your small self’s idealization of Eden,
but what the True Self knows. And those are very different things. The idea of the Divine
Self in manifestation is the teaching of the Christ. It always has been. The teaching of the
Kingdom is the manifestation of the Christ in landscape, in manifestation. The realization
of union is the source of all love. And the claim of love that you may benefit the world in,
“I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” is the reconciliation of the Divine in form in
a manifest world—reconciliation, reuniting, reunion with what is, in expression, in the
high octave.
DAY TWENTY-TWO

Each of you comes with an awareness of what your requirements are for the life you live,
and, as you decide the manifestation of the Divine has come as who and what you are, the
realization of the goals that you had previously named begin to be reframed in the context
of the higher ideal. Each of you chooses, prior to birth, a set of circumstances that you
may indeed learn through, and you claim them in sequence over the course of a life. The
Divine Self as you, who has come to be realized, has come to reclaim you, and in many
cases at the cost of what you thought you must be, or how you should be seen or realized
through the small self’s ideas.
Now, we use the word idea intentionally here, because the idea of who you are is what
is being reclaimed in a very different way than you may have assumed as a small self. The
Divine as what, the manifestation of the Divine that has come in form as you, will express
itself in an octave that surpasses the claims of old. When you understand this, that you are
surpassing the old, moving beyond the old to a new idea that is now claimed in
manifestation, you can begin to realize the magnitude of the transformation that you will
indeed undergo as you lift yourself to the Upper Room and establish the frequency there
as the body you hold, and the emanation of the body in the vibratory field.
“Why body?” he says. Because, without the body, the manifestation of the Divine is
incomplete. As we have said, everything is in form and in vibration or tone. And, in
reality, the mass that you see, the bulk of flesh, the physical reality, is all one thing—God
in expression in different ways announcing itself, articulated in tone. Articulation—
underline that word, please. You are an articulation of the Divine. The manifest form that
you have taken is an expression of it, and to denounce the form that you have taken—“I
am only a small man, I walk around in a frail body, I see other things that are small”—is to
claim God as frail and small. Again, those are ideas, and what you think you are or have
been, in re-articulation, is the claim we make in the manifest self through the name “I
Have Come.”
Now, any announcement of being claims ramification. “I am a man” gives you the
manifestation and the requirements of the name you have chosen. Any profession, any
idea—“I am the one who never gets it right, who will always be seen in such and such a
way,” an announcement of self, a frame, if you wish—calls to it the ramifications of that
name or choice. Now, as the Divine Self, the ramifications are very different, and the
articulation of the Divine Self in the name “I Have Come” is in some ways a renunciation
of what has been taught in form, and the science you’ve known up until now would claim
you as a thing in an obsolete way. The idea that the Divine informs all things invites you
to lift to an experience of realization beyond the known that can then be assumed, and, in
assumption, in complete awareness of your union with Source, you begin to decide that
anything that you thought you were becomes an idea that is now re-known.
To be re-known in God, or what you might call God, is to be re-articulated, and the
Word made flesh, as we would teach it, is an idea or a way of measuring what
manifestation is at a level or octave that cannot be claimed by one who has not aligned to
the truth of their being. When we say truth, we mean truth. Not a convenient truth: “I
don’t like the day, it’s a terrible day,” your convenient opinion about the day. We mean an
eternal truth, the Divine that has come in its expression, the ever true, the Divine as what,
the crystalline expression of God in vibration.
Now, as you are assumed in the Upper Room, the requirement of being, what you
thought you were must be re-understood because you still have lives here. “I have a job, I
have a child. I cannot leave my job or my child.” You are not invited to leave. You are
invited to re-know, because, as you have been articulated, “I am the Word,” or the Divine
Self in manifestation, you claim everything that you experience in that comparable octave.
We say comparable intentionally because the alignment you may hold will not always
infer that something will be claimed in equal resonance, but within the octave of
expression that you have aligned to.
If you understand that this plane of expression is an octave, with variant notes, highs
and lows, and the extremities of expression are still existing within a template of
agreement—“We all know what the planet is, what a sky is, what a continent is, perhaps,
we all agree to a rain or a thunder or a sunny day”—the idea within the octave must be
comprehended as a manifestation of collective agreement. Collective agreement means
you agree to a sky or a continent or an ocean or a concept—for example, time, because he
just interrupted with a question, “Like time?” Yes, of course, like time.
Now, agreement in consort with your fellows aligns the collective field in a shared
experience, and the shared experience of manifestation is what must be comprehended by
you each as you ascend, or lift, in an activation to a higher agreement, another octave, if
you wish, which we would call the Upper Room. Now, the singularity of an octave does
not necessarily deny the octave below, or the octave beyond. You are all in sequence, in
variance in tone, even within this shared plane of expression you live in. And, as you have
realized the idea of who you are—“I am a man,” “I am a woman,” “This is what I do for a
living”—you activate within the realm of self-justification, what things should be because
you expect them to be, which is the justification of expectation that the small self would
claim. As you lift, as you move beyond the known to the high expression, you align to the
articulation of what exists at that level of vibration. And the consequence of this is you are
not denying what exists in low form, the low octave, low vibration, but you are re-seeing it
from the perspective of the Upper Room, which is re-articulation, which we will say is the
name of the chapter we are working on now.
To be re-articulated, re-announced in the claim “I Have Come,” is to claim a level of
embodiment, in sequence, that may be altered in the manifest world. “What does that
mean?” he says, “altered in the manifest world?” It means that the form you have taken, in
resonance, is not what it was. It has been re-articulated, and the name you have been
given, “I Have Come,” is not a small self announcement, but the arrival of the Divine in
manifestation that announces a new world into articulation through agreement, coherence,
alignment in the high octave you are singing in. So the things that were known in form
and field, the child, the job, the life lived, is not only reclaimed, re-known—it is made
new. Underline the teaching. Made new. To make something new is to realize it as it truly
is beyond the construct that the small self would utilize in reference to what she was
educated in. And you’ve been educated in ways that would deny, not only your own
divinity, but the manifestation of God in anyone and anything. And, as you have aligned to
this new resonance in this claim, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” you are
announced, and then beholding the announcement in the form that you have taken. To
realize the self is to realize the Divine expressed in all.
Now, so many of you think this is something you do, and it’s not what you do, it’s
what you have become in articulation. And the ramifications of that, “I Have Come, I
Have Come, I Have Come,” the announcement of the Divine as what, in form and field, in
expression, is the being of the Divine that claims the truth in anything and everything that
can be known. We say Beyond the Known is the title of the text, and the realization of the
God you know, or the truth in all, in anything and everything, is to move the sequence of
experiential being from one sense of being to a radically different one.
He is interrupting now. “But I don’t understand. Radically different. Do I wake up and
not know my name? Is my child in the ethers? Is my job an idea that I don’t go to? What is
the activation in experience? What is it like to be as you say?” It is to wake up from a
dream that you have been conspiring with, and resonant with, and, in the new resonance,
what is, was, but is known anew. What is, was, but is known anew. And, in the new, your
experience of manifestation, the claim of being, “I Have Come,” is in equation with the
field of the Divine that is ever present in everything, but unannounced. And, when
something is unannounced, it is asleep to its true nature.
Now, the claim “I Have Come,” in realization, transforms the reality of the experience
of the day, but not in drama, but in agreement to what always is. And you are moving
beyond the landscape of the temporary page to the realization of what the page actually
has been. Paul is seeing a page being turned, as in a magazine, and the page turned reveals
the new page, the true page. The agreement to be in this, in vibrational accord, is the
agreement to realize what has always been. Underline that now. What has always been.
The idea of re-creation, for so many of you, is about fixing what you think is wrong, and
that is born within the shared field of agreement, or the octave of expression that we are
moving you beyond. So, if you wish to take your remedies to the Upper Room and do
your fixing there, you cannot succeed because you are claiming the old vision and aspiring
to bring your intellect, your sense of right and wrong, sense of good and bad, to the Upper
Room where those things are not expressed. The template of reality in the Upper Room is
immediate and does not claim the morality, the ideology, the intent of the old. And, in the
new, the alignment to what is and can only be reclaims anything as of Source, and that
cannot be done when you are directing it to be what it was with your opinions attached.
“There should be no crime. There will be no crime. I will have no crime in my Upper
Room.” Well, then don’t go upstairs. Go find a closet and shut the door. You will have a
better experience in the closet.
You realize anything in the Upper Room in resonance. And the claim of what is as of
God is the lifting of it to a new way of being. The name crime carries with it history, the
history of law, the mandates of law, the mandates of morality, which have all been born in
religion, whether or not you know it. And these codifications of experience are part of the
shared construct that you are lifting beyond when you go to the Upper Room. The divine
potential, the potential to realize anyone and anything as what it truly is, exists here, but
cannot be claimed when you are deciding what it should be. “Well, there will be no war in
my Upper Room.” We would reframe that to say, “War cannot exist at the level of
consciousness in the Upper Room.” But to realize that mandates that you know that this is
so, and, as you know, which means to realize, this truth, this truth is made known, or
realized, in the shared expression of the low octave, because to realize anything at this
level is to lift it to the Upper Room for re-articulation.
“Now, can one man,” he asks, “end war by realizing eternal peace?” You must
understand, friend, that eternal peace exists in the Upper Room. You are not pretending.
You are knowing. And, as you know and realize the ramification of being in this
expression, the articulation of the Word is what renounces the old. To renounce something
is to deny it. Now, you are not pretending. You are simply saying, “I Have Come.” And, if
you think for a moment you can bring your old agenda to that claim, choose a better
wardrobe for the announcement, and perhaps make business cards to announce you have
come, please don’t come. We can do without you at this level of expression.
The True Self as you is who has come, not your idea of the True Self. The True Self as
you, who is lifted, who is activated, who has been re-known, re-articulated in the Upper
Room, is who has come at the cost of the old, but not at the cost of the child, or the job, if
they are imperative to your experience here. To be willing to release anything and
everything is, in fact, required. But it is not needed, and it should not be done if it is not a
requirement for your progression. If you are in a relationship that encourages you to deny
the Divine, you may wish to re-think your passage. You may decide, as the small self may,
that she wants what she has known. She will leave the heavens for some other time, and
there is no penance there. You will learn there in your own way. But to deny the Divine at
the cost of what you’ve had is to put yourself in a predicament. “I cannot have the Upper
Room, I don’t like what I have claimed here” is a way to decide or to justify the
expression you are choosing. Please just remember that it is being chosen. To release the
old may invite you to release the relationship, but it is not the requirement, and please
don’t pretend it is. That would be the small self seeking to assume this teaching for her
personal agenda. “The Guides said I should leave my husband.” We would never say such
a thing. You will choose what you choose at the level of agreement that you can come to.
And agreement means co-resonance with what you have chosen. To lift beyond the old, to
arrive to a new way of being, is, in fact, to release the old as you have known the old. Do
you understand the difference? “Behold, I make all things new.” Period. Period. Period.
(PAUSE)

Now, decide this, if you wish: That as you have known yourself in form, the form you
have taken may be re-comprehended or realized anew in an articulation as the Divine Self,
and the authority you have, as the one who knows who she is, is to make this claim, “I
Have Come.” The manifest self, the Divine who has come as who and what, is who makes
this claim. And the reliance upon the True Self as the authority of your life aligns the
authority of your life to the Divine so you become an expression, the fruition, of the
Divine as may be known as you. Underline as. Now, as you understand that what you are
is of the Divine in comprehension of your claim, “I Have Come,” you begin to announce
yourself to the world itself, not through the pronunciation of the words as much as the
manifest being. To align to this is to align to the incarnation of the who and the what and
its expressed service, which is the claiming of the Kingdom in all manifestation.
To understand this fully is to understand that you occupy a space, a field, that by
nature of being invites the space to be present in all that it encounters. As you comprehend
the manifest world from the Upper Room, which is the abiding place of the True Self, as
the world is re-known by you, the announcement “I Have Come” becomes itself the act of
God upon the manifest plane. If you can understand that the presence that you hold is the
alchemist here, beyond what you would say or do, you will understand the entirety of this
teaching. Each of you decides that the who and what you are, who has come, is in
agreement to this through the alignment or the claim of truth that you have made, and the
choice to embody at the cost of the old. Now, for some of you this means that the act of
being, the pronouncement of being, “I Have Come,” may take form in the manifest world
in action is not wrong-minded. The Word in action is the expression of God that has, in
fact, come as you for the good of all. But, if you understand good, you must understand
that the idea of good itself has qualifications that must be rendered new. If you replace the
word good with benefit, you will have a higher understanding. But benefit itself may not
be what you think. To benefit another is to agree to their Divine Self, because that is the
higher choice. It does not denigrate the old. It lifts the old to a new articulation of their
being. In action, as the presence of the Divine, you go about your day in a reclamation of
what you encounter. The Divine as you, in any encounter, aligns the encounter itself to a
high octave. This is not done through the small self’s intention to align to the high octave.
It simply is the expression of how you be. When you know yourself in Paris, you don’t try
to go to Paris. The same is true of the Upper Room. It is a level of agreement, alignment,
and a comprehension of manifestation as the who and what and expression that assumes
all it encounters in vibratory accord.
Now, to rely upon the old as the way to dictate your path is to choose the old at the
cost of what might be presented before you, and what is presented before you, in every
way, shape, or form, is the alignment to the presence of the Divine that cannot exist
experientially when you begin to reclaim it through the language of old. The jurisdiction
you have, as the one who chooses, is to, in fact, align to what is before you in resonance,
and to abnegate authority of choice, at this level, is to decide, in fact, that where you stand,
like it or not, will not get you what you want. As we said prior, the one who knows herself
in Paris simply operates from that perspective. But any encounter you hold in the manifest
world becomes the opportunity to know the manifest world as of the Upper Room.
Underline the word of.
Paul goes back to questions he’s received. “But what about those people who do the
awful things? How do we realize them in the Upper Room?” You are not realizing the act
in the Upper Room as much as the essence of everything incorporated in what you call the
act, which is attitude, behavior, action, personality. Because nothing is separate from God,
everything can be assumed as of God. When you blame something, when you are angry at
something, when you claim it in low vibration, you call yourself to that level or octave,
and that becomes your alignment. So, to crucify another becomes the crucifixion of the
self. Do you understand this? It’s imperative that you do. What you do to another, you do
to the self. How you claim another is how you claim the self.
The reliance upon the Divine Self, who knows who and what she is, is what aligns you
to this requirement. The small self, the best she can do, we would have to say, is behave
better. “I will be more forgiving, a bit kinder.” But as long as you are holding the
negativity, or the disavowal of the Divine in anyone or anything, you are in a charade. You
are behaving better, yes. You can be very polite to the person you hate, but your hatred is
what claims them in vibratory accord. You can be the hypocrite with the smile on his face
and all that will get you is more of the same.
Realization, which is knowing, is the transformative act that you are embarking upon
in every encounter. The realization of the Divine in the one you would despise liberates
you. It does not condone despicable behavior, but realization of the who claims the who in
the higher accord, and it’s only in the higher accord that she may be re-known. Everything
else is attitude. Everything else is behavior. You have laws to help you behave well. Many
of them you follow because you agree to them. Some of you, you don’t, because you don’t
agree to what they mean. And, in some cases, you agree to them only because you are
frightened not to. Laws are systems of agreement and behavior. In the alignment to the
True Self, you may abide by law, but you are aligning beyond the manifest world to what
is always true. The requirement here is very simple: Know who you are. Realize it. The
comprehension of realization is the realization of everything else. It cannot be other.
Now, some of you wish a passport to the Kingdom. You think it’s a vacation, a happy
place of creation. It is, in fact, a joyous place, but the joy is not happiness. It is profound
awareness of the action of God as can be expressed in anyone. And the love you hold for
your fellows, at this level of engagement, bypasses even your idea of love. To love the one
you would hang in the town square is to know God, as God loves the man who would be
hung. Do you understand this? No one is exempt from the love of God. If that were to be
the case, you would have an evil God who favors one over the next, and God loves the
sinner as much as he loves the saint. It is you who deny them the love they are deserving
of. As you align as the Divine, the idea of saint and sinner themselves disappear because
those labels, those monikers, those emblemizations, are of acts or of moral fiber. And the
one who has been raised in pain, known pain all her life, may be acting in pain because
that’s all she can comprehend. You don’t deliberately exclude her from the life you live, or
the fiber of love that must be present, because of her acts in pain. You reclaim her in love.
The one that is easy to love is also present. But you progress more rapidly when you
realize the Divine in the one you would never wish to see again.
“Well, you don’t have to have dinner with her,” Paul says. “You’ve said that prior,
yes?” Of course you don’t. You don’t have to have dinner with her, but, if she is hungry,
bring her the plate of food. Do you understand this? Do not deny her love because you are
frightened of her, and the one you are frightened of is the one most in need of your love.
“But that makes me a victim,” he says. “Why would I go feed the lion that would take my
arm off with the plate?” The idea of love is not about your safety. The small self is the
only one who is afraid of the lion. The True Self as you, who knows who he is, does not
act in fear, and the idea of the lion, the one who would be harmful, can be realized in a
higher way in the Upper Room.
He is disagreeing. “So somebody has a gun. He wishes to shoot me. What am I
supposed to do? Love him anyway?” Love him anyway. Yes, love him anyway. And, if
you can take the gun from him, take the gun from him. If he needs to be stopped, stop him.
If you need to run from the room, you may run. But love him anyway. How could you not
when you know who you are? The idea of Jesus upon a cross saying, “Forgive them, they
know not what they do,” is a high expression of love and a high truth. You do not become
Jesus, but you become willing to sacrifice yourself to the principle, or the high ideal, and
you are unafraid of the losses you incur, because it is the small self who would protect her
riches, protect the body, at the cost of glory.
“What does that mean?” he says. It’s really a very simple teaching. There is a level of
awareness you may come to where even death is no longer an obstacle and no longer
feared. You understand that the body itself, as of God, cannot be separate from God, even
when it is ash. Do you understand this? You are of God, regardless of consequence.
Everybody is, as well. And this is the tragedy of humanity. You have decided some are
worthy, some are not. You measure your worth against a criteria that is culturally born.
You predicate your worth on how you are perceived by your fellows. And, in doing so,
you have forgotten God. And forgotten is the correct word. God is still present. He is not
late for dinner. She is not absent. It is still here. You have just closed your eyes to the truth
that has always been before you. To know the divine worth in another is to claim God.
You do it in the heretic. You do it in the holy man. You do it in the one you hate until you
no longer hate. You realize God in the one who you fear until there is no fear. And those
people over there who would do those terrible things, you understand them, and, acting in
fear, you understand them and their choices in fear, and you realize the Divine, which
exists without fear. And that is reclamation.
To claim another in Divine Self is to claim it for yourself. To cast another in shadow is
to put yourself right there. And to say God cannot live in that man is to deny God in every
man you have ever met and can ever meet. You do these things. You often do them in self-
righteousness for the well-being of the tribe. But to put another in darkness, whether it is
done by the individual or the culture, is to deny God. Paul worries sometimes about the
town square, what they do in the town square to the one who is despised. The culture that
condemns another, that decides to decide that the Divine cannot be present there, pays for
its sin. And the only sin there is, comparably, in this example, is to deny the Divine that
must always be present.
We will say these words for the assemblage, and for the readers of the text. There is no
one born, there can be no one born, outside of God. It cannot be so. Because God is all
things, the manifestation of God must be present as all you see. Perhaps you may see
another operating in fear, or outrage, or anger. Claim them as they truly are, and know
them to be holy. To realize the holiness in another is to bless them. “I know who you are in
truth. I know what you are in truth. I know how you serve in truth. Not as you behave, not
as you think you are, not as you have done, not as what you want to be known as, but who
you are in truth.”
That is the key to liberation. Condemnation is a collective act, know it or not. And, as
you condemn yourselves, you condemn your fellows. As you condemn your fellows, you
condemn yourselves. We will bring you more when we return. Period. Period. Period.
(PAUSE)

We have come to each of you to renounce the old, to claim you in the Kingdom, to create
a world in recognition of the divinity that exists in all. We have come to herald a new day,
a new awakening on this plane in manifestation, and the manifestation of the Divine in
form is the song we sing. The claim you make, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have
Come,” is the announcement of being, of true being as the expression of the Divine come
as you. But the claim you make must be made in an awareness of the fortitude required of
you to come forth at this level of recognition.
To recognize who and what you are requires several things: The realization of your
Source; the realization that, no matter what happens, you cannot be separated from that;
and the realization or recognition that the Divine indwells in every space, in every crevice,
the lowest form as well as the highest, because, unless this is so, what you are claiming is
a partial identity and a partial awakening or realization.
“Well, we don’t do this,” he says. “You might as well stop now. We can’t go where
you say.” In fact, you don’t go. You come. And the radical difference between the two
statements is arrival, “I Have Come,” and go, as in “go get.” You don’t get this. You are
this. And, in the being of it, the resolute self, the Divine Self, is the one who masters the
Kingdom and the requirements of it. The small self at this stage is in agreement to what
she is and can only be as the Word.
Now, the Word, if you understand it, the articulation of the Divine in anything and
everything, requires the reason of being to be claimed as it, as what it is. It is not sought
for or discovered. It is present because it can only be. And realization, as we suggest, is
who you are as a realized being. Not the striving self, the one who can’t understand, or
may never. You say you want this in an awakened state. It is present, but understand,
friend, it is not the small self who has come and must abide in the high octave. It is the
True Self that has claimed the Divine in the small and aligned it in higher agreement. The
small self, in an assumed state, exists within the Divine and its own expression. The idea
of separation—“my small self,” “my True Self”—is released at a level of awakening
because, once you know, you cannot un-know, and the fiber of being, the being that you
are, as expressed in announcement, “I Have Come,” is the reclamation of the divine
principle at the cost of the old.
Now, he asks for examples. “But we have things we care about. Am I who I was? Do I
still like sports? Do I want to go home and watch a movie? What am I becoming? What
are you saying to us?” Realization comes at the cost of the old. The comfort of the old is
also reclaimed, but can be known or seen as an expression. As we have said many times,
the Divine Self is who goes to work, who bathes the child, and perhaps sits in the chair
and sees the movie. No matter what you are doing, you have acclimated in resonance to
the degree that you can maintain the field of the Upper Room. Again and again and again,
we say, everything exists and can be re-known, or re-known in truth in the Upper Room.
The question you have, Paul, is does the individual self maintain a sense of identity? The
Divine has come as each of you, with your singular gifts, singular awareness, with the
loves and the hates that you have known yourselves through that are now being re-known
and reflected anew as you perceive a world in lifting.
“A world in lifting? What does that mean?” Imagine, for a moment, that you see a
sparrow flying low. You recognize the sparrow at the height it flies at. You name the
sparrow by the name it was given. When the sparrow is lifted beyond the small self’s
sight, it becomes a thing, an identity, a blot in the air, but it has no name. You may call it
bird, you may call it a feather flying across the night sky, but your recognition of the what
cannot be seeing it from the low vantage point where you rest. When you lift, in
increments first, and, then, once you are there, in a faster way to a new congruence with a
higher field, what you perceive as the bird, as the robin, whatever you name it, the
sparrow is known as divine because, at the level of vantage point that you are witnessing
from, all is of this frequency.
In the low octave, you cannot lift to the high from the perspective of the small self.
The small self can create a god that he would put up on a cloud and worship, and, while
you have done this, it has not done you very much good. The realization of your
participation in the divinity being expressed all around you is re-creation of the known self
and its environment. The landscape itself is recovered resplendently, in the awareness of
the Divine that the Divine Self can claim it in. Each of you says yes in principle. “I am a
divine being. I am willing to do spiritual acts. I have a practice, a way of knowing the
Divine that serves me.” And, when we speak to you of assumption and realization, it all
sounds well and good—until you come to the threshold of the awareness that it is real, it is
so, it is known. When something is known, it is realized, and the realization of being at
this level transforms you and every aspect of your life.
“But are we as we were?” he calls up to the Upper Room. “Do I still have sneakers in
my closet? Do I know my mother’s name? This is too much.” It is too much for the small
self, and that is the only problem here. The small self has made agreements, individually
and collectively, to what must be, and the formulas that you abide by play out before you
in dualism. You claim a world in separation from your fellows, you know yourselves in
separation from the light, and then you complain about it. But when the answer is here—“I
Have Come”—you deny it. You would rather go count the sneakers lined up in your closet
to make sure you are who you were. Who you were was an idea, and nothing more. The
idea of Paul, the idea of Frederick, or Janice, or June. The idea of being what you were.
All that is transformed is the idea, but the presumption that that is a small change would
not be true. It’s a radical change, and, in many ways, a complete departure from an idea of
what is possible.
We call our texts Beyond the Known for a very good reason. You cannot conceive
through the old template what exists beyond it. It’s truly that simple. And what exists
beyond the template can only be known in a new one. In the Upper Room, the fabric of
reality is re-articulated, re-known, and known in a new way by the self who abides there.
And that self has claimed the small self in deep love and in awareness of her requirements.
The small self is not dead, but she is no longer the ruler of the small kingdom that she has
announced herself in. And the claim you have made, “I Have Come,” is not symbolic, but
the claim of being that sings a new world into expression. The name of the game here is
being. The being that you are, in an assumed state, in articulation as the Word, calls forth
the new and leads the way to a new reality to be born. The divinity you hold, regardless of
what you think, is what claims this, not the personality who wants to be spiritual. You are
spiritual by nature of being.
When we say these words to you now, we want you to comprehend two things: You
are deeply loved, and you don’t know what you are. When we say these words, we have to
say them in the comprehension that you may claim yourselves in. Number one: The idea
that you have about who you are has accumulated enough manifestation that you are
frightened of being without it. Because you know yourself through your expressions, you
find your reflection in all of these things that you have chosen to know yourself through.
The second thing you must know is, in re-articulation, the reclaiming of the self, the
creations you’ve known yourself through must now reflect the truth of who and what you
are, and, if they cannot be re-known in the Upper Room, if they are no longer serving you,
in fact they will be released.
“What does that mean?” he says. Perhaps you have a habit that you enjoy that is
detrimental to your health. You may find yourself, through act of will, seeking to solidify a
solution, and then decide you can be in the Upper Room and bring five packs of cigarettes
with you. You will be shocked, in a few days, how challenging it is to smoke in the Upper
Room. You must realize yourself beyond the habit or surrender the habit to be re-known in
the high engagement. You cannot demand that others be who you want them to be by the
prior dictates that you have commanded your reality and your relationships in. Try to be a
tyrant in the Upper Room, and you will find yourself in the basement very, very quickly.
To love another is to know them, and to be known at this degree is to be loved. And to
know the Divine as what you see is to love what you see, even when it is painful in what
you see or how you would claim it through the structure or the lens of the personality. In
the Upper Room, the sparrow is divine, but so is the bloody fist, so is birth, so is death.
Nothing can be outside of God, and the fabric of reality that you are in reclamation of, the
Divine in all, is lifted in one note, one tone, which is the manifestation of the Divine. The
Divine expresses in infinite ways, and, once you realize or know that the infinite ways the
Divine expresses, regardless of how high or low, is still one note that you have become an
articulation of, the manifestation of being what you are is the ascension that lifts with it.
The world—the world—is lifted, by nature of being at this level.
“So what does that look like?” he says. It looks like the world made new, because the
one who witnesses the world is witnessing with new eyes. They are not discolored by the
reflections of history, by the language of old, and the definitions you’ve inherited. They
are re-known or sung in a new light, and the manifestation of this is seen in brilliance as
the Divine before you.
DAY TWENTY-THREE

Each of you decides, when you arrive in a lifetime, to claim a life that will support your
learning. And how learning occurs is through encounter and challenge and opportunity.
The denial of opportunity—“This is presented to me and I will say no”—may be seen as a
way to re-route yourself and claim other opportunity. Each challenge that you meet may
be met in faith when you understand that the requirements for a lifetime are chosen to
learn through, and each learning opportunity brings you further toward a realization of
who and what you truly are. Each of you decides that each lifetime is the opportunity to
progress toward realization—beyond the known, beyond the systems of agreement thus
far. And the challenges you choose to face, in many cases, become the stepping-stones
toward greater realization. To deny yourself an opportunity to learn is simply to decide
that the learning will take place at some other time, because, as you have lessons to learn,
the lessons will be called to you in the ways that they can be known.
Now, to decide that you are unworthy of the Divine Self calls to it its own lessons. You
can claim anything, you see. You can decide that you are unworthy and create the
opportunity to learn worthiness. You decide, in many ways, how you will be challenged,
and in what ways, because the opportunities presented in the challenge will call to you
what you require to benefit, to grow, and to align to the next potential that may be
available to you. As you decide that you have the right to be, just as you are, you begin to
become capable of choosing other things in worthiness, and simple worthiness means “I
have the right to the life I am living.”
Now, this is a teaching about who and what you are in the lives you are currently
living, and what happens to that life when you ascend to the Upper Room and manifest a
new creation, the Divine Self as who and what, that may be known and sung. Each
lifetime creates the opportunity for progress, and realization itself—which is what this text
is, Beyond the Known: Realization—is the claim that is made by the one who has come in
completion and said, “Yes, I Have Come. I know who and what I am.” Now, by
completion we do not mean you are finished, that there is not more growth. But when you
understand that the organism that you are is actually encompassed in an active way by the
Divine for the purpose of ascension, the manifest world becomes your school, but in a
very different way. It is not that learning stops. Learning stops in the ways that it has been
known. And by this we simply mean the lessons of the first-grader are very different than
the one in graduate school. You understand this, yes. So the Upper Room is also a class, a
classroom where you call things to you in your experience, with opportunity to learn and
to progress.
Each of you who decides that you will realize the self in this way, at the level of
comprehension that you can attain in a life, will be called forth in several ways in the
opportunity that is given to you to choose again and to learn. And the ways you are called
forth are based in the requirements of the individual. Each of you who chooses this has
come as an offering. In many ways, you are the offering. You are releasing the idea of who
you were and claiming an identity in operative ways that transforms matter. Now, we have
just lost Paul for the day. “I don’t transform matter.” But, in fact, you do. In fact, you are
all doing it all day long because consciousness itself, in its equation, is calling
manifestation to it at every moment. There is not one moment of any day that you are not
manifesting, or in the act of creation, whether you are doing this in low vibration or high
vibration. It is simply the nature of being.
Now, to understand what this means in alchemy is that the Divine as who and what
you are is the transformative action, not the small self who decrees what should be, but the
Divine Self, who, by nature of being, is in his or her knowing. When you are in your
knowing, you are in response, in the moment, to the requirements of the moment. So the
idea of figuring things out is of the old, the old idea of being, and the action of knowing,
which is to know, claims you in the movement or the qualification to move the matter that
you are experiencing in any encounter.
“But what does that mean,” he says, “in any encounter?” As the Divine Self, in its
manifestation, has been claimed in body and field, the vibratory field creates a template
for its encounters. Very simply put, if you have a blue ink and you pour the blue ink on a
white piece of paper, the paper turns blue. It’s a very simple metaphor, but what you don’t
understand is if there is always this level of engagement, as you hold the thought of
anything or anyone—“I hate that young man” claims the young man in hate—and if you
don’t believe that there is resonance in your hatred, and your hatred is actually informing
the man and claiming the man in the density you have known and are now embarking
upon him, you would be wrong-minded. Every action born in thought has consequence,
but every thought has consequence as well. This does not mean that what you think
happens in the material realm, but in the field you hold you are always in exchange or
conversation. You know when you are loved. You know it in your bones. The one who
loves you need not even speak the words, but you know that you are loved. You are being
expressed in the accord of love that is being gifted to you by the lover. You know when
you are hated. You know the feeling. Words are not required.
Now, these are obvious expressions, but there are more subtle ones as well. This is
simply to say that you are already doing this. Your consciousness is already claiming a
reality, and impressing upon matter, not your attitudes, as much as your beliefs and your
emotions that you claim in vibration. So, in the Upper Room, where the amplitude is
different, the vibratory accord is doing somewhat different work. If you are the blue ink in
its expression, the blue ink is expanded by everything it encounters. If you can imagine
turning the world blue by your encounter with the world, you would have a metaphor for
the realization of the divinity of all things. This is transformation. It is alchemy. And the
material world will be in response.
He gets frightened now. He has memory of alchemy, of potions, of lives lived, and the
ramifications of those acts. We would invite him, and the reader as well, to understand one
thing. True alchemy is an act of God, an act of Spirit. It is not conjuring. It is not magic, at
least in a base way. It is known through realization, the presence of the Divine and the
manifestation of the Divine that can be re-known or simply re-articulated, the Word
spoken new to bring the new up to the Upper Room where it may sing in accord, in a
resonant chord, with all that exists there.
The idealization of what it means to be the Divine Self is, again, an act of confusion
for him, and we suspect for many of you. The being of the Divine Self is simply being the
expression of the Divine that has come as you in form and field, and your participation in
the lifting of the world, in endowing the world with its true presence, which is always the
Divine, is the simple act of the one who knows who she is. And your idealization, born in
history or born in magical thinking, is that you become something so foreign to your
identity that you cannot conceive of it as possible. Paul, if you would remember back to
the day when you did not know what others were thinking or feeling by what you call
tuning in, you will understand that the transition that you have embarked upon feels
completely normal to you. And, simply put, it is, because you have acclimated to the level
of vibration where this kind of discourse is evident. It is not sought. It is simply present as
you align to it. There are many levels of alignment, and the alignment that we are teaching
in this text, which is the fruit of embodiment, the expression of embodiment in the claim
“I Have Come,” is the claim of the one who not only knows who she is, but doesn’t
question the identity of the True Self.
“Will I come to this?” he asks. “Will the reader come to this? Does this happen in
some distant future?” It happens in the instant you know it, and only in that instant. And,
once that instant is known, it can never be forgotten. You can lower your vibration, but
you still know who you are. You can learn in new ways, in new opportunities, but you
know who you are. The one who knows who she is, at the level of the True Self, knows
the Divine in all things because that is the direct action of this knowing. You cannot be
separate when you know who you are, and you cannot decide who should be separated
from you in this way because you understand, at a very deep level, that unity is present
always, and separation is only an idea that is being chosen and acted upon in deep
ignorance of the ones who are before you.
“What does that mean?” he says. If those of you who deny the Divine Self wish to
claim separation, you may, but you do it in ignorance of what is always present. You are in
unity, finally, at a causal level, although your experience on this plane has been that of
separation. And to realize, to know the True Self in expression—“I Have Come, I Have
Come, I Have Come”—is to know the Divine that is expressed in all matter. We underline
the word matter to move beyond the idea that the Divine manifest is singular to an
individual. The severed hand is still divine, even if it is not participating in an act of
divinity from one who knows who he is. The rubbish is divine. The sky is divine. And
what you know as divine sparkles in its holiness.
Now, to render something new is not to affirm what it was. “Look at that filthy
garbage.” It’s to realize that the Divine is expressed in the fabric of all things. It’s the
realization of what informs the garbage, the fabric of the Divine that makes anything
matter that is being realized in the Upper Room. You will have a very difficult time saying
“holy garbage,” but a much easier time remembering that the garbage you see was once
something other, and what that something other was, was of God, so still must be so. What
you are doing then, in some ways, is disassembling the reality that you are perceiving or
have known as the small self and awakening to what it has always been.
“So we lift the garbage,” he says, “what good does that do?” It’s not that lifting the
garbage is a good thing. It’s about not excluding the garbage from the panorama of the
Divine that is before you, because when something is excluded it is simply damned. It is
put in darkness. And then you are accountable to the cord you create, the tie you manifest
to the low vibration. What you are in accord with, at this level, is in resonance with you.
So you become in resonance with those things that have been excluded from the light or
from your awareness of what the Kingdom is.
Now, of course, the True Self knows what all things are. But you are attending to
memory and managing multiple realities as you go back and forth in vibration from the
Upper Room to the lower floors, to the cellar and below. To realize the Divine, finally, we
have to say, is to activate at the level of the Upper Room, not go back downstairs to fetch
the trash and blame it for being there, but to realize the Divine that is only present—
underline only—at this level of awareness.
So we will continue with a new idea. Each of you who decides your worth in the
Upper Room will be called into action. Now, the action is being, but to be re-articulated,
as we are teaching, as the who and the what that you are comes with mission, and the
mission itself is imparted to you through your knowing and through opportunity, which is
why we began this teaching with opportunity. When an opportunity comes and you are
aligned to the level of agreement that you may receive it and act upon it, be in your
knowing, and, in your knowing, the action will make itself known. This is a gift to many
of you who encounter yourself with a confusion and the question of what you are here for
and what is the purpose of this teaching. This has never been a teaching of escaping the
world. It has always been a teaching of realizing the truth in the world you see and
claiming the divinity for the benefit of all you meet and may never meet. As you decide
that you are worthy, as your hands are open to receive, the level of being that you require
to operate from will be supported by your expression. And this means you are in
manifestation, just as you are in the lower floors, but calling to you everything that you
require to demonstrate yourself through.
It’s really very simple. As you each decide to abide in the Upper Room, you are
calling to you the opportunity in service through the vibratory field you hold. Again, the
blue ink informing the white paper, the expression of the Divine called into action, “I
Have Come,” for the sole purpose of the realization of the Kingdom before you. The
Kingdom before you. We will claim this book—“I know who I am”—a teaching of this.
And the manifestation of the Kingdom, which is so much of this text, will be required
understanding for anyone who encounters this.
Each text we write is a stepping-stone to deeper realization, or higher realization,
because you can’t go to the heights without the comprehension of the depth of the
meaning. It is not intellectual. It is embodied. And, beyond the intellect, there is knowing.
And, as you know, you be. And, as you be, you act. And the world is made new by nature
of your presence.
(PAUSE)

We ask you each now to be remembered by us. Just as you are, wherever you sit, allow
yourself to be enfolded in remembrance. We are remembering you as who and what you
have always been, beyond any claims made for you or by you in opposition or denial to
your inherent worth.
The Divine as you, who has come as you, is not only worthy, but a blessing to the
world. And to deny your worth at this level is to deny the opportunity that is being
presented to you to bless the world. What is blessed is known in love, and what is loved is
healed, and what is seen anew is made new by the eyes that see the world, not only in
love, but in awareness of what has been. We intentionally say this: what has been. So
many of you believe that to lift something to the Divine is actually to deny what has been,
when in fact what you are doing is realizing what has always been. That is not denial, but
a re-articulation or re-seeing. You are not negating something. You are seeing through it,
beyond it, to its inherent meaning, to what it truly is and can only be in the Upper Room.
In the Upper Room, the challenges you face as a soul in progress are the temptations to
return to the low vibration to call your lessons to you. And this is done in several ways:
Through habit—“I am used to my pain”; or through the encouragement of others—“You
are supposed to be in pain with me, or recognize me as your god or your goddess. You
should know me as what I am, and what I am is what I say I will be.” If you confirm the
other’s identity as a small self, you deny your own divinity. “Let them have their way. Let
her be as she wishes to be. I will encourage her in her folly.” The moment you do that, you
actually stop loving her. You are claiming her in the way she seeks to be claimed. And, in
doing so, you begin to operate as a lie. Underline the word as again. You operate as a lie
when you are denying the Christ or the True Self or the divinity in anyone or anything.
When we spoke in a previous text of operating in truth and said the words “In truth a
lie will not be held,” we were actually speaking to a level of being and awareness that
exists in vibratory accord. And, if you are truly willing to do this work, then you become
willing to release the lie of your own unworthiness, or release the mask that was created in
unworthiness, and be willing to see beyond the mask someone else has made in a need to
confirm his or her small self. To justify an old act, “Well, he did the best he could,” is to
simply say, “She created something at the level of reason, consciousness, or agreement
that she created the thing in that she’d chosen at the time.” And that does not abnegate
personality or responsibility to choice. It simply means you are aware of who someone
was when an act was made. To realize who they always have been—“I know who you are,
what you are, how you serve”—is to liberate them. And, when you make the claim “I
Have Come” in this announcement, you actually create for them the template for their own
realization.
“How is that so?” he asks. Through your encouragement or realignment of yourself,
you have created the potential for another to be of like accord. Now, when you are
speaking the words, “I know who you are, what you are, how you serve,” you are playing
music in tone to the vibratory field of the one you are in encounter with. But in the claim
“I Have Come,” the announcement of your own realization, which is the chord of music in
resonance as who and what and expression, the what that you are can command the
manifestation of the field of what you encounter in its co-resonance or like accord. Not
only have you become the template, but you have become the ability for others to realize
their own sense and awareness of who and what they are in like vibration. How this is
transmitted is done in field, in tone, and in intent. But, at the level of the Divine Self, for
the one who may truly claim “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” the Divine as
you has integrated enough that the intent is made known simply through your being, and
not a decision you make to activate another.
If you were to sit in a theater with a thousand people and be in this resonant field, “I
know who I am in truth, what I am in truth, how I serve in truth, I Have Come, I Have
Come, I Have Come,” in the acknowledgment and embodiment that ensues, which is the
claim “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” the amplification of your field will
serve to liberate the bindings to lower vibration that are present in the collective field that
has been created by the presence of all in the space you know as the theater. The claim for
them, “You Have Come, You Have Come, You Have Come,” is the offering of the like
accord that may be witnessed by them as the who and the what that they are in escalation.
Paul is feeling his field lift because the words were spoken through him—“You Have
Come, You Have Come, You Have Come”—and the realization of these words, the
activation embodiment in the fields that encompass the physical self, will be demonstrated
by the individuals present at a level of co-resonance that will be integrated as the soul
agrees to it. Underline that, friends. As the soul agrees to it. People have free will, and the
dominion of a soul is to agree to the level of ascension or progression that she may
encounter for her requirements to be met in her own growth or progression. So you are not
making them holy. You are claiming the Divine as the who and the what and the
expression in manifestation of the entire theater, the thousand people, because the
thousand people are sharing a collective field. And how the individual wishes to render
this will be chosen by the soul of the individual. The template has been set. Because a
template has been set and recognized at the higher level, the incarnation may occur,
engage with the individual needs of the soul and the embodiment of the soul that you may
know as a person. Period.
Now, to understand what we are truly telling you is that the act of being at this level is
the service you bring. When we have taught “I know how I serve,” and spoken the words,
we have been distinct in their meaning. It is the Divine as you in its most important
expression, which is realization, and manifestation. And the claim that is made in the
completion, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” is the claim that allows you to
know this service for those before you in the refrain, “You have come.” Dominion, you
see, is the act of claiming the Divine upon the material realm. Because the material realm
is a singular expression of the Divine, the Divine informing all matter, the Divine may be
re-known—again, re-articulated—in the claim that is being made.
If you decide that the who that you are is unworthy of this, please remember, friend,
that the who that you are addressing is the small self that you have over-identified as. If
you are not willing to do this, to decide that you are worthy, as the True Self, of the action
of the True Self, you will decide again in time that you are. You are not being re-routed off
course. Perhaps you are waiting for the moment in time when your heart can hold the
fruition of the Divine that is asking for expression as you.
 If you wish, take a moment now to remember yourself, the Divine as who and what.
And we will sing for you now, if we are allowed. On the count of three, Paul, we would
like you to allow us to sing through you. And the vibration we sing as and with will invite
all who encounter this language, and this intent, to be received by us, not only in form, but
in realization. Paul, on the count of three.
One. Two. Three.
[The Guides tone through Paul.]
Be as you are. Be as you are. Be as you are.
We are here. We are here. We are here. And, as we are here, we welcome you forward
to the next level of incarnation that is available to you.
We will end this chapter now, and we will say thank you for your presence.
 9

THE ROAD BEFORE YOU

DAY TWENTY-FOUR

Each of you decides, as you arrive here in this adventure that is life, that you will learn
and come to terms with a creation of your own. “What is the creation?” he asks. The
creation of mortality. The idea of mortality itself must be addressed now, if we are to take
you farther.
Now, the fear of death, which is instilled in you, must be rectified in order to move
beyond the agreements made on this plane to hold yourself in fear. Once you understand
that the Divine as you, the eternal self, is ever present, not only in every cell of your being,
but in every cell in anything you can imagine, because, finally, God is in all, you realize
that death is simply another way of experiencing God. You must understand that the denial
of life, as you understand it, is actually fear, and not death itself. All death is, is a
transition from one level of vibration to another, and the potential you address as the True
Self, while in form, is the alignment to the Christed Self that realizes itself in body, in
manifestation, to claim the world in accordance with truth.
Now, death itself is a lie only at the level of the false self, because the True Self cannot
die and is eternal. The small self, and the idea of death, and its fear of it is what must be
understood to be moved beyond. The idea of mortality—“I am in a mortal plane, having a
mortal experience”—is certainly true. But you exist in multiple dimensions
simultaneously. The Divine Self that is who and what you are must be comprehended as
eternal, and eternity must be seen in the moment you stand in for this to be comprehended.
If you understand that the what that you are, in high octave, in high vibrational accord, is
not relinquished in death, but made new in a transition to a higher frequency, you will lose
the fear of mortality.
Now, if you don’t lose the fear of mortality, you attach many things to the idea of
death and your avoidance of it. We don’t invite you to leap into the pit of the volcano,
enter the burning building, stand before the pride of lions and say, “Welcome to dinner.”
That would not be this teaching. But to comprehend that, as you address eternity, which is
only known in the moment you are embodied in, death itself is just a moment of re-
articulation to a new way of being. If you are not frightened of the loss of the body, if you
welcome the opportunity to move beyond this plane to your next encounter, if you are
willing to be known in a high octave while present here, the transformation through death,
which is simply your participation in the eternal cycles of life that you see out-pictured
upon this plane, you will decide that the freedom you have claimed in the announcement
“I am free, I am free, I am free” must include the fear of the release of the physical self.
Now, so much of what we have taught you about embodiment implies the body as
God, and the body as actually eternal. And the body is eternal, but not as you suspect. Any
piece of the body, any increment of it, can be comprehended as the Divine. And, because
the energy that is the Divine cannot be extinguished, it is always re-known, or re-
articulated, spoken anew in another form. The attachment to an identity through form is
the only challenge you are really facing. Now, if you understood that beyond death, as you
comprehend death, there is more to learn, that the cycle of life and death, the ongoing
release of the known through your participation and engagement with life, if you truly
understood that what you have come to is a school of resurrection of being, in a high
octave, you will understand that any transition you undertake is part of the plan.
If you understand that the cells of the body, in individual states, are living things, and
that your comprehension of a body as a singular entity is simply saying, “I am many cells
of a great organism that is expressed in form, has known a name, a personality, and
experience,” you can release the idea of the singularity of the body as one thing. The body
is the mechanism of your expression here. It is the thing you choose to experience the
world through. And, because the world is not separate from God, the body is not either.
But once you understand that you are as life, as, that is, one with all, you comprehend that
the structure or form of the body is, in fact, in its own way, malleable to a re-knowing in
an experiential way.
In the claim “I Have Come,” the body is realigning to a new purview, to be the
response of the Divine as, in some ways, a radio or system of broadcast for the Divine to
claim manifestation through. Now, everything is God already, and the utilization of the
body as participatory to this engagement is resurrection. The body itself becomes the
manifestation of the Divine at the level of coherence that it is known in participation to its
landscape, as God knows God in all things. It is not that you become the tree, Paul,
because he is asking this. It is not because you become the ocean. It is because you are
already these things. Do you understand this? You are the sea, and the sky, and the earth,
and the man dying on the other side of this planet. You are the child being born. You are
death itself, and life itself, because the eternity of being is known as broadcast in
coherence to this majesty that is life itself. It is not that the individuated self is
extinguished. The individuated self is expressed as all.
Now, to understand what this means is to become reliant on expression as your
teacher, and not the intellectual idea that you would assume. “Well, I am a starfish
somewhere. Isn’t that a nice idea? I guess I am my bunion and my husband’s bad breath.
Thank you very much.” The intellect’s idea of what this means has to be reductive because
the intellect is not the experiencer of the phenomena or expression that is articulation on
the mass scale we speak to. Re-articulation involves a re-creation, resurrection, of body
and frequency in a higher alignment where the union you experience for the purpose of
elevating the expression of this plane is done by being—less than intent, but by being.
And its broadcast, in union with what is experienced around you, is the reclamation of the
manifest plane in high accord.
“Now, what does this mean?” he asks. “I don’t understand.” Of course, you don’t
understand. But you may experience it. And, in the comprehension of your experience,
you as the starfish, you as the husband’s bad breath, or the bunion itself, you are simply
experiencing the realization of union with God, which is what you have said you wanted
so badly. It is here as you in this expression, once you move beyond the singularity of
expression to embrace union. To understand this is to be it. And what you all don’t know
is that you are this, have always been, and the expression of the Divine that you have
known yourself as has been precluded from your knowing because of the density of fear,
born in the agreement of your sense of separation.
 As you evolve beyond the known, beyond the template of agreed upon being, you are
challenged every step of the way through your participation in this ascension through the
levels of vibration, the keys, the octaves, to move beyond what you chose to learn through
to a new expression. The image Paul is seeing is one diving upward through the sea,
attempting to reach a surface where the sunlight glitters. In some way, this release from
the sea to the sky is an apt metaphor for what you comprehend beyond the known. The sea
is its own kingdom, with its own properties. You agree to live there because the organism
you have claimed has aligned to it, and the rules of the sea you have been in accord to. But
the moment you break the surface of the sea and are in the light in oneness, you reclaim
the sea because you did not know that the sky itself envelops the sea. Do you understand
this? The sky is in the sea. You just didn’t see it.
So the lifting of this plane, if you wish a metaphor, is releasing the idea that what you
have been, as a distinct self, is under the water, and realizing that the Upper Room, the
new life that is before you, is in expression and always has been. To experience the
phenomena that we are encouraging you to look at, to behold, to decide you may know, is
to give permission, within the claim “I Have Come,” to move beyond the boundary of
physical form to become the wave that is all things. This requires, even for a moment, a
small sense of forgetting that you are a body, or a breathing body. You become the air. You
become the sea. You become the child being born and the old man dying. You become the
treetop. And you become the soil below the tree. This is not enlightenment, Paul. This is
the expression of the Divine in union, in simple union.
“What happens when we do this?” he says. “How do we come back to a normal life?”
The broadcast itself that we are encouraging you to experience is aligned to the Upper
Room, and, because it exists here and is known through you, the expression of it is not as
much a meditation that you embark upon, but a realization of what is already so. You are
not making yourself one with the tree. You already have been. You are not making
yourself one with the dying man. You already are. Because you have operated in
separation, every vocabulary word we could use to offer this teaching will be counted in
your own decibel, born in separation, and, as we move you beyond this to experience,
understand that the experience itself is not a new thing that is happening. It is what it has
always been. But the consciousness you’ve held has precluded your realization of it. In
other words, friends, we are not making you one through this teaching. We are bringing
you to yourself that has always been one. The difference here, for those of you who are
fearful of this, is that you are not extinguishing self. You are expanding it, and realizing
the self as the broadcast of God that has come as you. Here we go, friends:

“On this day I choose to align the entirety of my being to the comprehension of the
unity with all that is ever present in the Upper Room. And, as I say these words, I
give permission to every cell of my being, every idea I may have about what I am,
every thought I may hold about birth and death and the manifestation of form, to
be released in this claim of union with all that is. And, as I say yes and proclaim
this, I allow myself to experience my union with all that is. I Have Come. I Have
Come. I Have Come.”
 Allow this, please. Say the words, if you must. The intent is present. And allow the
expansion, the release of the idea of form itself, to carry you as a wave that is in union
with everything that it encounters.
Be as one with all.
(short pause)
The release of the old, which is how we began this text, has been the requirement for
the realization of what is known beyond the idea that you have taken of yourself, and the
ideas you’ve shared about what must be so. Each of you decides, as you agree to
incarnate, to participate in the reclamation of the Divine upon this plane, because God is
as you, even in the smallest way you may identify it as. God is the worm in the field, the
man ringing the bell in the chapel, the peal of the bell as it rings out across the town, and
God is the song, the vocabulary of love, once it is understood and attended to as a
potential.
As we continue with this text, we intend to bring you forth in action to claim the world
in love. You Have Come. You Have Come. You Have Come.
(PAUSE)

Each of you decides, as you attend to a life, that you will claim things to benefit the world.
A token of love. A kindness to a stranger. Raising a child well. Gifting to another what you
don’t have to give. Every act born in love claims a world in love, and realizing the self as
love endows the being that you are to gift the world with the presence of love.
Now, as you decide in knowing, in being, in realization, that the Divine is as you have
come to be realized for the benefit of all, you begin to encounter a new opportunity to gift
the self in a way you could not choose as a small self. Now, the small self seeks awareness
through response. “I gave the man a nickel. The man smiled in return.” “I walked the
woman across the street. She said thank you. I am honored to have walked her and I
appreciate the compliment that she gave me.” Your expectation of some kind of response
from the manifest world for your good act creates an opportunity for another good act to
be in response.
Now, as you are lifting to this level of expression, and the being as love, you begin to
realize that love is its own reward, and the act of loving another, anyone and everyone, is
the gift of God itself. To be in love with any other human being, and all human beings, is
to know God as love. Now, as you become the truth of who you are in amplification, the
alignment to love is not only available, but an expectation of the excursion you have
claimed for yourself. Imagine a morning where you wake up before dawn. You understand
that the sun will rise. In the Upper Room, in the action of being, in the name “I Have
Come,” in realization of who and what you are, the expectation is that love will be what
you are as your expression.
Now, to understand love is to understand being. And to confuse love is to decide that it
should be an act or a gesture or a thing that requires a response. The emotional self knows
the idea of love in one way, but the heart loves, regardless of emotion. To know emotion is
to have the symbolic expression within the system that confirms what you feel, and the
mandate of emotion is response. You feel an emotion. You don’t feel love as much as you
become love. And, as you become love, you claim in love and lift the love you see, in any
expression that it will take, to reason of being.
“Reason of being? What does that mean?” The reason of being is to be in love. It’s
what you all need and ask for and question, and for very good reason. To be in love is to
be in grace and in the awareness of the presence of the Divine. Imagine a wind that is as
you, that is love expressing through you and claiming what it encounters in a like field.
Allow the self, the Divine Self that in fact you are, to be reclaimed and re-known as what
love is, the expression of God unspoken and articulated, seen and unseen, known and
unknown. Let love be beyond the small self’s comprehension of love, to be what it is, the
Divine as all, and all as is. That is what you are at the level of vibration in love. As you are
re-known, reclaimed, re-understood and articulated in the Upper Room, the veils of
illusion are lifted, one at a time, or all at once. And the reason of being, to be love and in
love, is comprehended with the depth of the entirety of your soul. As you express in this
resonance, the delivery of love becomes the what of the action of expression, which means
you are as what you can only be. “I Have Come in love.”
Now, say this, please. “I Have Come in love.” And know what it means to be
articulated in the vibration of love. “I Have Come as love, I am love,” an articulation in
field and form that speaks its name by nature of being. The resonance of love, in any
encounter, is to reclaim in love that which has been left behind, that seeks love, that knows
itself without love. Paul is seeing the image of the rain penetrating the dry soil, and, as all
is loved, all may bloom and flower.
If you wish, take a moment and allow the self that you know as yourself to be as love,
and to accept the vibration that you experience and release any idea of what it must be.
Allow the self to be penetrated by the vibration of love that exists as you in this Upper
Room and allow it to reclaim you in field and form, the Divine Self as love.
Now, the Divine Self is as you are, and there are qualifications that divine love may
know itself through, and this means the alignment to all that is in co-resonance with the
manifest world may be chosen in agreement to be loved. To lift another to the truth of their
being—“I know who you are in truth”—at this level of accord is to know them in love.
Not compassion. Not gentleness. Those are qualities that are wonderful. But, as love, you
know them in the fullness of the vibration that is the Divine expressing as love.
He interrupts. “Does the Divine express in other ways?” Of course it does. We have
said many times, everything you can imagine is an expression of the Divine. And love as
God, the magnificence of God as love, is what we bring you to now, because, in this
agreement to be as love, you allow love to agree to you.
Would each one who reads these words, who hears this voice, give permission now to
be received in love, and allow any aspect of the self that would disagree to love or with
love, that would refute love or deny love, to be met by love in a complete encounter. And
by complete we mean that the self that would refute love will be re-known and reclaimed
and aligned in truth to itself as the aspect of God made in form that is expressed as love.
Receive this now:

“I am one with love. I am allowing love. I give permission to my entire being to be

known in love. And, as I say yes, I am assumed, agreed to, and re-articulated as
love.”
(short pause)
Be received. Be received. Be received.
(short pause)

Let love be as who, as what, as the expression or service of the one who has come with
the name “I Have Come.” Period. Period. Period.
(PAUSE)

As we watch you, as we investigate the result of our words upon the energetic fields of
those who work with our teachings, we are in celebration at the ability of humanity to
move to a state of reparation of what has been to step forward in a reclamation of the
Kingdom. And for this we say thank you.
As we work with you, as we attest to your development through the ramifications or
the octaves of ascension that you embark through in the claims we have offered you, we
will attest to the fortitude of the individual who has said yes to realization. As we sing
your song for you now, as we sing to you each, as we honor you each for how far you
have come thus far, we will give you the offering and the benefit of our love. And our
love, we say, is of God, and a specific expression of it. As Melchizedek, we sing, and, as
truth, we honor you, and, in justice, we rejoice that each of you has chosen truth and love
as your ally on this journey home. And, as we rejoice for you, as we offer love, as we say
what is will always be true in the Upper Room, we invite you now to be in reception of
these words, and receive them, if you wish, as the gift of being:

For those who hear these words, who hear this voice, for those who read the text
and comprehend the language of the Divine Self, we come in truth for the
resurrection of the Divine as each of you. And, as we say yes to the innate Divine
in full flower and full bloom, as we rejoice, as the petals unfurl and the fragrance
of the flower fills the universe, we sing to you as we sing to our God. We are one in
love, we are one in freedom, we are one in joy, we are one in the allowance of the
expression of love that is now permeating each of us in infinite ways. And, in this
expression of love, we invite all who hear these words to speak these words with
us:
“I have come in freedom, I have come in joy, I have come in willingness, I have
come in allowance, and I say yes to the road before me.”

“The Road Before You” is the title of this chapter, and the road before you is now
paved in love. And the song of love in rapture, the song of love in tears, the song of love
in laughter, the song of love in tears, is known to each of you as a chord of expression, the
chord of love in laughter or rejoicing, the chord of love or tears or release of history, the
song of the Son of Man reborn in his population, heralded by the new earth that will be
born in the octave, the Upper Room, the garden, the Kingdom, in the return of love to all
that lives, and has ever lived, and will ever live in creation. We are here. We are here. We
are here.
Be received.
(short pause)
The organism that each of you are is being re-articulated as one field. And the one
field, in its alliance to its Creator, sings its own song. And the song you will sing, “I Have
Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” heralds the re-awakening of those on this plane to
their true nature.
If you wish to understand this, lift the self to the Upper Room, state the words we have
offered you, and walk the world in an awareness of what is always true. Walk the world in
the awakened state of the one who knows who he is. Walk the world in rejoicing. Walk the
world in an awareness of truth that you may encounter in the eyes of each human being
you will now meet. You cannot deny God when God has been known. Nor can you agree
to fear when you have chosen love.
Our agreement to you, we who are your teachers, is to see you through. And, as we
continue this text, we intend to teach you how to be in authority in the lives you will now
live and rejoice in. He is interrupting. “I’m not rejoicing. I’m confused.” You are
awakening to a new world, Paul. Let your eyes be opened. Let us love you, as we walk
with you, and walk with you all, down this new path of love. Period. Period. Period.
DAY TWENTY-FIVE

When we decide to give you an opportunity to decide for yourself that what is to come is
what is required for your growth, we are actually telling you that what you encounter in
the lives you live, from this day on, will all be for opportunity. The moment you decide
that something is happening to you—or at you, for that matter—you have decided that you
are no longer the one you say you are. You are giving permission to the small self to
abnegate the authority that has been claimed by you as the Divine Self.
Now, the Divine Self is never a victim, has no need to blame, doesn’t seek to self-
justify, but she has every opportunity to realize the one she would blame or be angry with
as the True Self that they can only be in the higher room. And the moment you change
your mind about how to attend to another, the life that you live becomes a joyful dance.
There is no one stepping on your foot, because you have no need for it.
“Is that a metaphor?” he says. “And how could that be?” Well, we will say it
differently. The design you’ve held in your interactions have been primarily predicated on
outcome. “I will do this, they will do that in return.” Which is why you get disappointed,
move to expectations of what others should be or do. As you move to the Upper Room as
the Divine Self, these negotiations are never needed because you are not operating from a
place of manipulation or expectation. “In order to get my needs met, I will be nice, or this
way or that.” The reliance upon old behavior as a way to decide how you will be known
must be released because there is no place for it.
“But does nobody step on my feet?” he says. Well, the metaphor is apt. You have to
have a foot to be stepped upon, and that is expectation, the requirement for others to do as
you say. If you understand that your desire as a small self is to be met as she thinks she
should be in all encounters, you will find how much energy you have spent seeking to be
met as you think you should. When you are no longer operating with the expectation of
how others should treat you, or what they must be to be in consort with you, or how they
are to be prescribed so you can attend to them, you are in fact liberated in your
relationships. You are as you are in the Upper Room, and the world itself is lifted to you.
“So I am in the Upper Room,” he says. “My vibration is high. Someone throws a rock
at me. What happens to the rock? What happens to me?” The metaphor of the rock
thrown, we would like to attend to first. And the realization of the Upper Room quite
simply means that the vibratory anger that you call the rock cannot meet you at that level
because you are high above it. The rock is thrown, energetically, in anger or fear, and your
response is the witness of the action, but you are not harmed by another’s ill intent. This is
the metaphysical plane, or the energetic plane, that we are speaking of. If you are walking
down the street and somebody throws a brick at your head, you are going to get hit with a
brick. That is the outcome on the physical plane. But the real difference is, who you are
that is hit by the brick is not the one who would pick it up and throw it back, or chase after
them to do them harm. You would realize that the act of the brick thrower is in low octave
and set the intention to realize him or her in the Upper Room.
“How is this done?” You are not choosing to transform them so that they are not angry.
You are not deciding for them that their behavior was wrong-minded. They must have had
a reason that they believed to be true to hurl the brick. But what you are doing is
witnessing them in a true way. Remember, what is true is always true, and the claim of
freedom that we have offered you, “I am free, I am free, I am free,” is the opportunity to
release the idea of expectation that has been given to you in the energy field that is the
shared construct of this experiential plane. So once the realization of what is always true,
the Divine has come as the one who threw the brick, the opportunity is present to know
God even in a situation that the small self would be abhorrent to.
“Now, why would we want this?” he says. Well, it’s not that you want it, but in the
experiential plane you have opportunity to realize others, and it’s very convenient to
realize those who throw flowers. It’s not as easy to choose to realize the one with a brick
in hand, the one who wishes to cause you harm, or would decide for you what you must be
to confirm their idea of who you are. The realization of who and what you are is so
transformative, we would have to say, that, once the brick is hurled, the True Self as you
no longer requires the experience of it, and you may well find yourself well out of reach of
the brick that would land upon you. Quite simply put, there is no foot to step on.
Now, when we teach you this we are not saying to lie down on the road and invite the
car to drive over you. You have dignity. You have self-respect. But the self-respect you
have is not dependent on what others would say about you, or how you are treated. The
Divine as you could care less how she is spoken about. She knows who she is. And,
because every interchange is a new opportunity to see God or know God or to realize the
self anew in the Upper Room, each opportunity becomes growth and progress as you
continue to navigate the higher octave.
The belief most of you have is that you will maintain the upper octave, inhabit the
Upper Room, as long as things are going your way. If things are going your way, you have
no issue with anybody’s behavior. The government may do as it wishes, your children may
behave as they wish, as long as your belief in your ability to maintain the Upper Room is
present. However, the moment something happens that you would claim in anger or fear,
you are given an opportunity to choose the Upper Room and remain in the frequency of
the high octave. When that choice is made, in fact what you do is align the vibrational
field in cohesion in this resonance, and you support the self in an appropriate response.
And by appropriate we mean a helpful response to you, and to others, with whatever
situation you are called to that seems to operate in low vibration.
“What does that mean, seems?” Well, in fact, it’s perception. To call something low is
to perceive it as low, and when something is re-perceived—again, re-known, re-articulated
—in the Upper Room, it is transformed. To lift something to the Upper Room is to claim
the Kingdom inclusive of that thing, not to abolish that thing, the brick in hand, the one
throwing the brick. Unless the one with the brick in hand is known as God, or claimed
anew, you have decided for her, for him, and created an opportunity to learn through the
low vibration again. There is nothing wrong with this. However, we will say, to decide that
you cannot manage your own True Self at this level is to be choosing as a small self. It
cannot be so, it is not so, at the level of personality. It is always so, at the level of the True
Self.
 He interrupts. “Well, we have our lives, we have our preferences, we have obligations.
How are we to interact at this level of vibration from here on in when we understand that
there are challenges ahead?”
The simplest challenge that you will face is that you are choosing, and you would
prefer to have things happen at you, and then maintain vibration, than realize that you are
the one choosing at every opportunity how you will attend to your life. Once again, you
would prefer to blame another than align to the Upper Room, where there is no blame.
There is still accountability. You cannot rob a bank and then go hide in the Upper Room.
You will be found wherever you sit. But you will realize that the act of robbing the bank is
foolhardy because the Source of all things has never been the bank, and the realization of
abundance is far more available, at this level of vibration, than it is at the level of scarcity
that would encourage someone to go rob a bank.
Each individual you encounter becomes the opportunity to perceive the Christ as them,
to know the Divine as who and what they are. When Paul says, “That sounds exhausting,”
he is speaking only as a small self who would have to decide, in each encounter, that he is
seeing the Divine in the postman, the man at the store, the woman on the street. Once you
are in the Upper Room and established in vibration here, that is who you meet, the
occupant of the Upper Room, because you are lifting them there in the energetic field that
you are operating through.
If you take a moment now and close your eyes and set this intention, this simple
intention, “I am in the Upper Room,” you will feel your vibration rising around you. You
may experience this in the body, or as a tingling at the body in the field around you. But
when you claim “I am in the Upper Room,” or, if you wish, “I am free, I am free, I am
free,” which will also lift you here, you can have the experience of the Upper Room. Once
you are here in this vibration, you simply claim the words “I Have Come, I Have Come, I
Have Come” and express the Divine through and as you in the vibrational field of
everything you encounter. When you do this, in all likelihood you will experience the
expansion around the body, as if you have gotten larger, and expressing yourself beyond
the confines of what you have thought as the body. In fact, that’s what happens. As you
walk down the street at this level of accord, you are transforming in interaction the
vibrational essence of what you are encountering. And we ask you to go out now, on your
own, and experience this. Until this is done in action, until the Word is known in action as
who and what you are, you will have come, perhaps, to an intellectual understanding that
you can agree to, or choose to refute. But the actualization of your experience here is what
will direct you toward a life of high expression.
So we will take a moment now for whoever reads these words to set this intention:

“I am choosing to experience myself on this little walk, this little passage, even if
it’s around the room I am in, while reading, with my eyes, in the Upper Room.”

Period. Period. Period.

(PAUSE)
We ask you each to decide something: That the removal of the old—the way of
anticipating the old, the way that the small self would decide what should be before her—
become organic to your expression. And by this we mean we no longer want you acting in
force to discern what is high and what is low. We want you being at the level of vibration
where what you are is the claim of being that calls to you, in the higher vibrational state,
all that you witness, all that you encounter, all that may be known in the Upper Room.
If we wish to offer you a bit of advice, it would simply be to align to the vibration in
any situation until the moment of arrival, when you know without intention. When you
become the intention, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” the arrival of the
Kingdom, made in form, is not only known to you—and to know is to realize—it is
claimed for all you see.
The individuation of the Divine Self is a mass occurrence that is in progress. And,
through this individuation of expression, the world is known as it truly is. Underline truly.
Not as you would have it be, not as you were told it was, but as it can only be in the Upper
Room, which is the level of the Kingdom.
Now, to presuppose that any action you take, from here on in, now that you know
yourself as an aspect or manifestation of God, to decide that any action you take will be in
alignment with truth, would be foolhardy until the alignment of full expression has
occurred.
“And how does it occur?” he asks.
In the moment you stand in, and only then. And the moment, we say, friends, has
come.
We are before you. We stand before you each. And, as we say these words to each one
of you who hears these words, who reads these words, you may respond. The Divine as
you, in manifestation, is the claim of the Divine in all. You will say this, if you wish:

“I Have Come. I Have Come. I Have Come.”

Thank you each. We will pause the text until another day. Period. Period. Period.
DAY TWENTY-SIX

Now, as we come to you with our own benefit, our own regard for you each, as you come
forth in a higher awareness of who you have always been in the Kingdom, you must be
claimed as your inheritance becomes available to you. To claim you each is to realize you
each in the octave of truth, because in truth a lie will not be held, and dominion in the
Kingdom is awareness of truth that exists beyond the known, beyond the small self’s idea
of what can and should be.
Now, as we do this with you, as we call you each forth in your awareness of the
Divine, we claim you in an Upper Room for the manifestation to occur. The manifestation
that occurs in the Upper Room is a palpable expression of truth as embodied by you. And,
when we say this, we are actually telling you that the physical body, in a new resonance,
has to comprehend, not only itself, but its expression. That is what it makes, what it sees,
what it is, in an octave beyond the known.
Now, as you progress through this, you develop a system that you claim through
expression. Understand this. The vibrational system you have is reclaimed in this new
articulation, and its mandates for its development are known by you in experience. So
please don’t say to us, “Well, tell me what to do to get what I want,” because, again, that’s
the small self trying to sneak in the door of the Upper Room, where she thinks all her
presents will be.
As you are realized, or re-known, in the octave of truth, the body you have taken
begins to dismantle certain structures, or ways of knowing itself, that have been in
agreement to a lower octave. Simply put, you are actually establishing yourself in a higher
realm while incarnate. And the manifestations of this in form may include some
discomfort, as Paul can attest to, but beyond that, all you are really doing is acclimating in
an experiential way to what you are as you experience yourself in a new plane of knowing.
To understand this fully is to disregard any benefit that you think you will receive from
this action, but to simply allow it to be the tuning fork that claims, not only you, the
resonant you, but the experience of you, to provide the opportunity for this establishment,
this embodied establishment in coherence with the world you are now walking in. You are
walking in the world in the vibration of the Christ, which you will call love and truth and
the awareness of the presence of the Divine in any interaction that you are aligned to.
Now, when we say all alignment, we are really saying that we get to this place of
expression, where identity itself is re-known, and firmly re-known, in a comprehension of
truth. The small self’s idea is understood. It is blessed, perhaps. It is seen for what it has
been—a great opportunity to learn. But the establishment of the True Self and the Upper
Room, in field and form, claims you in a new alignment that doesn’t subjugate the old as
much as it doesn’t rely upon it for the data it requires to go about the day.
The choice you make, each of you now, is to say yes to what comes, what is
experienced, and what is chosen by the Divine Self in its recognition of your learning. To
have an experience of the Divine Self in manifestation is only the first step of the
agreement of being. By being at this level, there is no thought, or maneuvering, or
claiming what you want to be. There is no point to it. You are claiming as you are. And the
benefit of where you stand, the benefit of your encounter with the manifest world, is the
rejoicing of realization in what is perceived in a re-articulated way.
The life you live begins to sing in a rather different way, or tone, or vibration, than you
have assumed thus far. And the choice to be here, to align to this, supports you, actually, in
the maintenance of it. It is so not difficult—once you comprehend that the alignment in the
Upper Room, the choice to vibrate there, the choice to claim opportunity in every
interaction, to perceive the Divine that is already present—the moment you realize this,
you are actually ushered forward. And, when we say ushered forward, you receive your
assignments.
Now, by assignments, we mean opportunity, and opportunity comes to each of you
through your acquiescence to the Divine Self as who is the one who will claim it. And, as
she claims it, she is called forth with the ability to meet the assignment, or opportunity, as
the Divine Self. So you may find yourself in circumstance where you realize yourself in a
completely different way. And your capacity to know what you need to do is present for
you, without fear, because the True Self in opportunity is unafraid. Each opportunity that
comes in service, through the manifestation of who and what you are, supports your
alignment in claiming itself in the manifest world. And, by this, we mean in some ways
you are re-creating the vibration in your interaction, because that is what you know.
Realization. It is what you know.
Now, the old will seek to find you. “But look at this opportunity. There is much glory
here. I will be somebody everybody knows.” “Look at this opportunity. It looks
wonderful. I will betray everybody I know by taking this, but it is for my good. I don’t
care what people think.”
Now, you’re not pleasing people by taking opportunity, but you are not creating glory,
or seeking glory, because to seek glory as the Divine Self is to deny the glory that is
already present. If you are called forth as a manifest being to work publicly, the
opportunity is there, but please don’t hang a star upon your dressing room. The
opportunity comes in everyday awakening—to witness the God that is before you, even
when it’s concealed by a mountain of fear. You have heard of moving mountains. This is
the analogy. To move a mountain of fear is to realize what is present as the mountain and
beyond its current expression. This is done by the one who does not deny the mountain,
but realizes the mountain in the new octave and reclaims it as it has always been in truth.
The violation of the small self, the dictates you’ve received for how you should be fearful,
who you should condemn, who you should deny the Divine in, or what you would claim
as unholy, must all now be re-met, re-introduced to you, for the purposes of alchemy.
Again, the mountain being moved.
To eschew the old, “Oh, that old thing,” is still to claim the old. To deny the old, “Oh, I
was like that when I was twenty-one—never again,” is still to claim the old. To realize the
present moment as the only moment you stand in is to know eternity, and, in the
realization of eternity, the folly of claiming the old as emblematic to who and what you
think you are is seen for what it is. There is no need, at this level of incarnation, to blame
your husband, or your father, or deny the love that would be asked of you from the one
that doesn’t wish you well. To know the Divine—love them anyway, as we say—in the
one you would witness in fear resolves them in a new opportunity, or reclamation of
vibration, that may be comprehended by you in your experience.
Now, some of you will say, “Oh, I have several people I hate. I’m going to go about
witnessing the Divine in them until I feel differently.” And, again, that is the small self
seeking to do the work of the Upper Room. In truth, a lie cannot be held. And the lie is
that whoever this human being is, whatever they have claimed or seek to do or seek to
justify, cannot be without the presence of God. What lies beneath the mountain, and, in
fact, is the mountain, is still God, even if it is denied. To deny God, or to be in the lie, or
the curse, if you wish, of separation, is to claim independence from your own divinity, and
the moment that is done, you operate in fear as a resource. If fear is a resource, what you
rely upon to get through a situation—and we would say condemnation, guilt, and anger,
and desire to harm others is all fear in masked ways—you understand that, as what you
are, as you are re-known in the Upper Room, what you encounter is realized by the aspect
of you who cannot deny the truth of being.
“Well, what of those we don’t like?” We have said many times, Paul, that like is a
personality structure. “My friend likes bowling. I can’t stand it.” “My friend likes to read.
I prefer the movie.” You have your preferences of how you wish to express and loving
someone has not a thing to do with the personality they present. If that were the case, this
would be a beauty pageant of some kind, where only those who are meritful get to enter
the Kingdom.
Everybody comes. No one is exempt. Everybody is seen, regardless of what they have
done, as realized in a new way in the Upper Room, in the Kingdom, we say, the awareness
of the Divine. It is fear who keeps you separate, and, because you have relied upon it for
so long, you contribute to the manifestation of it on this plane each time you choose in
fear. Each time you choose in fear you are licking the fear that is present in the field, and
its taste upon your lips calls you into the manifestation of fear, because that is always its
intent.
Now, in truth, the idea of fear can be re-understood as a progression of an idea, born in
a belief in unworthiness, in separation, the desire to rule, the desire to be God as the small
self because that is what the small self thinks she is. And, born in this, you have
established a world, separate countries, ways of denying the God in others, boundaries that
separate you from rich to poor, ways of denying God that, whether or not you know it, you
are complicit to. Because you see them, because you bear witness to them, you have to be
party of them and to them because you cannot be separate from anything you see.
As we lift you each and every day to the Upper Room for these teachings, as you
become willing to reside here with us to be instructed in experience, you become the one
who has claimed the Kingdom. But the initial claim of the Kingdom—“I Have Come, I
Have Come, I Have Come”—is amplified by and through you in your experience of it. So
saying the words is actually the action of expression until, as it is realized and known,
there is no need to utter a word.
 The stages of incarnation at this level of vibration, which we will be attending to in
subsequent texts, will be known by you as you inherit them. You don’t know what’s in the
box until you receive the box. And, when the box is open, you may claim what is there.
All that can be claimed in the high octaves must be known as of God in order to support
its realization, because to do other would be to seek the riches of heaven as something that
must be hidden. In other words, to say, “I get this or that in the Upper Room, but none of
you, perhaps, will,” is the way to authenticate the lower self’s agenda for its spiritual
growth.
Everything that is received by you at the new level of vibration is comprehended with
its meaning. And this is a new teaching. There is no point in giving you a key if we don’t
show you the doorway. The doorway will be present to the one who receives the key. The
song will be sung the moment the orchestra appears. The love that you seek to be in
expression as is in resounding bliss—the thunder of love, as can be articulated as you—the
moment you love. And to love as the Divine is to know the Kingdom in absolute ways.
The realization of the Kingdom comes in stages as you may meet them. Some of you
have decided that this must be so now, and we will sit back and watch you as you try to
walk and carry yourself in a vibration that has different responsibilities. Paul is seeing the
image of a toddler trying to walk and falling yet again. The toddler is loved, but when he
walks, he knows how to walk forever. And, understand, friends, there is no rush because
the Kingdom is present now in the moment you stand in, whenever that moment is.
When we taught you eternity in the prior pages of this text, we spoke to you about
knowing yourself in infinity, and the wealth of information that can be comprehended
there. When you are not bound to the systems of control that the calendar has offered you,
a calendar can be liberating. “I know what month it is. I know where to go on Monday.”
But it prescribes a separation of your experience of time, as does the clock. If you stand in
the sunlight, it is always beating, until it is night. And you are not anticipating night. You
are knowing night, the moment night falls, as the eternal now. In grace there is freedom,
and in freedom there is joy, and the moment you claim the Kingdom as your inheritance
and step forth in the awareness of God in every flower, in every house, in every stream, in
every human being or animal you see, you begin to have the experience of the Divine that
is eternal, in the eternal now.
So we say these words to you:

As we witness you tonight, as we sing your song, as we lift you, one and all, all
who hear these words, who read these words, who will attend to these words in the
vibration that is present in them, we say yes to the unfoldment of the Divine that is
now claiming you beyond all things, all desire for fear, all fear itself. So we say
yes, and, as we say this, and complete this chapter in the text, we announce you
each, as the curtain opens, and we invite you to step off the stage that the small self
has known itself through into life as it exists beyond the known.

We welcome you, and we say good night. Period. Period. Period.

 10

FREEDOM FROM FEAR

DAY TWENTY-SEVEN

Each of you decides, when you align as the Divine Self, that the life that you will lead will
be in accord with your true nature, your true nature being the True Self in action, the Word
made flesh, if you wish, in the day you arrive in. When you know who you are in a high
octave, you establish the reality or the purview that the Divine Self must know itself
through, and, consequently, everything you see and experience is in co-resonance or in
alignment with the Divine as what you are.
Now, when we teach realization, we intend you to know it. We do not want you saying
to us, “Well, tell us what to do.” We are telling you now—and the text that you are reading
in realization is a claim of embodiment that must be understood as an expression that will
be known. When you are known as who and what you are, the Divine that has come just
as you, the reality of your expression becomes the articulation of what has always been in
the Upper Room, in the high octave, where the Divine Self is and always has been.
When those of you who come to us want to know who and what you are, we always
say to you, you are as you have always been, but not as you have known it. You have
believed yourself to be far inferior than your true nature can express as. And, because you
have come in a reckoning, in a willingness to face the self as you have thought you were,
you may become established in the Upper Room, in the high octave, where the Christed
Self realizes the Kingdom through the manifestation and re-articulation of the
comprehension of matter. Underline the word matter. The Divine as matter. For some of
you, the idea that the flower is holy is something you can comprehend, but you would
deny the Divine in the filth you see. But once you truly understand that matter is the
Divine out-pictured as idea—a construct, if you wish, that you have named and known in
agreement to what it seems to be—you can move beyond the small self’s comprehension
to the concrete knowing that the manifestation of anything and everything is still God, or,
if you wish, the energy or vibration that you would know of as God.
Now, when matter is seen as God, beyond the names it has been given, but when
matter itself can be consecrated in its true nature, or holy name, the lifting of the vibration
through the one who comprehends it is not only immediate, an immediate re-articulation
or realization of matter, but it is known by the one who sees it as what it has always been.
The moment you deny the Divine in anyone and anything—underline thing—the claim is
made to operate in separation. When you want union on your own terms, you might as
well go into an abbey and pull the gate shut. “I will be in union in the abbey with the like-
minded people. We have a nice high wall to protect us from the world.” In times past, the
idea of sequestering the self to experience divinity was established. Today you say things
like “I will not watch the news,” “I will not look at the darkness.” But even in that
moment you are denying God and deciding that God is the pretty flower, and not the
trampled one. When both are known as God, you are in union.
Now, when the walls of the abbey are released, the world itself becomes the abbey, the
temple, the Kingdom, the manifestation of God in its own articulation. And, when one
begins to realize matter, to reclaim the glass of water, the glass and the water itself, as the
vibration of God, your experience of the glass and the water transforms not only the glass
and the water, but your relationship to it. “Is it no longer a glass? What are you telling
us?” he says. What we are telling you is that the lifting of matter to a higher plane, the act
of alchemy, if you wish, is where we take you, en masse, through the re-establishment,
first, of the physical form that you have arrived in to its true nature, and, then, all that
expresses in like vibration in manifestation to it. In other words, we say, when you have
aligned as the truth of who and what you are, the alignment of the manifest world, the
consecration of it, is the effect and the action that you partake in.
When you understand what a miracle is, which is the realization of God beyond the
comprehension that the small self could assume, you will know God as a miracle in the
lives you live. The demonstration of this, and the knowing of this, is the affect of the
comprehension. In other words, friends, first you know, and then you realize the manifest
world in congruence with that knowing. Some of you have nice ideas, the parade of
flowers that you expect to see when your divine nature has come, but in fact what you see
is the Divine in all manifestation. Underline all. And its articulation and relevance to what
you are happens in a unified field. We call it the Upper Room, the high octave, where the
Christ is manifest.
Now, the Christ as man is not at all a new teaching, but a teaching that has come, yet
again, at the time when humanity can be claimed by it. And know that we said these
words: Be claimed by it. You are not claiming the identity as Christ. It is claiming you.
And the comprehension of this, in matter, is the realignment of every cell of your being in
agreement to its Source.
To decide for yourself what this means would move you very rapidly into idolatry,
because some of you would seek to make an idol of this teaching, when this teaching, in
fact, is simply a walkway up the mountain to the Upper Room to realization. It must not
be claimed as only one way, but as a way, a simple way, for manifestation to be occurring
in humanity. There will be others to come. And the basis of each teaching will be the
assumption of humanity in the language and with the iconography that is present in the
existing culture, because each religion holds a common field, a common agreement, and it
is that seed that has exploded and is now blooming, because until religion is realized
beyond what it has done, which in most cases has been to confirm some sense of
separation, the manifestation of the Divine as this plane of existence will be limited. We
can no longer say, “Go to your church and pray to your God,” when the church you stand
in would condemn another. We can no longer affirm that the way of the prophet of times
old must be the only teaching of the true Christ. We will only say that when the temple
doors are thrown open, when the church doors are opened, when the mosque doors are
opened, the light will pour in, and its own redemption, its own knowing, will occur.
When a knowing comes to any institution, it comes with great ramification. And, in
some ways, the toppling of a structure, be it a government or a religion, is precipitating the
realignment of the idea of government, or the idea of religion, as can be re-known in what
we call the Upper Room. Those things that have been valued as sacred that have become
so tarnished—through the abuse of power, through the treason of the Divine by deciding
that “some can be loved and some cannot by God”—these things must be reassessed, re-
known, but they cannot be re-known when they are being re-articulated by the very ones
who would keep the manifestation in low vibration.
“What does this mean?” he asks. The one who has an idea that what has been must be
what will always be has a deep investment in denying the action of God, because the
action of God is always change. And we say always because to realize this itself will give
you the key to an awakening of the transient nature of the physical reality that is now
being reclaimed in the teaching of this text. The claim “I Have Come, I Have Come, I
Have Come,” the announcement of the True Self, is what claims you and all you know by
the Divine that is already here and expressing itself in high alignment. The justification of
the old—“Well, this is how we did it, so it will be done again this way”—is to deny the
action of God, or the action of change, that would re-comprehend, re-know, and reclaim
everything that it encounters. Underline, again, everything. Everything that it encounters.
What the Divine encounters is always God, because the Divine cannot perceive anything
beyond it. And, when you move to the alignment of this comprehension, you become the
tuning fork, the radiance, the sound and the vibration of God that assumes all it meets in
an encounter with itself and its true nature. The Divine in reckoning is the lifting of the
eyes, the lifting of the being to see what it has claimed, to re-know what it may know, and
the alignment you now have through these teachings will actually reclaim you beyond any
idea you have ever had of who you are.
You don’t know this, yet—in subsequent texts, we will do our best to give you this—
but you do not yet know that the universe you see is an idea, and an idea can be re-
comprehended. And, the moment it is, it is re-established in the high octave, and,
consequently, re-known.
Now, to understand what we are claiming you in, in the Upper Room, is to simply
understand that the aspect of you, incarnated, is divine and has sought and agreed to
realization, including the body that it knows itself in. And the articulation of the body—“I
know what I am”—announces to the physical self the ramifications of choice. To
comprehend and agree to manifest in form as what you have always been reclaims the
form and what the form aligns to. As everything exists in multiple octaves, you agree to
align and know the world before you in the high octave that exists beyond the known.
Now, to each of you we say you are welcomed, as you wish, to deny the Kingdom.
You may choose to re-create your history, as you have known it, for the safety of the
claims you have made historically. But, if you wish to do this and confirm the separation
that humanity has decreed it will know through, you will find yourself in participation to
the dilemmas that you would say you wish to see known anew. If you wish to claim your
history and agree to what has been, you are actually agreeing to a world that has chosen to
learn through separation, when unity, palpable unity—“I am one with the stars, and the
woman beside me, and those I may never meet”—is available now and can be created for
you through this process of alignment and re-comprehension of matter itself.
We will complete this teaching later in the day, if we are allowed to. Period. Period.
Period.
(PAUSE)
As you decide to be in manifestation as the Divine Self, one thing occurs that you may not
expect. You lift beyond fear in a way that you will know. To live without and beyond fear
is treasonous to the small self who has been educated by fear as to its benefits, but there is
no benefit in fear. And, if you must know, freedom from fear, which would be the title of
this chapter, is the realization that the Divine in material form has no requirement of it.
Now, to understand this is to know the self in a significantly different way than you
have ever experienced. So we wish to take you on a little journey to the Upper Room, the
place where fear does not express itself. The choice to be in fear, which may be claimed at
any level of vibration, will release you from the Upper Room, but to know yourself as free
of it is to make the choice in realization that the Divine as you has no requirement for it,
that it has been a good teacher, but holds no benefit to the self that knows who she truly is.
So, if you would imagine that on the count of three you are lifting to the Upper Room,
the level of vibration where we sing to you from, we will offer you the opportunity, again,
to know the self beyond fear, and beyond any claim that fear ever may have made upon
you. On the count of three, allow the lifting to occur.
One. Two. Three.
Be received by us and enveloped in the Upper Room, in the octave where the Divine
knows itself in form, and fear cannot exist except by choice. In this alignment, we wish to
give you an experience of what it feels like to know the self as fearless. And, if you wish
this, you may do this any time you like, until you come to the level of agreement where
the Upper Room is where you abide and express as. In this claim we make for you each
—“I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come”—the True Self may begin to experience
the self as it was intended to know itself. Fearless. Without the idea of fear, fear cannot
exist. Did you all hear this? Without fear as an idea—because fear is an idea, a projection,
a way of thinking or experiencing an idea—fear itself has no name. And, without a name,
it becomes vibration, without intent. To name anything, to call it by name, is to empower
its function—the chair that is sat upon, the fear that is overwhelming. Without the idea of
chair, the thing that you sit upon is simply what it is. And, without the idea of fear, fear
has no power.
To align to this level of expression is to claim the self as you have always been, the
True Self who was born into being without fear. And, the moment you understand this,
you can begin to reclaim who and what you have always been, without the creation of fear
informing the life you live. In this way, we will say these words:

“On this day I choose to allow every aspect of myself that has been known or will
be known by the idea of fear to release any claims that have been made upon me
by fear, to be free of itself, and to align to its potential as fearless. In my agreement
to be known without fear, I give permission to release any investment I may have in
fear as my ally, so I may be knowing my world as one without fear. As I say yes to
this, I give myself permission to release the memory of fear that I have known
myself through, the projections of fear that I may be utilizing as a small self, and,
as I say yes, I come forth as the release of fear, the idea of fear itself, is made
 known in my field.”

Release the idea of fear. Let the idea of fear itself be lifted from you, as if a wave
would carry it away to a new claim of liberation. The energy you have known as fear,
without the idea of fear claiming it in form, becomes a way to know liberation. Without
the captor, there can be no prisoner, and there is no captor when the idea of fear is released
from you.
Be as you are, and allow yourself to know the self as free of fear.
(short pause)
Accepting the self as you are, without fear as your companion, without fear as your
armor, without fear as the expectation of your life, gives you permission to know the True
Self while embodied. As the memory of fear will seek to reclaim you—“There is a spider,
I expect to be frightened by the spider”—remember that you’re only frightened by the idea
of the spider and what it has represented to you. In this new creation of the True Self, the
material realm begins to oscillate for you in recognition of the vibration you have claimed.
In other words, the one who operates without fear does not claim the same, and has no
expectation of receiving it. When you understand that what you are doing here is
reclamation to your innate true state, the one you are begins to express the realization of
form without the taint or the shadow of fear informing choice.
Now, when we say informing choice, we do not encourage you to be foolhardy. “What
a lovely looking cliff. It would be nice to jump off it.” That would be a rather foolhardy
action, and there is no need. To understand that caring for the self is an act of love, and
terrifying the self is not, might be a simple way to understand how you are choosing and
why. When you seek the approval of your fellows to appease an angry God, you are
operating in fear. When you need to placate those around you to support them in their
well-being, you are acting in love. When you understand the needs of those around you
and you comprehend who they are beyond the small self’s agenda, anything and
everything you would do for them will be a consequence of love.
Each of you comes into this expression with the potential to realize the Divine at the
level of manifestation that you can hold. The Christ itself cannot be afraid because the
Christ is in no fear, does not know fear, cannot articulate as such. And, as the Christ is
realized in manifestation in humanity, humanity itself is lifted beyond fear, and the illusion
of separation that fear would mandate is released as well.
Some of you wish to keep your fear. “It is safer that way. I know what to expect. I
shouldn’t trust these people, or go there or here, because I know what could happen.” To
comprehend that your discernment of where not to go may be self-love, and not fear,
would be one way of moving forward, but your reliance upon fear as your protector will,
in fact, call to you the fear that you say you don’t want, because your expression, your
vibratory field, has claimed a thing in fear, and, consequently, aligned you to it at that
level.
In the Upper Room, anything you may fear may be re-known, and comprehended
anew. If you understand, friends, that the idea of fear itself is what must be released, all
that follows will know itself as fearless.
We will end this teaching now. Thank you for your presence.
DAY TWENTY-EIGHT

Now, as you stand before us in realization, in comprehension of the True Self in

manifestation, you wonder what it means to be you. “Who am I now? What do I do with
my being? How do I comprehend action and reliance upon the old that I have counted on
to know what to do next?”
What is happening for each of you, through this encounter in a new alignment to a
high octave, is a realization of the fortitude of the True Self to answer the questions in the
moment you stand in. The map you seek and the compass you wish cannot be found in the
low vibration, but, in the Upper Room, where you now abide as expressed beings, the
claims have been made for you to realize you as the one who knows. The claims we have
made in history, in these teachings, have actually embedded or encoded their truth in the
energetic fields. And, as the fields are assuming the form you have taken, you express in
reliance with the dictates of these truths, which simply means the information you require
is there in the moment you need it.
Now, imagine you move to another country where the laws are rather different. The
habituated behavior that you are leaving is not present. “Is it time for tea? When do I go to
work? How do I know what’s expected of me?” You know what’s expected of you in the
moment you know, and not a moment before, nor a moment after. The realization of the
Divine Incarnate Self is present as the life you live, but is operating, in some ways, beyond
the known, beyond the structure of the known, and most certainly beyond the reliance
upon it. Once you have realized the manifest self, and its encoding has claimed the being
that you are, the reliance upon the old structures dissipates, in some ways, through the
reliance on the power of knowing and the realization that, when you know in any instant,
you are called to act upon that knowing. And the realization that what you are is in
vibration in agreement to a vibratory world claims the world in the alignment with you,
and you no longer seek your reflection through the guarantees of the small self’s data. “It
is snowing. It certainly must be winter.” The referencing of the old ceases to empower
itself, through disuse and through the new agreement as the expressed Divine who has
come in love, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” the manifest self in its claim
of life and agreement to what may be known by the self who has come in service to a
world made new.
Each of you who comes to us by agreement consents to this when you align to the
True Self and give permission to move beyond the template or structure of self-realization
that the small self has been handed and has done his very best with. The small self, you
see, who is still present with you, will no longer rely upon the artifacts of history, when
what is being presented to him or her makes far more sense in his experience. The
justification of rules and laws, habituated acts, cultural mores, will be seen, just as they
have always been, as agreements made to conform to a status quo that is an inherited
structure that is seeking to be re-known through the lifting and re-creation of the world.
As the manifest world begins to greet you in this new vibratory form you have taken,
you can count on several things. The reliance upon the old will no longer serve you, and
you will get busy moving to the realm of possibility, because all things may be known in
the Upper Room. And, because you had a recipe for success, based in data, you are
limiting yourself to what might be claimed beyond that, that is now available to you in a
much different manner. When you justify the old—“Well, we have always done it as such,
so this must be the way”—you are a follower, you are sheep. And, in fact, the Divine Self
as you is not a sheep, but a shepherd. And your own awakening, your own lifting, is the
clarion call through your vibratory field to summon the world to you in a higher accord.
You are not looking for followers, you are claiming them, the world before you, in their
true states of being. And that is the gift of the one who has come, to know the world and to
claim what she sees in her knowing.
So the small self wants questions answered. “I still have a job. What do I do with my
job?” While we have answered these questions prior, we do understand that, at each level
of agreement, you look at your world and you seek the answers that you believe you will
need to know. But, as we said prior, you only know in the moment knowing is given. And
it is the Divine in manifestation who is claiming her work, her role in society, if she has
one, and what it means to be in a life that has been created for the benefit of her learning
and for the benefit of serving those before her.
When we taught you the claim “I know how I serve,” the amplification of the
vibratory field, in waves, congratulates and confirms the presence of the Divine in the
world before her. The fear you have about not being what you want to be is immediately
replaced in recognition of who you truly are. And who you truly are, whether or not you
know it in the moment of this reading, is the Divine, has always been, can and will only be
the Divine. The agreement to manifest, to participate in the field of the physical realm, has
been a wondrous opportunity. And, while you are not releasing that opportunity, you are
lifting the manifest world, by nature of being, to learn some new things that cannot be
learned as a small self seeking to confirm history.
In wonder, we teach you. The practice of wonder. And, as you walk the world, beyond
fear, beyond the agreement to fear, what you begin to comprehend is the insanity of fear as
a practice, as a way of being in agreement to logic. “You should be afraid.” “You should
condemn.” The false teachings of history that have supported man turning against man are
seen for what they have always been—ways to decide how humanity should interact to
support the needs of the ones who would make the rules. When you have lived with a rule
for generations, you assume it to be true, or meaningful, when, in fact, the creation of the
rule, at the time it was commanded, was to support a need of a community that was
operating in very different ways than you may be now.
The Divine as what, the manifest Divine, comprehends the requirements of the day
and understands that those she meets, who are operating in fear, can be lifted beyond it
through her realization of them. Now, imagine for a moment that there is someone in your
life who you know as fearful. And imagine them, for a moment or two, standing before
you in their fear. If you wish to ask the fear to take a shape or a name, something
emblematic, so that you can claim it independent from the individual—because, in fact,
fear is independent from an individual—it will be helpful to you. So see the person before
you with the image of fear, or name of fear, that they utilize, and claim this for them in
your own way. “I know who you are in truth. I know what you are in truth. I know how
you serve in truth. You are free. You are free. You are free.”
Now, as this is claimed, watch what begins to happen with the energetic field, or the
name the thing has been given. As you claim them in truth, the lie that they have known
themselves in will release its hold, because in truth a lie will not be held. You are not
ripping their fear from them. You are claiming who they are without it, without the idea of
fear in the manifestation that they have agreed to, whether it be fear of death, or spiders, or
of being alone. Whatever the fear is that they have chosen to learn through may be re-
known in a higher octave through the simple act of bringing them to the Upper Room
through your accord with them.
“How is this done?” he asks. Through the claims you just made. The claims we just
made and invited you to make are claimed in the Upper Room by the one who resides
there. We are speaking to you, our students, as those who have agreed to align to the
Upper Room as their new habituation. So any claim made from this octave has the intent
to lift what you are encountering to the Upper Room to be re-established and re-known.
The one before you, who wears her fear, is re-integrating an aspect of herself that has
perhaps been dormant, or hidden away out of the need to be safe that was justified by fear,
but the moment the fear releases its tentacles, the idealized self, the True Self, reclaims the
captain of the vessel of her being. In other words, the fear that would rule is released
through the re-articulation of the one claimed in love.
“Claimed in love?” he says. “Is this the same thing as being in the Upper Room and
witnessing another?” Yes, it is. And you will understand this, Paul, the moment that you
stop thinking that love is an emotion, because what it is, is truth as love, truth as God. And
the reliance upon truth, that which cannot be untrue because it is eternally true, will be the
claim of alchemy that is made by you as the True Self who is in love.
Now, to some of you, you think this means you will go around hugging people you
don’t like. We don’t like hugging very much, either. We would prefer other ways of
contact. Since we have no body to hug in this manifest world, we would rather say hello
and be in love with you. For those of you who want to go hugging everyone, you must ask
what your need really is. “Why do I feel compelled to wrap my arms around everyone I
meet?” You may hug as you wish. You may choose not to, as you wish. One thing has
nothing to do with the other, or what we are teaching. We are teaching love and the
manifestation of love, which releases fear, from the Upper Room, which is where this can
be taught. We are teaching from the Upper Room, where fear does not agree. So, in this
place of fear-less-ness, you may come each day until you abide here in your own knowing.
The lifting of the world, where we will take you in further texts, is an act of being.
And the being as the Divine in manifestation is an encyclopedia in and of itself. And we
say this for Paul, who asks, “What is there left to teach?” If you really wanted to know,
Paul, you would probably abdicate your role as channel and go play a game someplace,
because the work before you, as it continues, will continue to defy the logic you’ve
known, but give you what you have wished, which is the knowing of the presence of God
as who and what you are, and as who and what you see, and as all that can be known. It is
the mystical path. We have said this prior. But the assumption of the small self and the
release of the reliance upon an idea of who and what you are are the simple keys to
comprehending this. And the joy we have in offering the teaching is the realization of our
students and what they will call forth in this manifest world.
Imagine a million voices, all around the globe, lifting in song in this new claim, “I
Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come.” And the agreement to be in vibration that
reiterates its name in language, and tone, and vibration, in the scale of freedom, in the tone
of love embodying the manifest plane—that is what comes when each of you says yes,
because, by nature of your being, you become the liberator of those imprisoned by their
fear. And you awaken those, by nature of your being, who have denied the Divine, the
aspect of the Divine, that has come as them and seeks its acclimation through the
articulation of form.
The division that you experience now in your world can actually be healed by the one
who knows herself in union with her Source. It cannot be healed at the level of division. It
cannot be understood at the level of division. At the level of division, which is the level of
the small self in separation, the mandate is replication, and replication of the old claims
the new as the old, each day you choose it. If you are willing, wherever you are, to be re-
known and re-articulated as the one in union, you create the echo, the vibratory resonance,
that manifests itself as the world before you. Period. Period. Period.
(PAUSE)

Now, ask yourselves these questions: “Am I willing to be re-created and re-known and in
service for the higher well-being, the higher well-being of all? Am I willing to forgive
myself for what I may have chosen to learn through on this plane? Am I willing to make a
new agreement that the choices I make from now on will be made in accordance with the
truth of my being, from the Upper Room?”
You may answer these as you wish, and, as you answer them, understand that the
choice to say yes fulfills itself on the walk of life that you are embarking upon here. You
are met by the circumstances and requirements in service on a daily basis. But do
understand that, as you embody and manifest from the Upper Room, the consequence is
thus: As you do know who you are and what you are and how you serve, as the claim “I
Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come” becomes you, there is no need to be other than
you are. You don’t aspire to goodness. You are not seeking forgiveness for your past sins.
You are not asking for a better this or that. You are encouraging the vibration by being.
And, by being in agreement to the Divine, everything before you is known anew. So, we
have taught you in this text about the responsibility of knowing who you are, and of the
claim of truth, “I Have Come,” that is the announcement of the purview in action as the
Divine in an incarnation singular to you, but of the collective manifest Christ that is here
on this plane in demonstration now.
We will walk with you for some time on this journey. We walk beside you, we walk
before and behind, so that your understanding of your safety in the new landscape is aware
and known by you as you go forth in a new life. And, because we support and herald your
coming to the world before you, we make the way as we can to the benefit of the
individual’s assumption and realization.
Please hear these words: You have never been alone on this journey, nor can you be.
And the isolation that you may have experienced yourself in was the fear of the
reconnection from the small self, who disbelieves she can be worthy of the love of the
Divine. But no one is exempt from the love of the Divine, because love is God, and love is
every particle of every living thing at a level of vibration or assumption.
To behold the world in a new way is only the first step of being the ambassador of
truth that you have each come to be. But this is as far as we may take you at this teaching.
In subsequent texts, we have a mission for the realization, in alchemy, of the manifest
world. But, by saying these words, you would presuppose what their meaning is. So we
will wait for this teaching to complete itself before we bring you the next one.
In our honor, we speak these words to all of our students, wherever you may sit,
wherever these words may be spoken and heard, or read and comprehended. We are with
you now, as we have always been. And, as we walk beside you and before you, in the
Upper Room, we welcome you to the life that is and will always be before you.
This is not the end of the chapter. This is the end of the text. And we are saying this to
Paul. The text that we have dictated is the text that was intended. We congratulate you for
your fortitude, and we thank our students for their presence in the teaching. If we dictate
an epilogue, we will tell you so, and that was in answer to his question.
When we say we complete the text, all we really mean is that the information that has
been articulated here, in noise, in tone, in vibration, in spoken word, in love, and in thanks,
will be claimed again and again and again in each reiteration of the reading. The book you
hold in your hands is alive in love, alive in tone, alive in language, noise, and sound. And,
if you give us permission now, we will claim you in the Kingdom, and say yes to the
learning that now ensues.
We are here. We are here. We are here. And, as we sing your praises, we lift you each
to the new path that we walk with you upon. As you are loved, as you are known, as you
are realized beyond the known in realization, your song will be heard throughout this
plane, in thanks and in love and in union with the Source of all things.
We thank you each, and we say good night. Period. Period. Period.
 Acknowledgments

Dustin Bamberg, Noam Ben-Arie, Tim Chambers, Joan Katherine Cramer, Joel Fotinos,
Amy Hughes, Aubrey Marcus, Jeannette Meek, Victoria Nelson, Noah Perabo, Amy
Perry, Brent Starck, Natalie Sudman, and the Esalen Institute.
Notes
Prologue
1. Paul.
1. The Release of the Known
1. In The Book of Mastery.
2. Paul
2. I Know How I Serve
1. Paul
 Also by Paul Selig
I Am the Word (2010)
The Book of Love and Creation (2012)
The Book of Knowing and Worth (2013)
The Book of Mastery (2016)
The Book of Truth (2017)
The Book of Freedom (2018)
 ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Born in New York City, Paul Selig attended New York University and received his
master’s degree from Yale. A spiritual experience in 1987 left him clairvoyant. Selig is
considered one of the foremost contributors to the field of channeled literature working
today. He offers channeled workshops internationally and teaches regularly at the Esalen
Institute. He served on the faculty of NYU for over twenty-five years and is the former
director of the MFA in Creative Writing Program at Goddard College, where he now
serves on the college’s Board of Trustees. He lives in New York City where he maintains a
private practice as an intuitive. Information on public workshops, online seminars, and
private readings can be found at www.paulselig.com, or sign up for email updates here.
 Thank you for buying this
St. Martin’s Press ebook.

To receive special offers, bonus content,

and info on new releases and other great reads,
sign up for our newsletters.

Or visit us online at
us.macmillan.com/newslettersignup

For email updates on the author, click here.

 Contents

TITLE PAGE

COPYRIGHT NOTICE

FOREWORD BY AUBREY MARCUS

PROLOGUE

PART ONE: THE UPPER ROOM

1. THE RELEASE OF THE KNOWN

2. I KNOW HOW I SERVE

3. THE PREPARATION FOR THE NEW WORLD

4. THE DIVINE AS WILL

5. THE RECLAMATION OF THE DIVINE

6. CLAIMING THE KINGDOM

PART TWO: REALIZATION

7. DELIVERANCE

8. RE-ARTICULATION

9. THE ROAD BEFORE YOU

10. FREEDOM FROM FEAR

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

NOTES

ALSO BY PAUL SELIG

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

COPYRIGHT
 First published in the United States by St. Martin’s Essentials, an imprint of the St. Martin’s Publishing Group
BEYOND THE KNOWN: REALIZATION. Copyright © 2019 by Paul Selig. Foreword copyright © 2019 by Aubrey Marcus.
All rights reserved.
For information, address St. Martin’s Publishing Group, 120 Broadway, New York, NY 10271.
www.stmartins.com
Cover design by Kerri Resnick
Cover photograph of sunset © Aim Saranporn/Shutterstock.com
The Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data is available upon request.
ISBN 978-1-250-20422-6 (trade paperback)
ISBN 978-1-250-20423-3 (ebook)
eISBN 9781250204233
Our eBooks may be purchased in bulk for promotional, educational, or business use. Please contact the Macmillan
Corporate and Premium Sales Department at (800) 221-7945 ext. 5442 or by email at
[email protected].
First Edition: August 2019
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1